AMEDD&S PAM 350-10 New

AMEDDC&S Pamphlet No.
350-10
TRAINING
The Expert Field Medical Badge
(EFMB) Test
T
AF
R
THIS PUBLICATION IS FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY.

D
IT DOES NOT CONTAIN ARMY APPROVED DOCTRINE.
Draft Date 12 October 2006

Effective Date TBD
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

Headquarters, U.S. Army Medical Department Center and School
Fort Sam Houston, Texas 78234-6150
EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE
(A Portrait of Excellence)
The Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB) was designed

as a special skill award for recognition of exceptional
T
competence and outstanding performance by field
AF
medical personnel and approved by the Department
of the Army on 18 June 1965. The Expert Field
R
Medical Badge may be awarded to all officers

D
assigned or detailed to an Army Medical Department

(AMEDD) corps; Army officers in training at the
Uniformed Services University of the Health
Sciences; Army officers enrolled in the Health
Professions Scholarship Program; warrant officers
who have an AMEDD primary Military Occupational
Specialty (MOS) controlled by The Surgeon General;
warrant officer pilots that have a special qualification
identifier "D" (Aeromedical Evacuation Pilot) and are
assigned to an air ambulance unit; and enlisted
personnel who have an AMEDD primary MOS or MOS
18D, this includes all MOSs in the Career
Management Field (CMF) 68.
*AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

HQ, US ARMY MEDICAL DEPARTMENT CENTER AND SCHOOL
Fort Sam Houston, Texas 78234-6150
AMEDDC&S Pamphlet
No. 350-10
TRAINING
THE EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE (EFMB) TEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARA PAGE
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
HISTORY........................................................................................... 1-1 1-1
PURPOSE ......................................................................................... 1-2 1-1
APPLICABILITY................................................................................. 1-3 1-1
REFERENCES .................................................................................. 1-4 1-1
T
EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS ........................ 1-5 1-1
AF
CHAPTER 2. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
THE EFMB......................................................................................... 2-1 2-1
R
ELIGIBILITY.......................................................................................2-2 2-1
PROVISIONS AND AUTHORITIES ................................................... 2-3 2-2
D
FREQUENCY OF EFMB TEST ......................................................... 2-4 2-3

REQUESTING TO CONDUCT THE EFMB TEST ............................. 2-5 2-3
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS.................................................................. 2-6 2-8
EXCEPTION TO POLICY .................................................................. 2-7 2-8
DUTIES.............................................................................................. 2-8 2-10
EFMB TEST CONTROL OFFICE (TCO) SITE REVIEWS................. 2-9 2-17
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................... 2-10 2-18
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS........................................................ 2-11 2-18
PYROTECHNICS, SMOKE, & AMMUNITION REQUIREMENTS ..... 2-12 2-19
SITE REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 2-13 2-20
TRAINING.......................................................................................... 2-14 2-22
REFERENCES .................................................................................. 2-15 2-22
POST TESTING REQUIREMENTS................................................... 2-16 2-23
WRITTEN TEST MATERIALS AND SECURITY................................ 2-17 2-23
EXPERT MEDICAL STREAMER....................................................... 2-18 2-25
EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE COIN ......................................... 2-19 2-25
AWARDING THE EFMB .................................................................... 2-20 2-26
EFMB TCO CONTACT INFORMATION ............................................ 2-21 2-27
*This pamphlet supersedes AMEDDC&S Pamphlet 350-10, 2 Jan 04.

AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CHAPTER 3. SITE ESTABLISHMENT, VALIDATION, AND STANDARDIZATION

SITE ESTABLISHMENT .................................................................... 3-1 3-1
EVALUATOR AND CADRE PREPARATION..................................... 3-2 3-2
CONDUCT VALIDATION................................................................... 3-3 3-2
CONDUCT STANDARDIZATION ...................................................... 3-4 3-6
CHAPTER 4. CONDUCT EFMB TESTING

REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 4-1 4-1
CLARIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE STEPS/MEASURES .......... 4-2 4-1
TEST PERIOD .................................................................................. 4-3 4-1
TRAINING.......................................................................................... 4-4 4-1
CANDIDATE EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 4-5 4-2
BATTLEFIELD SCENARIO AND COMBAT LANE CONCEPTS ....... 4-6 4-2
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS ....................................................... 4-7 4-4
CHANGES ......................................................................................... 4-8 4-4
REBUTTALS AND APPEALS ............................................................ 4-9 4-4
SCORE SHEETS .............................................................................. 4-10 4-6
WRITTEN TEST ................................................................................ 4-11 4-9
LAND NAVIGATION TASKS.............................................................. 4-12 4-15
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS.............................. 4-13
T 4-17
MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS.......................... 4-14 4-20
AF
COMMUNICATION TASKS .............................................................. 4-15 4-23
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS................................................................ 4-16 4-26
FOOT MARCH................................................................................... 4-17 4-28
R
CHAPTER 5. EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL COMPETITION (EFMC)

D
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................... 5-1 5-1

EFMC TESTING ................................................................................ 5-2 5-1
HOSTING THE EFMC ....................................................................... 5-3 5-2
COMPETITOR ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS ................................ 5-4 5-2
COMPETITOR PREREQUISITES .................................................... 5-5 5-3
PROVISIONS AND AUTHORITIES ................................................... 5-6 5-3
COMPETITOR REGISTRATION ....................................................... 5-7 5-6
COMPETITOR EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS ............................... 5-8 5-8
EFMC EVENTS ................................................................................. 5-9 5-8
SCORING SYSTEM .......................................................................... 5-10 5-11
CHANGES ......................................................................................... 5-11 5-13
APPENDIX A: REFERENCES ....................................................................................A-1
APPENDIX B: REPRODUCIBLE SCORE SHEETS AND REBUTTAL SHEETS ........B-1

LAND NAVIGATION TASKS SCORE SHEETS ................................................. B-1-1
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS SCORE SHEETS .................. B-2-1
MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS SCORE SHEETS.............. B-3-1
COMMUNICATION TASKS SCORE SHEETS ................................................... B-4-1
ii
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS SCORE SHEETS.................................................... B-5-1

HANDS-ON TASK REBUTTAL SHEET .............................................................. B-6-1
WRITTEN TEST REBUTTAL SHEET ................................................................. B-7-1
APPENDIX C: GRAPHIC TRAINING AIDS ............................................................... C-1

GTA 08-01-004 (MEDEVAC REQUEST FORM) ................................................ C-1-1
GTA 03-06-008 (NBC WARNING AND REPORTING SYSTEM)........................ C-2-1
GTA 09-12-001 (UNEXPLODED ORDINANCE PROCEDURES)....................... C-3-1
APPENDIX D: REPRODUCIBLE FORMS AND CERTIFICATES .............................. D-1

AMEDDC&S FORM 1200-R (EFMB TESTING STATISTICS) ............................ D-1-1
AMEDDC&S FORM 1232-R (EFMB QUALIFICATION RECORD) ..................... D-2-1
CERTIFICATES OF VERIFICATION AND DESTRUCTION............................... D-3-1
APPENDIX E: EFMB PLANNING MATERIAL.............................................................E-1

EFMB SCHEDULE EXAMPLES ......................................................................... E-1-1
EFMB COMBAT TESTING LANE EXAMPLES................................................... E-2-1
EFMB TASK TIME LIMITS AND ESTIMATES.................................................... E-3-1
EFMB PERSONNEL (NONCANDIDATE) PLANNING........................................ E-4-1
EFMB PERSONNEL (CADRE) PLANNING........................................................ E-5-1
EFMB PERSONNEL AND TIME PLANNING MATRICES .................................. E-6-1
T
EFMB CLASS VIII PLANNING MATRIX ............................................................. E-7-1
AF
EFMB SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT PLANNING MATRIX ............................... E-8-1
EFMB VEHICLE, TRAILER, AND GENERATOR PLANNING ............................ E-9-1
EFMB PLANNING CHECKLISTS......................................................................E-10-1
R
PLANNING EFMB TRAINING ...........................................................................E-11-1

D
APPENDIX F: GLOSSARY ......................................................................................... F-1
iii
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
AF
R
D
iv
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
1-1. HISTORY. This issue publishes a revision of this publication. Because the
publication has been extensively revised, the changed portions have not been
highlighted.
1-2. PURPOSE. This publication establishes policies, procedures, and standards for
awarding the Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB). The EFMB was established in June
1965 as a Department of the Army (DA) special skill award for the recognition of
exceptional competence and outstanding performance by field medical personnel.
Army Regulation (AR) 600-8-22 authorizes the EFMB as a special skill badge.
1-3. APPLICABILITY. This publication applies to all military personnel Armywide with
an Army Medical Department (AMEDD) area of concentration (AOC) or military
occupational specialty (MOS).
1-4. REFERENCES. References are listed in Appendix A.

T
1-5. EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS. Abbreviations and special
AF
terms used in this publication are explained in the glossary.
R
D
1-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
1-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CHAPTER 2
ADMINISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1 THE EFMB.
a. The EFMB is a special skill badge authorized by Army Regulation (AR) 600-8-22.
Made of oxidized silver, the badge consists of a litter, placed horizontally, behind a
caduceus with the cross of the Geneva Convention at the junction of the wings.
b. The EFMB test measures the individual medical Soldier's physical fitness, mental
toughness, and ability to perform to standards of excellence in a broad spectrum of
critical medical and Soldier skills. The purpose of the EFMB is to-
(1) Recognize qualified AMEDD personnel who demonstrate a high degree of

professional skill, stamina, and proficiency.
(2) Recognize medical personnel who can expertly perform combat medical and
Soldier tasks that support medical care in a simulated combat environment.
T
(3) Promote esprit de corps. It provides an incentive for greater effort by AMEDD
personnel and a badge of excellence that is recognized worldwide by the total Army.
AF
(4) Enhance individual training programs in units by providing a difficult, yet
attainable, goal for which any medical Soldier can strive.
R
2-2. ELIGIBILITY.
D
a. The EFMB is awarded to DA personnel who meet the following requirements and
pass the EFMB test in accordance with (IAW) the standards in this publication. Other
service and allied candidates must be either medical personnel or serving in
comparable medical positions.
(1) Enlisted personnel with an AMEDD primary MOS or MOS 18D. This
includes all MOSs in the 68-career management field (CMF).
(2) Warrant officers with an AMEDD primary MOS controlled by the Surgeon
General. Warrant officer pilots with a “D” special qualifications identifier (Aeromedical
Evacuation Pilot) and assigned to an air ambulance unit are also eligible.
(3) All commissioned officers assigned or detailed to an AMEDD corps. This

includes Army officers in training at the Uniformed Services University of the Health
Sciences. It also includes Army officers enrolled in the Health Professions Scholarship
Program.
(4) Other service and allied candidates must be either medical personnel or
2-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
serving in comparable medical positions.
(5) Individuals working in a medical facility or medical unit who do not meet the
criteria stated above are not eligible to be awarded the EFMB. They may go through
EFMB standardization and testing, but no orders may be issued awarding them the
EFMB.
b. To be eligible for the EFMB, candidates must meet prerequisites before the start
date for the EFMB test. Candidates must -
(1) Volunteer for EFMB testing.
(2) Be recommended by their unit commander.
(3) Be physically and mentally prepared to cope with the rigorous demands of
the EFMB test and trained in the prevention of heat related injuries. Soldiers with
medical profiles prohibiting the performance of any EFMB tested event are ineligible to
compete.
(4) Qualify as marksman or higher with their assigned weapon within one year of
the test-end date. T
AF
(5) Score a minimum of 180 points on the Army Physical Fitness Test (APFT),
with a minimum of 60 points in each event, within six months of the test-end date.
Alternate events are not authorized. Soldiers with medical profiles prohibiting
R
participation in any of the three events are ineligible to compete, with the exception of
Wounded Warriors who are authorized to take an alternate event.
D
(6) Possess a current cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certification. The

certification must be valid through the test-end date.
(7) Other service and allied candidates must meet the Army’s APFT and weapon
qualification standards.
(8) Perform all tasks professionally and ethically IAW this publication and the
Army values.
2-3. PROVISIONS AND AUTHORITIES.
a. The Surgeon General is the Army staff agent for the EFMB Program.
b. The Commander, Army Medical Department Center and School (AMEDDC&S) is

the executive agent for the management of the EFMB Program.
c. Commanders of the following types of units, in the grade of lieutenant colonel or

above, are qualified to administer the EFMB test as a host unit:
2-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Active Army, US Army Reserve, and Army National Guard table of
organization and equipment and table of distribution and allowances medical units.
(2) Sustainment brigade commanders.
(3) Separate regiments and brigades having the resources and facilities to
conduct all phases of the test as explained in this publication.
d. Units who are requesting to administer the EFMB test and are deployed must
meet further requirements. Their request must be additionally approved by the senior
medical commander in the deployed area.
2-4. FREQUENCY OF EFMB TEST. The EFMB test uses standardized performance
steps/measures to gauge a Soldier's ability to perform critical individual skills. Thus,
every medical Soldier should have the opportunity to take it. There is no time limit that
a Soldier must wait in between test sites. A candidate may go through EFMB testing
only once each unit testing cycle. Units may conduct EFMB testing as often as desired.
2-5. REQUESTING TO CONDUCT THE EFMB TEST. T

a. To host EFMB testing, the unit must have a minimum of 50 eligible candidates.
AF
Commanders not having 50 eligible candidates are encouraged to consolidate testing
with organizations on the same or adjacent installations. However, units in remote
locations having fewer than 50 eligible candidates may request an exception to policy.
R
b. EFMB testing requires a large commitment of equipment and personnel.

D
Therefore, every effort should be made to conserve resources and allow maximum
participation of qualified personnel. Figures 2-1 and 2-2 list questions that will assist
units in assessing their capability to host EFMB testing. Appendix E provides more
information to assist in planning EFMB testing.
c. The host commander submits a request to conduct EFMB testing and receive test
materials to the EFMB Test Control Office (TCO) (see paragraph 2-21), not later than
120 days (180 days for US Army Reserve and Army National Guard units) prior to the
anticipated test-start date. The memorandum must be submitted IAW the same format
as the example in Figure 2-3. It may be submitted electronically to the EFMB TCO (see
paragraph 2-21).
d. Deployed units who are requesting to host EFMB testing must submit the
following to the EFMB TCO (see paragraph 2-21) in conjunction with their request:
(1) Request concept approval of lane setup, scenario, and tasks on each lane
and tested event.
(2) Detailed answers to Figures 2-1 and 2-2. This information is necessary for
2-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
the EFMB TCO to better assist the organization and brief the Commander,
AMEDDC&S.
(3) Approval memorandum from the Coalition Forces Land Component

Command (CFLCC) and senior medical commander in the deployed area.
(4) Request to administer the EFMB test IAW paragraph 2-5c.
(5) Provide additional information pertinent to the planning and execution of an

EFMB at their location as requested by the EFMB TCO.
Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB Testing

Is your organization prepared to put the time and effort into hosting an EFMB?
Is there available time (approximately 20 days) in your unit’s schedule to conduct all
phases of hosting an EFMB?
Does that timeframe allow you to meet the time suspense for requesting to host an
EFMB?
Is there conflicting missions that would hinder conducting an EFMB?
Does your organization possess or have the ability to obtain the necessary equipment,
vehicles, supplies, and personnel to conduct an EFMB?
T
Are there training areas available to conduct an EFMB during your anticipated EFMB
test dates?
AF
Does your organization have enough EFMB awardees assigned and available to
evaluate the Tactical Combat Casualty Care tasks, to serve as the Officer In Charge
(OIC)/NonCommisioned Officer In Charge (NCOIC) of each Combat Testing Lane
R
(CTL), and for the EFMB Test Board? (These are the minimum)
Will you have the support of your command to host an EFMB?
D
How many candidates can you support for EFMB Testing?
Figure 2-1. Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB Testing.
2-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Additional Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB Testing

While Deployed
Where do you intend on hosting the EFMB?
Has your organization ever hosted EFMB testing? When? Where?
Is your organization Active Army, National Guard, or Army Reserve? Location of home
station?
Have any of your key leaders (involved in the actual execution of the EFMB) ever been
the test board chairperson, member of the test board, OIC or NCOIC of an EFMB?
What positions? When and where?
Do any of your key leaders (involved in the actual execution of the EFMB) have
experience being a lane NCOIC/OIC? When and where?
How many of your evaluators have served as EFMB evaluators before?
How many EFMB awardees will you have to serve as evaluators? (NOTE: All
evaluators on the Tactical Combat Casualty Care tasks, EFMB CTL OIC/NCOICs, and
also your test board members must all be awardees of the EFMB.)
Are the required vehicles and evacuation platforms, IAW this publication, to conduct the
Medical and Casualty Evacuation tasks available for EFMB testing and won’t conflict
with normal operations?
Are enough personnel available to serve as EFMB support/noncandidates without
T
affecting normal operations?
AF
How and where will land navigation be conducted? What type of terrain is it?
Where will the foot march be conducted?
Is there adequate land available to establish realistic lanes IAW this publication?
R
Safety/Risk Management/THREATCON: Have all safety and security issues been

addressed and planned for?
D
Will your organization sponsor the EFMB TCO in obtaining country clearance, other
required logistical and administrative support, and assisting them in getting into theatre
and to your location to conduct validation of your EFMB testing?
How far up the chain has your intent to conduct an EFMB been briefed? To whom and
at what level? Did they approve and do you have it in writing?
Are the risks associated with conducting an EFMB at your location worth the reward?
Figure 2-2. Additional Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB

Testing While Deployed.
2-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMB Planning Active Army Unit Army Reserve and Deployed

Material in (Not Deployed) National Guard Army Unit
Appendix E
EFMB SCHEDULE
EXAMPLES
EFMB COMBAT
TESTING LANE
EXAMPLES
EFMB TASK TIME
LIMITS AND
ESTIMATES
EFMB
PERSONNEL
(NONCANDIDATE)
PLANNING
EFMB
PERSONNEL
(CADRE)
PLANNING T
CLASS VIII
AF
PLANNING
MATRIX
EFMB
R
PERSONNEL AND
TIME PLANNING
D
MATRICES
SUPPLIES AND
EQUIPMENT
PLANNING
MATRIX
VEHICLE,
TRAILER, AND
GENERATOR
PLANNING
EFMB PLANNING
CHECKLISTS
PLANNING EFMB
TRAINING
NOTE: The EFMB host unit should review each item in Appendix E and check the
EFMB TCO Website for updates to assist them in planning their EFMB.
Table 2-1. EFMB Planning Material Checklist.
2-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

ORGANIZATION NAME/TITLE
STANDARDIZED STREET ADDRESS
ADDITIONAL ADDRESS INFORMATION
CITY, STATE, AND ZIP + 4 CODE
REPLY TO
ATTENTION OF
OFFICE SYMBOL Date
MEMORANDUM FOR Academy of Health Sciences (MCCS-HTE), 1750 Greeley Road, Suite 115, Fort Sam
Houston, TX 78234-6122
SUBJECT: Request for Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB) Test Site Approval and Test Materials
1. Reference US Army Medical Department Center and School Pamphlet 350-10, Expert Field Medical Badge
(EFMB) Test.
2. We have the personnel and logistical resources to conduct all aspects of EFMB testing and would like your
approval to administer the EFMB test as the host unit in accordance with the above reference, para 2-5.
3. The following information is provided:
a. Validation dates:
T
AF
b. Standardization dates (include candidate inprocessing date):
c. Testing dates:
R
d. Location of field test site:
e. Number of Soldiers projected to begin EFMB testing:

D
f. EFMB test board chairperson:

(1) Rank, name:
(2) Address (include street address, building number, and room number):
(3) Telephone number (DSN and commercial):
(4) Fax number:
(5) E-mail address:
g. Officer/NCO in charge:
(1) Rank, name:
(2) Address (include street address, building number, and room number):
(3) Telephone number (DSN and commercial):
(4) Fax number:
(5) E-mail address:
4. Point of contact for this action is CPT Hall at (DSN and commercial).
JOHN D. DOE
LTC, MC
Commanding
Figure 2-3. Request for EFMB Test Site Approval and Test Materials.
2-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
2-6. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS.
a. The following is the basic sequence of events in an EFMB test cycle:
(1) Request to conduct EFMB testing.
(2) Plan the EFMB.
(3) Site establishment.
(4) Preparation of evaluators and cadre.
(5) Conduct validation.
(6) Conduct standardization.
(7) Conduct testing.
(8) Conduct recovery and post EFMB requirements.

T
b. Validation, standardization, and testing must be conducted in that sequence.
AF
2-7. EXCEPTION TO POLICY.
a. Every effort will be made to preserve test integrity and continuity. Exception to
R
policy requests concerning test content should be carefully scrutinized prior to

submission. Requests for an exception to policy are subject to approval.
D
b. To request an exception to policy, the test board chairperson will prepare the
exception to policy IAW the format in Figure 2-4 and submit it to the EFMB TCO (see
paragraph 2-21). The content in Figure 2-4 must be included if requested via email.
c. The request for exceptions to policy must arrive at the TCO no later than (NLT):
(1) 45 days prior to the anticipated testing start date for US Active Army units.
(2) 90 days prior to the anticipated testing start date for US Army Reserve and
Army National Guard units.
d. The EFMB TCO will provide a written approval or disapproval memorandum or e-

mail to the test board chairperson within three days after receipt.
e. The unit hosting EFMB testing must provide all candidates with a copy of any
approved exceptions to policy NLT 30 days prior to the test start date. This will allow
the candidates to modify their training in preparing for EFMB testing.
2-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

REPLY TO
ATTENTION OF
OFFICE SYMBOL Date
MEMORANDUM FOR Academy of Health Sciences (MCCS-HTE), 1750 Greeley Road, Suite 115, Fort
Sam Houston, TX 78234-6122
SUBJECT: Request for Exception to Policy
1. Reference US Army Medical Department Center and School Pamphlet 350-10, Expert Field Medical
Badge (EFMB) Test.
2. We are requesting an exception to policy for the following:
a. Applicable Critical Performance Area:
b. Applicable Task:
T
AF
c. Exception to policy is required for:
d. Implications on EFMB testing if not approved:

R
e. Other comments concerning exception to policy:

D
3. Point of contact for this action is CPT Hall at (DSN and commercial).
JOHN D. DOE
LTC, MC
Commanding
Figure 2-4. Request for Exception to Policy.
2-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
2-8. DUTIES.
a. Commander, AMEDDC&S.
(1) Exercises approval authority as to who may administer EFMB testing and
whether or not a particular program is approved.
(2) Standardizes EFMB testing Armywide.
(3) Develops and maintains the EFMB requirements.
(4) Selects EFMB test control officers (TCOs). The TCOs must hold the rank of
sergeant first class (SFC) or higher and be an awardee of the EFMB.
(5) Funds trips for validation, standardization, and/or test review site visits.
(6) Selects host units for validation, standardization, and/or testing review. All
units approved to administer the EFMB test are subject to a validation, standardization,
and/or testing review.
(7) Grants exceptions to policy.

T
AF
b. EFMB TCO.
(1) Manages the EFMB Program and the Expert Field Medical Competition
R
(EFMC) for the Commander, AMEDDC&S.

D
(2) As the representative of the Commander, AMEDDC&S, observes units

selected for validation, standardization, and/or testing review to ensure that they comply
with the standards in this publication.
(3) Coordinates, provides guidance, and test packages to approved host units.
(4) Enforces the standards in this publication and reports deviations to the test
board chairperson (see paragraph 2-9). Also recommends changes or specific
corrective actions during the conduct of the test. The TCO report is exempt from
management information control requirements IAW AR 335-15, paragraph 5-2-g.
(5) Submits a report of test deviation to the Commander, AMEDDC&S, in cases

of unresolved test standard deficiencies.
(6) Serves as the website administrator for the EFMB TCO Website and
maintains and updates the EFMB information. Paragraph 2-21 provides the location of
the EFMB TCO Website and contact information.
c. Host commander.
2-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Requests to conduct the EFMB (see paragraph 2 -5).
(2) Appoints a field grade AMEDD officer who is an EFMB awardee as the test
board chairperson. This individual is responsible for conducting the EFMB test.
(3) Establishes an EFMB test board. The test board will consist of three to five
AMEDD officers or noncommissioned officers in the rank of SFC or higher (including the
test board chairperson). Test board members must be awardees of the EFMB.
(4) Coordinates administrative, logistical, and medical support for the test.
(5) Assigns lane officer in charge (OIC) and/or noncommissioned officer in

charge (NCOIC) who will be responsible for the operation of each of the lanes. All lane
OICs/NCOICs of Combat Testing Lanes (CTLs) must be awardees of the EFMB.
(6) Assigns evaluators who are subject matter experts on the tasks they will be
grading. When possible, awardees of the EFMB should be utilized. At a minimum, the
evaluators of tactical combat casualty care (TCCC) tasks must be awardees of the
EFMB. Non-AMEDD subject matter experts may be utilized as evaluators on other
T
tasks, but it is recommended that they be in the rank of SGT or above, if possible.
AF
(7) Ensures that risk management requirements are planned and executed
during all phases of the EFMB IAW guidance from the Commander, AMEDDC&S and
Field Manual (FM) 5-19.
R
(8) Presents the EFMB in an appropriate awards ceremony (see paragraph 2-

D
20).
d. Test board chairperson.
(1) Conducts a by-lane analysis of previous EFMB tests at the installation to

identify weaknesses that require corrections or further candidate preparation. The
EFMB TCO may assist the test board chairperson regarding Armywide issues and
results. This will help to ensure a better testing environment and utilization of resources.
(2) Submits concept briefing of lane setup, scenarios, and tasks on each lane
and tested event for approval from the EFMB TCO not later than 60 days (120 days for
US Army Reserve and Army National Guard units) prior to the anticipated test-start
date. An example concept briefing is available on the EFMB TCO Website.
(3) Conducts validation, standardization, and testing IAW the standards in this
publication (see Chapters 3 and 4).
(4) Receives, processes, secures, and safeguards the written test (WT) packet
from the EFMB TCO (see paragraph 2-17).
2-11
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(5) Maintains a file containing the EFMB orders for all test board members, lane
OICs/NCOICs of CTLs, and TCCC task evaluators (at a minimum).
(6) Maintains a file for each candidate that includes, at a minimum, a copy of the
Soldier's-
(a) Commander's Recommendation/Certification Memorandum.
(b) Army Physical Fitness Test (APFT) scorecard.
(c) Weapons qualification (WQ) scorecard.
(d) Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certification card or memorandum.
(7) Conducts evaluator and lane validations to include 12-mile foot march and
land navigation courses prior to standardization and test weeks IAW Chapter 3. The
test board chairperson must be present during the entire validation process. Ensures
that CTLs are established IAW Chapter 3.
T
(8) Ensures all test board members are present during the entire validation
process and that at least two test board members are onsite during standardization and
AF
testing.
R
during all phases of the EFMB.

D
(10) Chairs the EFMB rebuttal board (see paragraph 4-9).
(11) Removes candidates that compromise test integrity.
(12) Establishes an EFMB operations center to aid in command and control.
(13) May reproduce any part of this publication to facilitate the conduct of EFMB
testing.
(14) Uses the example EFMB planning material checklist shown in Table 2-1 to
assist in planning the EFMB (see Appendix E). The EFMB test board chairperson
should modify the material as necessary to suit the needs of the host unit.
(15) Forwards a copy of the EFMB testing statistics on AMEDDC&S Form 1200
to the EFMB TCO, via email within three days after the test-end date.
(16) Forwards a copy of orders on candidates awarded the EFMB to the EFMB
TCO, within 1 week after the test-end date.
2-12
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(17) Forwards candidate test results recorded on AMEDDC&S Form 1232-R to

the candidate’s commander and retains a copy on file. A copy for reproduction
purposes is located in Appendix D of this publication and on the EFMB TCO Website.
(18) Submits the EFMB database used to track the candidates’ performance to
the EFMB TCO, via e-mail within 3 days after the test-end date.
(19) Submits an after action report to the EFMB TCO, within 1 month after the
test-end date IAW FM 7-1 and TC 25-20. Notable issues will be utilized for future EFMB
testing improvements. Copies of all rebuttals will also be submitted to the EFMB TCO.
e. Test board members.
(1) Enforces the standards in this publication.
(2) Assists test board chairperson in conducting evaluator and lane validations to
include 12-mile foot march and land navigation courses prior to standardization and
testing. Ensures that CTLs are established IAW paragraph 3-1. All test board members
must be present during the entire validation process as required in Chapter 3.
(3) Participates in rebuttal board proceedings, ensuring fair adjudication based

T
upon the standards in this publication (see paragraph 4-9).
AF
(4) Two test board members, at a minimum, must be on site during
standardization and testing rotating among test areas to reinforce standardization and
R
troubleshoot areas identified by reoccurring rebuttals.

D
(5) Administers the WT (see paragraph 4-11).
f. Lane OICs/NCOICs.
(1) Enforces the standards in this publication.
(2) Ensures that the lane is established IAW paragraph 3-1. The test board
chairperson will provide lane concept and flow.
(3) Conducts internal training of evaluators to ensure they and their applicable
lanes are prepared for validation. Ensures that evaluators and lanes are validated by
the test board prior to standardization and test week (see paragraph 3-3).
(4) Requires candidates to complete all tasks on a lane prior to informing them
of the results.
(5) Ensures that all personnel, unit equipment, and supplies to run the lane are
on hand and that noncandidates/casualties have been briefed and validated on their
responsibilities, and perform their roles in a professional manner.
2-13
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(6) Attends rebuttal board proceedings when the board is considering a task for
which a lane evaluator was responsible.
(7) Ensures that risk management requirements are planned and executed.
g. Evaluators.
(1) Evaluates all candidates IAW the standards in this publication.
(2) Requires candidates to complete all tasks on a lane prior to the lane
OIC/NCOIC informing them of the results. Evaluators cannot provide results.
(3) Reports candidate integrity violations to the lane OIC/NCOIC and test board
chairperson.
(4) Attends rebuttal board proceedings when the test board is considering a task
for which the evaluator was responsible.
(5) Ensures that noncandidates and casualties have been briefed and validated
on their responsibilities and perform their roles in a professional manner.
T
AF
h. Unit commanders.
(1) Recommends only those candidates who volunteer for EFMB testing and
R
meets the eligibility requirements in paragraph 2-2. Commanders should carefully

evaluate potential EFMB candidates before recommending them for EFMB testing.
D
They should remember that each candidate awarded the EFMB will represent the
standards of the EFMB for the remainder of their military career.
(2) Arranges for the APFT, WQ, and CPR certification requirements and provide
a copy of the results to the test board chairperson.
(3) Prepares and submits a Commander’s Recommendation/Certification

Memorandum for his candidates to the test board chairperson (see Figure 2-6).
(4) Conducts EFMB training and preparation in advance of EFMB testing.

Standardization conducted at the EFMB testing site does not fulfill the requirement of
the commander to conduct EFMB training to prepare the candidates.
(5) Provides candidates with a copy of this publication, references listed in

paragraph 2-15, and EFMB training material. All are available on the EFMB Website.
(6) Ensures that candidates are physically and mentally prepared to cope with
the rigorous demands of EFMB testing to include the 12-mile foot march IAW FM 21-18
and trained in the prevention of heat-related injuries IAW the U.S. Army Center for
2-14
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Health Promotion and Preventive Medicine (http://chppm-www.apgea.army.mil/heat/).
(7) Ensures that candidates report to the EFMB site with all required equipment.
Table 2-2 lists the equipment required for testing purposes. A duffle bag with lock
should also be brought to hold items necessary for sustainment during the candidates’
time at the EFMB site (i.e., sleeping bag, personal hygiene items, towel). The host unit
will provide a packing list of additional items required or suggested (see paragraph 4-5).
Item Quantity Item Quantity

Worn Carried: (continued)
Uniform, Battle Dress or Army 1 set Paper, M8 1 book
Combat
Boots, Combat 1 pair Pen 1
Helmet, Ballistic with Cover 1 Pencil, Mechanical 1
Socks 1 pair Rucksack with Frame 1
Tags, Identification 1 set Suspenders, Individual 1
Equipment
T-shirt, BDU or ACU 1
Underwear 1 Placed in Rucksack
Watch 1 Bag, Waterproof 1
Boots, Combat 1
Carried T Gloves, CBRN Rubber 1 pair
Belt, Individual 1 Jacket, Chemical Protective 1
AF
Canteen, Water Plastic 2 T-shirt, BDU or ACU 1
Card, Identification 1 Liner, CBRN Gloves 1 pair
Case, First Aid 1 Overshoes, Rubber 1 pair
Case, Small Arms 2 Parka, Wet Weather 1
R
Compass, Lensatic 1 Poncho 1

Cover, Canteen 2 Protractor 1
D
Cup, Canteen Water 2 Socks 1

Flashlight with Red and Green or Blue 1 Trousers, Chemical Protective 1
Lens and Batteries
Kit, M291 Skin Decontamination 2 kits Trousers, Wet Weather 1
Mask, Protective with Carrier 1 Light Stick, Chemical (Green or 1
Yellow)
M16/M4 Series Rifle/Carbine with 1 Uniform, Battle Dress or Army 1 set
Sling, (2) Magazines, and Blank Combat
Adapter
Notepad 1 Underwear 1
NOTE 1: The terms rucksack, light fighter pack, and ALICE pack may be used interchangeably.
Current issued Table of Allowance (CTA) 50-900 may be used in lieu of rucksack and load carrying
equipment (LCE). A water hydration system may be substituted for the 2nd canteen, cup and
carrier.
NOTE 2: The protective mask, with carrier, and load-bearing vest/equipment are carried on the
person as outlined in Technical Manual (TM) 3-4240-300-10-2.
NOTE 3: The M8 paper and M291 Skin Decon Kit are no longer required after the applicable
Warrior Skills tasks are tested.
Table 2-2. Required Candidate Equipment for EFMB Testing.
2-15
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

REPLY TO
ATTENTION OF
OFFICE SYMBOL Date
MEMORANDUM FOR Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB) Test Board Chairperson, Host Unit Name
SUBJECT: EFMB Test Candidate Recommendation/Certification
1. Reference US Army Medical Department Center and School Pamphlet 350-10, Expert Field Medical
Badge (EFMB) Test, dated X XXXX 2006.
2. I recommend the following candidates for EFMB testing, acknowledging that training and fitness of
Soldiers are a commander’s responsibility. I verify the following are true:
a. All candidates have volunteered for testing.

T
b. Candidates completed the Army Physical Fitness Test (APFT), and weapons qualification (WQ)
and are cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certified.
AF
c. Candidates are trained in the prevention of heat related injuries, and are physically and mentally fit
to cope with the rigorous demands of EFMB testing.
R
d. Candidates were provided the necessary training materials, references (AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10,
STP 8-91W15-SM-TG, FM 4-25.12, ST 4-02.46, and STP 21-1-SMCT), and instruction as part of an
D
EFMB training program that began Day Month Year.
RANK, NAME, AND MOS/ WQ DATE APFT DATE CPR CERT FITNESS/
SSN AOC SCORE SCORE DATE HEAT PREV TNG
CPT Smith, Rob 70H 9 Nov 04 15 Nov 04 4 Dec 04 Yes

XXX-XX-XXXX Expert 250
SFC Jones, Mark 91W 10 Nov 04 15 Nov 04 1 Nov 04 Yes

XXX-XX-XXXX Sharpshooter 275
SPC Santos, Jose 91E 9 Nov 04 15 Nov 04 3 Jan 05 Yes

XXX-XX-XXXX Expert 300
3. Point of contact for memorandum is the undersigned at DSN XXX-XXXX or Civilian XXX-XXXX.
THOMAS A. JONES
CPT, MS
Commanding
Figure 2-5. Commander’s Recommendation/Certification Memorandum.
2-16
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
2-9. EFMB TCO SITE REVIEWS.
a. Review of Hosting Units. Units approved to conduct EFMB testing are subject to
a validation, standardization, and/or testing review. The Commander, AMEDDC&S
holds the responsibility for standardizing EFMB testing and reserves the right to conduct
reviews of selected units during the unit’s administration of EFMB testing.
b. EFMB Test Control Officers. The EFMB TCO conducts validation,

standardization, and/or testing site reviews to ensure that the host unit conducts all
phases of the EFMB IAW the standards in this publication.
(1) Upon arrival, the EFMB TCO identifies himself to the test board chairperson,
receives any updates to previous correspondence, provides guidance on any issues,
and receives a site orientation.
(2) Observes selected units during the EFMB validation, standardization, and/or
testing to determine if the process complies with the standards outlined in this
publication. The EFMB TCO validates the host unit by observing some or all aspects of
the EFMB and will not interfere with standardization or testing unless a deviation is
observed.
T
AF
(3) Reports all observed discrepancies from EFMB test standards to the local
EFMB test board chairperson for correction. The EFMB TCO may also recommend
changes or specific corrective action during the conduct of the test. (The TCO report is
R
exempt from management information control requirements IAW AR 335-15, paragraph

5-2g.) If necessary, the EFMB TCO may halt standardization or testing until the
D
deviation is resolved.
(4) Submits a report of test deviation for any unresolved discrepancies from
EFMB test standards through the test board chairperson to the Commander,
AMEDDC&S. Candidates awaiting final evaluations of unresolved test deviations can
complete the EFMB test events; however, the unit cannot award the EFMB until all
issues have been resolved.
(5) Submits a report of the observed discrepancies to the test board chairperson
or the next senior commander within 15 days.
c. Test Board Chairperson’s Receipt of Report. The test board chairperson receives
the TCO report of test deviation. Within 15 days of receiving the report, the test board
chairperson submits a report through his next higher level of command to the
Commander, AMEDDC&S.
d. Commander, AMEDDC&S Decision. Upon receipt of the EFMB test board

chairperson’s report and the report of test deviation from the EFMB TCO, the
2-17
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Commander, AMEDDC&S, decides what to do about the discrepancy and informs the
testing unit commander.
2-10. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS.
a. Personnel requirements for administering the EFMB test vary. The number of
candidates tested, concept of operations, layout and proximity of testing areas, and the
organization’s capabilities are the major contributing factors. The following are the
major groups of personnel required for conducting an EFMB.
(1) Test Board. Consists of three to five test board members including the test
board chairperson. Perform duties as prescribed in paragraph 2-8 and as directed.
(2) Lane OICs and/or NCOICs. An OIC and/or NCOIC for each of the following is
required: Combat testing lanes, land navigation, and foot march. Perform duties as
prescribed in paragraph 2-8 and as directed.
(3) Evaluators. Serve as evaluators on all EFMB tested tasks. Perform duties as
prescribed in paragraph 2-8 and as directed.
(4) Non-candidates. Serve as casualties, litter bearers, and in other roles on

T
CTLs (i.e. contaminated Soldier when removing JSLIST). Perform duties as directed.
AF
(5) Support Personnel. Serve as opposing forces (OPFOR), operations support
(i.e., supply and meal support), vehicle drivers, medical coverage support, and other
R
duties as directed.
D
(6) Operations Center. Normally consists of an EFMB OIC, EFMB NCOIC,

operations center NCOIC, operations center staff, platoon sergeants for the candidates,
and other duties as directed.
b. Mannequins and simulated casualty mannequin training devices are authorized

as casualties on litters, including the SKED, as long as they meet the weight
requirement (140 to 180 pounds) and are wearing a military uniform. They are also
authorized for use during the one- and two-person carries or drags and on the
extrication tasks, only if the casualty is intended to be unconscious.
c. Appendix E provides information to assist with planning personnel requirements

to host EFMB testing.
2-11. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS.
a. Equipment. Quantities vary greatly depending on the number of candidates

scheduled for testing, concept of operations, assigned equipment, and the
organizational capabilities. Detailed example logistical spreadsheets are available on
the EFMB website to assist the host unit in planning their EFMB.
2-18
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
b. Vehicles. Vehicle requirements for administering the EFMB test vary. The
number of candidates tested, concept of operations, layout and proximity of testing
areas, and the organization’s capabilities are the major contributing factors. The
number of vehicles for transporting personnel and equipment is dependant on the
location and proximity of the various sites involved in the EFMB. Also, the number of
personnel requiring transport plays a great role in planning vehicle assets. Buses may
be utilized to eliminate making numerous shuttles of vehicles.
c. Appendix E provides information to assist with planning equipment, vehicle and

other logistical requirements to host EFMB testing.
2-12. PYROTECHNICS, SMOKE, AND AMMUNITION REQUIREMENTS.
a. The creation of a realistic simulated combat environment is vital to EFMB testing.

The utilization of pyrotechnics, smoke, and other items creates the battlefield scenario
for the candidates to be tested on.
b. Quantities vary depending on the number of candidates scheduled for testing and
the concept of operations. Table 2-3 is a recommended basic load of pyrotechnics per
candidate with the assumption that he makes it through the entire test cycle. Numbers
T
are based on utilization of candidate, evaluators, and OPFOR. They are not inclusive to
AF
rounds required if a weapons qualification range is going to be conducted at the EFMB
testing site.
R
(1) Candidates are given blank rounds to fill a minimum of one magazine before
the start of each lane that has opposing force activity.
D
(2) Pyrotechnics will be utilized during the CTLs. The specific types and
quantities are dependent on the concept of operations and availability. They will not be
used on the land navigation course or the 12-mile foot march.
c. If pyrotechnics quantities are limited, the utilization of a public address (PA)

system with battle field sounds, automatic weapon simulators available from the local
Training Aid Support Center (TASC), smoke machines, and other methods are
recommended for use.
Nomenclature Amount
Cartridge, 5.56 mm, blank, M16/M4 80
Grenade, smoke, color irrelevant 6
Simulator, artillery 2
Simulator, grenade, hand 2
Table 2-3. Recommended Basic Load of Pyrotechnics Per Candidate.
2-19
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
2-13. SITE REQUIREMENTS.
a. All testing must be conducted in a field environment. However, the written test
may be conducted in a garrison environment at the test board chairperson’s discretion.
b. The hosting unit should centrally locate the EFMB operations center and living
support areas to facilitate command and control. Testing lanes’ layout should facilitate
the efficiency of candidates being tested. Paragraph 3-1 provides further guidance on
the establishment of all areas.
(1) Combat Testing Lanes.
(a) A terrain walk of the area should be accomplished after the concept
briefing has been approved to decide the layout of the CTLs. The terrain and ability to
place vehicles and evacuation platforms will be determining factors into the layout.
(b) The number of lanes that branch off of each CTL will also be necessary to
consider in determining the layout to efficiently test personnel.
(c) Appropriate field hygiene equipment to sustain the personnel on the lanes
T
(i.e., hand washing devises, chemical toilets).
AF
(2) Land Navigation Course.
R
(a) Area capable of supporting the distances required for total length of day
and night land navigation courses.
D
(b) May use the same location as other key events (i.e., previous EFMB,
Expert Infantry Badge (EIB), range control course). However, all individual points must
be changed.
(c) Appropriate field hygiene equipment to sustain the personnel (i.e., hand
washing devises, chemical toilets).
(3) Written Test Area.
(a) An area should be selected with enough chairs and tables that can
preferably accommodate all candidates in one iteration. Conduct of the test is not
required to be in a building or even with chairs and tables.
(b) It should not be crowded to the point that a candidate can easily visualize
another candidate’s written test during the examination.
(c) It should have adequate lighting and be free from the elements.
2-20
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(4) 12-Mile Foot March Route.
(a) 12-mile route that has minimal vehicle traffic and finishes in an area that
facilitates the candidates’ chain of command and visitors to be present.
(b) Area to conduct EFMB awards ceremony.
(c) Appropriate field hygiene equipment to sustain the personnel (i.e., hand
washing devises, chemical toilets) is recommended for the start and finish areas.
(5) Operations Center.
(a) An EFMB operations center will be established to effectively command

and control the EFMB.
(b) An area to maintain positive control of supplies, pyrotechnics, and

sensitive items.
(c) An area to conduct rebuttal boards.
(d) An area established to conduct in- and out-processing.

T
AF
(e) Appropriate field hygiene equipment to sustain the personnel in the area
(i.e., hand washing devises, chemical toilets).
R
(f) Fuel point with environmental and safety measures in mind, if required.
D
(6) Living Support Area (LSA).
(a) Candidates will bivouac in tents or in hardstand buildings in a field

environment area during EFMB testing.
(b) An area established for the candidates and cadre to eat their meals.
(c) An area established to conduct evening study halls.
(d) Most sites have an area for medical sick call to be conducted on site.
(e) If meals will be prepared on site and not mermited in, an area to establish
the field dining facility will be required.
(f) Appropriate field hygiene equipment to sustain the personnel on site (i.e.,
hand washing devises, chemical toilets).
(g) Showers are not required, but recommended for occasional use.
Depending on the location of the site, bus transport may be required to a gym or other
2-21
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
facility that has showers available.
2-14. TRAINING.
a. The training of Soldiers for EFMB testing is the responsibility of their chain of
command; it is not the responsibility of the unit hosting EFMB testing. All units will train
their Soldiers prior to sending them to the EFMB test site. The commander
acknowledges this responsibility and compliance when they verify that the Soldiers were
trained on the Commander’s Recommendation/Certification Memorandum.
Inconsistencies in, or improper unit training prior to EFMB testing are not grounds for
rebuttal.
b. References for both the hands-on testing and the written test are identified in
paragraph 2-15.
c. All EFMB references and EFMB related material are available on the EFMB TCO
Website (see paragraph 2-21).
d. The EFMB TCO has developed training material that is available on the EFMB
TCO Website to prepare Soldiers for EFMB testing (see Appendix E-11). Soldiers
T
should be wary of training material obtained from other sources or websites. Ensure
that your Soldier’s are using the most up to date version of the EFMB references and
AF
training material. Many of the tasks have been modified from the reference that they
were derived.
R
e. While training value is gained during standardization at EFMB testing, it is not

sufficient to successfully prepare Soldiers to earn the badge.
D
2-15. REFERENCES.
a. The AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10 (EFMB Testing) is the only reference required for
training, validation, standardization, and testing of the hands-on tested events in EFMB.
b. The following are the only references utilized in developing the questions on the
EFMB written test and should be the primary material utilized by candidates in preparing
for the written test:
(1) STP 91W15-SM-TG (Soldier’s Manual and Trainer’s Guide, MOS 91W,
Health Care Specialist) (Skill Level 1 Tasks Only).
(2) FM 4-25.12 (Unit Field Sanitation Team).
(3) ST 4-02.46 (Medical Support to Detainee Operations).
(4) STP 21-1-SMCT (Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks, Skill Level 1).
2-22
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
c. Soldiers should check for updates to these references on the EFMB Website.
2-16. POST TESTING REQUIREMENTS
a. The EFMB test board chairperson is responsible for ensuring that the following
items are provided IAW established time frames after the completion of EFMB testing:
(1) Forwards a copy of AMEDDC&S Form 1200-R (EFMB Testing Statistics) to

the EFMB TCO, within 3 days after test-end date via email.
(2) Submits the EFMB database to the EFMB TCO, within three days after the
test-end date via email.
(3) Forwards a copy of orders on candidates awarded the EFMB to the EFMB
TCO, within one week after test-end date.
(4) The completed Written Test answer sheets for each candidate will be
submitted via mail or hand carried to the EFMB TCO within one week after test-end
date.
T
(5) Forwards the original candidate test results recorded on AMEDDC&S Form
1232-R (EFMB Qualification Record) to the candidate’s commander and retains a copy
AF
on file. The EFMB TCO does not require a copy of these forms.
(6) Submits an after action report to the EFMB TCO, within 1 month after the
R
test-end date IAW FM 7-1 and TC 25-20. Notable issues will be posted on the EFMB
Website for future testing improvements.
D
(7) The six various Certificates of Verification and Destruction that are listed in
Appendix D will be submitted IAW the stated time frames on them to the EFMB TCO.
b. A copy of all rebuttals must be submitted within one month after test-end date to
the EFMB TCO.
2-17. WRITTEN TEST MATERIALS AND SECURITY.
a. If the EFMB TCO will be on site, they will either hand carry the WT packet to the
test board chairperson or mail it to him. This will be coordinated in order to facilitate the
process. If the EFMB TCO is unavailable to conduct a site review, a WT packet will be
forwarded to the test board chairperson not later than 30 days prior to the test-start
date. The WT packet consists of the following:
(1) One copy of the EFMB written test.
(2) One copy of the written test reference answer key.
2-23
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Three copies of a punch-out answer key to grade the answer sheets.
(4) Answer sheets (1 per anticipated candidate).
b. Upon receipt, the test board chairperson inventories the contents of the WT
packet. He completes the statement of receipt and returns it to the EFMB TCO within
four days.
c. The test board chairperson is responsible for securing WT materials and related
documents. Functions required in establishing and maintaining test security may be
delegated to a test board member. Security measures are established by all elements
where EFMB test materials are handled, administered, or stored. Security procedures
must ensure close supervision of all phases of test receipt, storage, security,
duplication, issue, administration, scoring, and destruction.
d. When not in transit or actual use, test materials are stored in a locked room or
container, accessible only to authorized individuals. Only persons whose duties require
access to test materials will have keys and combinations to storage facilities. Test-
scoring keys are not stored with the test booklets and blank answer sheets.
e. Security requirements established in this publication meet the requirements of

T
"FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY" material IAW AR 25-55. These materials bear the
AF
designation “FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY.” The only exception to this is the blank answer
sheet.
R
f. A test board member must take the test prior to its administration to the
candidates. Any discrepancies with the test will be brought to the attention of the EFMB
D
TCO immediately for clarification or rectification. At no time can the test board withdraw
questions from the WT without approval from the EFMB TCO. Only the EFMB TCO
(per the guidance of the Commander, AMEDDC&S) has the authority to overturn a
question on the WT.
g. A test board member reproduces one copy of the WT for each candidate. The
EFMB TCO will provide enough answer sheets for the candidates.
h. Within 2 days of completing the WT, the test board chairperson personally
supervises the destruction of the original and all copies of the WT and answer key. He
then signs the statement of destruction and returns it to the EFMB TCO within 5 days
after the completion of EFMB testing and destruction is accomplished.
i. Unit or individual file copies of the WT and answer keys are not authorized.
j. Within 1 week of the test-end date, the test board chairperson forwards the
candidates’ completed test-answer sheets to the EFMB TCO. This information is utilized
to compile Armywide statistical data for use in test analysis.
2-24
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
2-18. EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL STREAMER.
a. A unit is awarded an Expert Medical Streamer IAW AR 600-8-22.
b. Requirements. When 65 percent or more of the assigned strength (during EFMB

testing period) of a medical unit authorized a color, distinguishing flag or guidon, has
been awarded the Combat Medical Badge or the Expert Field Medical Badge, the unit
will be awarded an Expert Medical Streamer. This streamer may be displayed by the
organization for 1 year, at the expiration of which the unit must requalify under the
above rules.
c. Awarding authority. Commanding General, US Army Medical Command,

installation commanders, commanders of combat divisions, separate brigades, separate
regiments, and separate groups may award the Expert Medical Streamer to medical
units within their command under the above criteria.
2-19. EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE COIN.
a. The EFMB coin is the Army Surgeon General's recognition of the Armed Forces'
most technically and tactically competent expert field medics successfully completing
T
the requirements of EFMB testing. The EFMB coin will signify to all that the recipients
are among the best qualified field medics.
AF
b. Composition. The EFMB coin is maroon and silver in color. The front and back
of the coin displays a die cut of the EFMB symbol. The front displays the words
R
"Awarded for Excellence." The back of the coin displays the AMEDD motto “To
Conserve Fighting Strength.”
D
c. Award Criteria. The test board chairperson of the hosting unit will award EFMB
coins to candidates who earn the EFMB and meet the following criteria:
(1) The highest score on the EFMB written test.
(a) In the event of a tie, the most “GOs” in the hands-on testing phase will
determine the recipient.
(b) If there still is a tie, the least time to complete the 12-mile foot march will
(2) The most "GOs" in the hands-on testing phase.
(a) In the event of a tie, the highest score on the EFMB written test will
(b) If there still is a tie, the least time to complete the 12-mile foot march will
2-25
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) The least time to complete the 12-mile foot march.
(a) In the event of a tie, the most “GOs” in the hands-on testing phase will
(b) If there still is a tie, the highest score on the EFMB written test will
d. Coin Distribution.
(1) The EFMB TCO will maintain an adequate quantity of EFMB coins for
worldwide distribution to sponsoring units. The EFMB TCO is responsible for the coins’
physical security, accountability, and distribution. The EFMB TCO will hand carry the
EFMB coins to the test board chairperson. If the EFMB TCO will not be on site, they will
be sent via registered mail, with the sponsoring units test materials. The basis of
allocation for coins is one per 50 candidates participating in the EFMB test, not to
exceed a maximum of three coins per test.
(2) The test board chairperson will ensure that selection of EFMB coin awardees
is based on the criteria listed in paragraph 2-19c. Additionally, the test board
T
chairperson will provide the standard name lines of the EFMB coin recipients to the
AF
EFMB TCO within 5 working days of the EFMB awards ceremony.
2-20. AWARDING THE EFMB.

R
a. The EFMB is presented at an appropriate awards ceremony and worn IAW

D
AR 670-1.
b. Award of the EFMB is announced in orders, citing AR 600-8-22 as authorization.

Copies are forwarded to the military personnel officer for entry into the awardees’ official
records. Copies are also forwarded to the EFMB TCO and the awardee.
c. A certificate of training may be awarded to candidates who completed all EFMB

test requirements, but failed to receive a passing score. The test board chairperson will
determine the number of training hours to be awarded to these Soldiers.
2-21. EFMB TCO CONTACT INFORMATION.
a. The EFMB TCO mailing address is Academy of Health Sciences, ATTN: MCCS-
HTE (EFMB), 1750 Greeley Road, Suite 115, Fort Sam Houston, TX 78234-6122.
b. The EFMB TCO phone numbers are (210) 295-9051/9567/9453, DSN 421-
9051/9567/9453.
c. The EFMB TCO fax number is (210) 221-2716, DSN 471-2716.
2-26
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
d. The EFMB TCO Website is located on the Medical Knowledge Network (MEDKN)
portal of the Army Knowledge Online (AKO), which may be viewed by logging on AKO
first, then at: https://www.us.army.mil/suite/page/140048
e. The EFMB TCO will maintain an email account on AKO, in addition to any other
email accounts, to aid in communication with Soldiers throughout the Army
(efmb.tco@us.army.mil).
T
AF
R
D
2-27
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
2-28
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CHAPTER 3
SITE ESTABLISHMENT, VALIDATION, AND STANDARDIZATION
3-1. SITE ESTABLISHMENT.
a. Site establishment is conducted prior to validation. Time should be allocated not

only for establishing the site, but also to effectively prepare the evaluators and cadre to
perform their roles in the EFMB.
b. The time required to establish the site and prepare the evaluators and cadre are
dependent on many factors. The normal time allocated is four to six days.
c. Lane OIC/NCOICs will use this time to establish their lanes and prepare lane
evaluators for validation. All evaluators should be present during this phase to ensure
they are prepared for validation.
d. Lanes will be setup IAW the approved concept brief. No changes to the lanes
are authorized without the approval of the test board chairperson who will communicate
T
these changes and request approval through the EFMB TCO. Each individual lane on a
CTL will have the same sequence of tasks and be approximately the same length.
AF
e. The EFMB operations center and living support areas should be established in a
centralized location, if possible, to the various testing lanes to assist in the command
R
and control of the EFMB.

D
f. Lanes should be established to make them as realistic as possible and similar to

the current or future operating environments. This provides a better and more relevant
testing environment for the candidates. Lounge chairs, barbeque grills, and coolers
aren’t found in the middle of battlefields and are strongly discouraged in testing areas.
g. Appropriate field hygiene equipment to sustain the personnel should be available

for both cadre and candidates in the vicinity of all testing areas (i.e., hand washing
devises, chemical toilets).
h. All testing will be conducted in a field type environment. However, the written test
may be administered in a garrison environment. Candidates will bivouac in tents or in
hardstand buildings in a field environment area during the entire EFMB test period.
i. Recommendations and guidance on establishing the lanes and EFMB site may be
obtained from the EFMB TCO.
3-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
3-2. EVALUATOR AND CADRE PREPARATION.
a. All evaluators must be proficient in all tasks they are assigned to evaluate. It is
the lane OIC/NCOIC’s responsibility to ensure that all evaluators are prepared for
validation. It is the test board chairperson’s and the test board members’ responsibility
to validate them on their ability to conduct standardization and testing IAW this
publication.
b. Each lane OIC/NCOIC and evaluator must be provided a copy of this entire
publication and any changes. It must be available and utilized during all phases of the
EFMB test cycle.
c. Training and preparation of the evaluators and cadre should be conducted prior to
validation. It is recommended that training be conducted at the units prior to evaluators
and cadre reporting to the EFMB site, if possible.
d. An internal validation will be conducted by the lane OICs/NCOICs prior to formal

validation to ensure all evaluators understand and are capable to enforce the standards
IAW this publication.
e. No one, to include the test board chairperson, test board members, lane
T
OIC/NCOICs, or evaluators, are authorized to make changes to the standards in this
AF
publication without an approved exception to policy memorandum (see paragraph 2-7).
f. All cadre (i.e. operations center staff, platoon sergeants) should be trained to
R
ensure they are prepared to perform their roles in the EFMB. Rock drills and rehearsals
will facilitate in a more efficiently ran event.
D
g. Any evaluator or cadre who is unable to enforce the standards in this publication
must be removed from their role in the EFMB.
3-3. CONDUCT VALIDATION.
a. Validation is conducted prior to standardization to ensure that all evaluators are

validated on their ability to evaluate and conduct EFMB standardization and testing and
also to ensure that lanes and the EFMB site are established IAW paragraph 3-1.
Chapter 4 provides pertinent and required information of all of the EFMB tested events.
Appendix B provides the standards for each of the tested tasks.
b. Validation is the responsibility of the test board chairperson and the test board
members. They will ensure that it is conducted IAW the standards in this publication
and ask the EFMB TCO for guidance and/or recommendations, if needed.
c. All test board members must be present during the entire validation phase with
the exception of the WT and the foot march, which only designated test board members
are required to validate.
3-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
d. Each test board member will be provided a copy of this publication by the host
unit to be utilized throughout validation, standardization, and testing. This reference
must be in their possession at all rebuttal boards and while on the lanes.
e. All lane OICs/NCOICs and evaluators must be present during the validation of
their assigned lane.
f. The EFMB TCO will observe the test board conduct validation of the lanes and
evaluators. They will provide guidance and recommendations to assist the host unit in
conducting the EFMB IAW the standards in this publication. If an EFMB TCO is not
available on site, all efforts will be made to maintain positive contact with the EFMB
TCO through out all phases of the EFMB via phone and/or e-mail.
g. CTL Validation. All CTLs and the evaluators assigned to those lanes will be
validated prior to the beginning of standardization. The test board must ensure that
CTLs are established IAW the concept briefing. If changes are necessary, approval
through the EFMB TCO is required. Each individual lane on a CTL will have the same
sequence of tasks and be approximately the same length. The following are validation
requirements:
T
(1) Validation of lanes will be conducted as a real time dry run to show the test
AF
board that a lane is prepared to conduct standardization and testing. One evaluator will
be selected to negotiate the lane as if they were a candidate. All other evaluators from
the lane will evaluate the performance of the tasks. The test board members will
R
observe the performance on the lane and then compare all evaluator’s evaluation score
sheets to ensure that evaluators are grading to the standards in this publication and that
D
all evaluators are evaluating the same. It may be necessary to have several other
evaluators negotiate the lane. Each evaluator is required to demonstrate that they are
familiar with their respective tasks and performance steps/measures and that they can
demonstrate hands-on performance of all tasks to standard.
(2) If the lane and the evaluators assigned to that lane are not validated, the lane
OIC/NCOIC and the test board chairperson will schedule a time and date to conduct a
follow-up prior to standardization until the lane and the evaluators are validated.
(3) Once a lane and all of the evaluators from that lane have met the validation
requirements IAW this publication, they will be allowed to receive candidates to conduct
standardization. After a lane has been validated, no changes are authorized without the
approval of the test board chairperson.
(4) The lane OIC/NCOIC or his designated representative will also give the lane
and safety briefings and have risk management worksheets available for review. They
will also brief how standardization will be conducted and demonstrate anything that is
requested by the EFMB test board and/or the EFMB TCO.
3-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(5) The test board will ensure that administrative NO GOs and what will be
considered causing further injury to a casualty are standardized throughout all CTLs.
Paragraph 4-7e provides more information on administrative NO GOs. They will also
standardize what is considered “secure” as it pertains to securing patients to litters or on
vehicles or evacuation platforms.
(6) Ensure that all personnel involved on the lane are aware of their
responsibilities and knowledgeable on the standards in this publication, as applicable for
support personnel.
h. Written Test Validation. The test board chairperson or a designated test board
member must follow the security guidelines of the written test IAW paragraph 2-17 and
will:
(1) Take the test prior to its administration to the candidates to verify the
answers to the questions.
(2) Inform the EFMB TCO of any questions or discrepancies with the written test
immediately for clarification or rectification.
(3) The test board may not change or withdraw questions from the test. Only the
T
EFMB TCO has the authority to change or withdraw a question on the written test.
AF
(4) Personally make one copy of the written test for each candidate. This can
not be delegated to a non-test board member.
R
(5) Ensure that an adequate area is identified to conduct the written test which
D
does not place the candidates too close together.
(6) Conduct a dry run of how the written test will be administered.
(7) Ensure all personnel involved in the written test are properly briefed and
have read and understand the information in paragraph 4-11.
i. Land Navigation Validation. At least one test board member will:
(1) Accompany land navigation OIC/NCOIC and/or evaluators to ensure every

point is validated with a global positioning system (GPS) type devise.
(2) Ensure that every point on the course is IAW the standards in paragraph 4-
12. The same points can not be used that were previously utilized for EFMB testing.
(3) Review every lane to ensure they are within the prescribed total distance.
(4) Verify answer keys are correct.
3-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(5) Ensure that a tracking mechanism is in place to ensure that candidates do

not have the same lane during standardization and testing.
(6) Ensure that the pace count area was measured out with a proper measuring
devise and that a compass verification is in place and checked for accuracy.
(7) Ensure that the lane and safety briefings are all inclusive.
(8) Ensure that all personnel involved on the lane are aware of their
responsibilities and knowledgeable on the standards in this publication.
j. Foot March Validation. At least one test board member will:
(1) Validate the foot march route prior to the beginning of the testing phase.
(2) Measure the entire foot march route while walking with a wheel to validate
the proper distance. No other method is authorized to measure the course to include by
vehicle or with a GPS. Table 3-1 lists conversion factors to assist in the conversion of
the measuring wheel to miles. It is highly recommended to measure the route at least
twice for accuracy.
T
(3) Review the following plans to ensure they meet the standards in this
AF
publication and support the final event of EFMB testing at the site:
(a) Plan to mark the route to ensure that all candidates will stay on the
R
course and not become lost.

D
(b) Plan to mark mile markers.
(c) Medical evacuation plan is adequate to support the number of candidates

and personnel on the course.
(d) Plan to establish water points on the course.
(e) Plan to ensure that candidates negotiate the entire course (i.e., tongue
depressor with candidates’ number is given to cadre at the 6-mile marker, candidate
numbers checked off on a list at the 6-mile marker).
(f) Plan to inspect all candidates’ inventory packing list prior to and following
the foot march.
(g) Plan to ensure that non-candidates are separated from candidates at the
finish line and during the post-foot march inventory inspection.
(h) Risk management plan to ensure that all hazards are identified and
control measures are in place for them.
3-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(i) Plan to ensure that no other events or obstacles (i.e., closed gate, blocked
road, EIB road march on same route) will hinder the execution of the event.
1 MILE 12 MILES
FEET 5,280 63,360
METERS 1,609.34 19,312.12
YARDS 1,760 21,120
Table 3-1. Distance Conversion Information.
3-4. CONDUCT STANDARDIZATION.
a. Standardization is conducted prior to testing to ensure that candidates are

standardized on how EFMB testing will be conducted at the location. Standardization
phase will be used to allow the candidate to view how the standards will be evaluated
and tested, plus provide the opportunity to clarify any questions or grey areas in the
standards.
b. Standardization must be conducted prior to EFMB testing. The number of days

T
of standardization is the decision of the host unit. The average is 5 days to include
inprocessing. Statistics have shown that a longer standardization equates to a higher
AF
overall pass rate.
c. While training value is gained from standardization, it is not the intended purpose.
R
Units and candidates should not assume that they will receive the necessary training
during standardization to be successful when tested. Training for EFMB testing is
D
addressed in paragraph 2-14.
d. The host unit does not have to afford candidates the opportunity to individually
negotiate the CTLs. They are only required to demonstrate the standards and how the
candidates will be required to react and negotiate each CTL from start to finish.
However, it is recommended that they be provided the opportunity to negotiate the
lanes, even if it is in small groups. At a minimum, an evaluator will demonstrate the
proper negotiation of the CTL from beginning to end if the candidates aren’t afforded the
opportunity. Ensuring that candidates know when to react and perform tasks is
standardized so that testing is reaction based.
e. Candidates will be standardized on every tested lane with the exception of the
foot march and the written test.
f. If a candidate misses a portion of standardization due to illness or an emergency,

the decision to allow the candidate to continue in EFMB is up to the test board
chairperson. The candidate does not have to be afforded another opportunity to be
standardized on any of the lanes that were missed.
3-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
g. Host units are not required to conduct study halls. However, it is strongly
recommended to provide candidates with the opportunity to better prepare for testing.
The host unit may conduct training on the written test references during study halls, but
at no time will the test board review questions that appear on the WT with the
candidates.
h. Lane OICs/NCOICs will use the same setup and sequence of tasks during
standardization as that will be utilized during testing. Scenarios will be changed
between standardization and testing (i.e., MEDEVAC Request, CBRN 1 Report).
i. During standardization of land navigation, Soldiers will be afforded only one

opportunity to navigate the day and night courses. If a candidate loses or damages
their equipment during their one opportunity to navigate the course, they do not have to
be afforded another opportunity to negotiate the land navigation course at a later date
during standardization. In case of inclement weather or other circumstances that
prevents candidates in having the opportunity to standardize on a lane or event, the
schedule should be adjusted, if possible. If it is not possible for them to standardize
prior to testing, the test board chairperson and/or the host unit commander will make the
decision to continue. While unfortunate, this can’t be used as grounds for a rebuttal for
the candidates should any of them receive a No Go.
T
j. All materials and equipment will be made available to candidates during
AF
standardization to practice techniques shown in this publication.
k. Evaluators on the CTLs should emphasize to candidates the performance

R
steps/measures that are normally improperly executed. This greatly assists candidates
in their preparation for testing.
D
l. The test board must be involved throughout standardization to ensure that the
standards in this publication are being demonstrated to the candidates.
m. In addition to the information stated in the previous paragraphs, the test board
will ensure that candidates are explained the following during standardization:
(1) The rebuttal process.
(2) Administrative NO-GOs.
(3) What will be considered causing further injury to a casualty.
(4) What is considered “secure” as it pertains to securing patients to litters or on

vehicles or evacuation platforms.
3-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

T
AF
R
D
3-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CHAPTER 4
CONDUCT EFMB TESTING
4-1. REQUIREMENTS. To qualify and be awarded the EFMB, candidates must have
successfully fulfilled the eligibility requirements in paragraph 2-2. In addition, they must
successfully complete the required number of tasks in each of the seven critical
performance areas in paragraphs 4-11 through 4-17.
4-2. CLARIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE STEPS/MEASURES.
NOTE: Some of the tasks in this publication were obtained from Soldier Training
Publications (STP), Field Manuals (FM), and other publications and were revised for
EFMB testing purposes. The performance conditions, standards, and steps/measures in
this publication are for EFMB TESTING PURPOSES ONLY.
a. Some tasks and performance steps/measures have time standards. These time
standards are for test administering purposes only.
b. Test board members, evaluators, and candidates must ensure that they are using
T
the most up to date EFMB references. The EFMB TCO furnishes changes to tasks,
conditions, standards, and performance steps/measures to the test board chairperson
AF
prior to the conduct of EFMB testing. Changes will also be posted on the EFMB TCO
R
4-3. TEST PERIOD.

D
a. EFMB testing is designed to be both physically and mentally challenging. The

testing, to include the written portion, is conducted in 120 hours on consecutive days.
This may be conducted over six consecutive days as long as it is within the 120 hour
time constraint. Time begins from the beginning of the first event until the end of the
foot march. If additional time is needed, the host unit commander will request an
exception to policy IAW paragraph 2-7.
b. All testing will be conducted in a field type environment. However, the written test
may be administered in a garrison environment. Candidates will bivouac in tents or in
hardstand buildings in a field environment area during the entire EFMB test period.
c. Testing must be conducted IAW this publication.
d. US Army Reserve and Army National Guard units will conduct EFMB testing
during their annual training periods.
4-4. TRAINING.
a. Training prior to the standardization and test periods is the responsibility of the
4-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
candidate's chain of command (see paragraph 2-14).
b. Inconsistencies in or improper unit training prior to the test period are not grounds
for rebuttal.
4-5. CANDIDATE EQUIPMENT.
a. Table 2-2 lists the equipment required for testing purposes for the candidates.
Candidates are required to carry all of the equipment listed in Table 2-2, to include the
rucksack, to the start point of all lanes, but not during the testing of tasks. The ballistic
helmet, LCE, and protective mask in carrier will be worn at all times. The M16/M4-
series rifle/carbine will be carried at all times. The test board chairperson will determine
which lanes he wishes to be negotiated with the rucksack worn, except as follows:
(1) The rucksack is not carried or worn on the land navigation course.
(2) The rucksack must be carried or worn on the 12-mile foot march IAW Table
2-2 and paragraph 4-17.
b. During the WT, the candidates may wear the battle dress uniform (BDU) or Army
T
combat uniform (ACU) without the equipment in Table 2-2. The field uniform is not
required for this task.
AF
c. The M16/M4-series rifle/carbine will be carried, worn, or within an arm’s reach
(one meter from the candidate’s position) at all times. The candidate may receive an
R
administrative No Go on any task(s) in which the weapon is not within an arm’s reach.
The EFMB test board will ensure that this is being evaluated the same on all lanes at
D
the EFMB site and is made clear to the candidates during standardization.
d. Rubber weapons will NOT be used by candidates in any portion of EFMB testing.
e. If modifications to the uniform or packing list are needed (i.e. body armor), the
host unit commander will request an exception to policy IAW paragraph 2-7. The weight
of the additions (i.e. body armor) will be subtracted from the rucksack packing list and
be modified accordingly.
4-6. BATTLEFIELD SCENARIO AND COMBAT LANE CONCEPTS.
a. Battlefield scenarios.
(1) The creation of simulated combat conditions is critical to the evaluation of

performance-oriented testing that is reaction based. Pyrotechnics, smoke, opposing
force activity, realistic moulage, and anatomic simulators are used extensively to
enhance realistic conditions.
(2) The principles and concept of tactical combat casualty care should be utilized
4-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
in developing the battlefield scenario and the combat testing lanes. Paragraph 4-13(g)
defines the three distinct phases of tactical combat casualty care.
(3) EFMB testing can be conducted in any field environment. The host unit
should attempt to make the battlefield scenario similar to the current operating
environment of the military.
b. Combat testing lanes.
(1) Candidates are tested on each task as outlined in this publication. Combat
testing lanes will include mission-related tasks using reaction-style testing. Common
task training (CTT), station, and round-robin style testing will not be used at any time.
Different evaluators at each task are NOT recommended. It is not conducive to
reaction-based testing.
(2) Tasks from the critical performance areas of communications, warrior skills,
and evacuation will be integrated into the testing of the TCCC tasks and each other.
The test board chairperson will determine sequencing of the tasks on all combat testing
lanes in the concept brief, ensuring a logical flow of events. Appendix E, paragraphs 3-
1 and 4-13(g) provide additional information on creating the combat testing lanes. An
example concept briefing is available on the EFMB TCO Website.
T
AF
(3) Candidates are given blank rounds to fill a minimum of one magazine before
the start of each lane that has opposing force activity.
R
(4) Candidates are given a written or verbal operation order (OPORD) at the
beginning of the test cycle. Candidates will receive a fragmentary order (FRAGO) upon
D
arriving at each CTL as a platoon. Candidates will receive a team or scenario brief
before the start of each lane. The use of FRAGOs throughout the lanes is encouraged
to communicate the situation. They should all be relevant to the current operating
environments and feed off of the initial OPORD. See FM 5-0 for a sample OPORD or
FRAGO.
(5) Evaluators will not give task, conditions, standards, etc. during testing.
Testing is reaction based. After a candidate starts a lane, his interactions with the
evaluator must be minimized other than FRAGOs. The score sheets in Appendix B
provide “cues” for the evaluators to assist and standardize interaction during the
performance of tasks. The use of FRAGOs throughout the lanes are encouraged to
communicate the situation.
c. Exceptions. The land navigation, 12-mile foot march, and WT events will not be in
a battlefield scenario or combat lane setup.
4-7. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS.
a. All performance steps/measures are provided for the tested tasks in Appendix B
4-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
and it’s supported Annexes. This publication is the only reference required for hands-on
tested tasks.
b. In some cases, there are different score sheets provided for similar tasks. The
different score sheets are included to illustrate the difference in standards and
performance steps/measures between the different types of equipment. The test board
chairperson will select the type of equipment IAW paragraphs 4-13 to 4-17, thus the
score sheet, which will be tested. This will be identified in the concept briefing
submitted to the EFMB TCO.
c. The score sheets ensure that every candidate is graded by the same standards.
At no time will evaluators deviate from the standards in the score sheets.
d. Candidates performing steps not listed in the score sheets will not be penalized
as long as they perform all required performance steps/measures in the allotted time, if
applicable.
e. Candidates may receive an administrative NO GO for test integrity violations on

any tested task even though it is not stated as a performance step/measure. Candidates
may also receive an administrative NO GO for weapons violations IAW paragraph 4-5d.
T
4-8. CHANGES. Changes are NOT authorized without an exception to policy approval.
AF
4-9. REBUTTALS AND APPEALS.
R
a. Rebuttals. Candidates will be explained the rebuttal process during

standardization. During the test period, the test board chairperson conducts a rebuttal
D
board daily. A minimum of three test board members, including the test board
chairperson, must be present to conduct the rebuttal board and vote. Candidates must
be given the opportunity to appear before the board to verbally present their reasons for
any hands-on rebuttals in addition to completing a rebuttal sheet. The host unit will
reproduce and utilize the rebuttal sheets available in Appendix B of this publication. If
an EFMB TCO is on site, they will monitor and provide guidance during the rebuttal
boards.
b. Hands-on task rebuttal process. Candidates who want to rebut a task must
request their rebuttal immediately after the lane OIC/NCOIC informs them of their
performance on the lane. The candidate will initial the appropriate rebuttal block on the
bottom section of their score sheet(s) and write their rebuttal on a rebuttal sheet.
Additional paper may be utilized if needed. Once the candidate departs the lane
OIC/NCOIC table, they may not come back later and request to rebut. Test board
members will:
(1) Review the score sheets, written rebuttal and review this publication prior to
the candidate, evaluator, and OIC/NCOIC entering the rebuttal board.
4-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(a) All test board members will have a copy of this publication at the rebuttal
board.
(b) The only reference needed for hands-on task rebuttals is this publication.
(2) The candidate will report to the test board chairperson to present their
rebuttal and answer any questions from the test board members. Evaluators will appear
before the board to support their position along with the OIC/NCOIC from that lane.
(a) The candidate should not report to the test board in the presence of the
evaluator and/or OIC/NCOIC, unless deemed necessary.
(b) Personnel may be recalled to the test board, if required.
(c) Non-candidates, support personnel, other evaluators or candidates may

be requested by the test board to provide additional information, if required.
(3) Review all information pertinent to the rebuttal and review the standards in
this publication prior to voting. No other references are required.
(4) Adjudicate based upon the standards in this publication.

T
AF
(a) The test board chairperson will make the decision in case of a tie vote.
(b) Render a decision on the candidate’s rebuttal at the end of the rebuttal
R
board that the appeal was heard. The test board can not delay adjucation until a later
date.
D
(5) The candidate will report to the test board chairperson for their decision. The
decision of the test board is final and can’t be appealed on hands-on tasks.
(6) The test board chairperson will ensure that a copy of the rebuttal and the test
board’s decision are maintained in the candidate’s folder in the EFMB operations
center.
(7) A copy of all rebuttals will be forwarded to the EFMB TCO NLT one month
after the completion of EFMB testing.
c. Written test rebuttal process.
(1) Candidates will be explained the written test rebuttal and appeal process
prior to taking the written test (see paragraph 4-11). If a candidate desires to rebut any
questions on the written test, they must ask the test board for a rebuttal form (see
Appendix B-7) when they turn in their written test and complete it at that time. They
may not come back after turning in their written test and request to rebut.
4-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(a) The candidate will be given a rebuttal sheet, a pen, and their copy of the
written test. They will not be given their answer sheet.
(b) It is the candidate’s responsibility to make any annotations (i.e., question

numbers) on the scrap piece of paper they are given when taking the written test.
(2) The test board will research all rebuttals on the day of the examination. If
more information is needed by the test board and they find it necessary, they may call
candidates in individually to afford them the opportunity to verbally communicate their
rebuttal. However, this isn’t required for written test rebuttals.
(3) If the test board determines that the candidate’s rebuttal does not merit
warrant to be overturned, they will inform the candidate that they may appeal the
decision through the EFMB TCO (see paragraph 4-9d).
(4) If the test board determines that the candidate’s rebuttal does merit warrant,
they will inform the EFMB TCO to review the rebuttal. The test board does not have the
authority to make the decision to throw out or overturn any question. The candidate will
be informed that they may appeal the decision through the EFMB TCO.
d. Appeal. The candidate has the right to appeal the test board’s rebuttal decision
T
on only the WT event through the EFMB TCO to the Commander, AMEDDC&S. The
AF
appeal must be submitted by the candidate through the host unit and the EFMB TCO to
the Commander, AMEDDC&S, not later than 15 days after completion of the EFMB test.
R
(1) If the EFMB TCO is on site, he will render a decision at that time, if possible.
D
(2) In the event an EFMB TCO is not on site every effort will be made by the test
board to contact the EFMB TCO via email or phone. The candidate will be allowed to
continue with testing until a decision is rendered. Other candidates that missed the
question and have the potential to be a GO on the written test if it is overturned will be
provided the opportunity to continue with testing.
(3) If a question is overturned, all candidates affected by the decision will be

rescored.
4-10. SCORE SHEETS.
a. The score sheets provided in Appendix B will be used to evaluate candidates

during the testing phase of EFMB. A modification to content or use of other score
sheets is not authorized for use during testing. If an exception to policy is approved that
affects the information on the applicable score sheet, the EFMB TCO will produce a
new score sheet for the host unit to utilize. The host unit must provide this new score
sheet to candidates to assist them in preparing for testing.
4-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) The header and footer portions of each score sheet list the critical
performance area followed by the task name (i.e., TCCC-Treat an Open Abdominal
Wound).
(2) It is the hosting unit’s responsibility to reproduce copies of the score sheets
for each candidate to be tested.
b. The bottom of each score sheet also provides an area for the evaluator to write a
detailed description of all NO-GO performance steps/measures.
c. Figure 4-1 is an example of a completed score sheet. The following are

directions for completing score sheets:
(1) The candidate will legibly write their rank, name, and candidate number in
the top portion of each score sheet prior to beginning testing on the applicable lane.
(2) The evaluator will:
(a) When evaluating the candidate’s performance, place a check mark or “X”
in the appropriate column and legibly write detailed comments on any and all
deficiencies at the bottom of the score sheet. Also, any times associated with
T
performance requirements will be written on the score sheet.
AF
(b) Verbalize all appropriate “cues” as stated on the score sheets. Additional
information to clarify the cue’s intent may be given (i.e. “Pulse is strong and bounding”).
R
(c) Sign their name on the back of the score sheet after evaluating the
D
candidate’s performance of tasks and times, if applicable.
(3) The lane OIC/NCOIC will review all score sheets and may overturn a NO GO
task to a GO at his level. He will inform the candidate of their performance on each task
and afford them the opportunity to rebut any task(s). The candidate will initial the
appropriate box on the back of the score sheet and write their rebuttal on a rebuttal form
(see Appendix B-6) prior to departing the OIC/NCOIC table, if applicable. The
candidate will initial before and after their rebuttal comments. The OIC/NCOIC will initial
the appropriate box on the bottom of the score sheets.
(4) All score sheets will be consolidated and given to the EFMB operations center
on site to be input into the EFMB database, tracked on appropriate forms and boards,
and filed in the candidate’s folder.
4-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMB Test Score Sheet

TCCC— Insert a Nasopharyngeal Airway
For Use of this Score Sheet, See AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10.
CANDIDATE’S RANK AND NAME CANDIDATE
PFC DUNN, JOHN NUMBER
121
TASK: INSERT A NASOPHARYNGEAL AIRWAY.
CONDITIONS: Given an unconscious casualty who has a need for a patent airway and the necessary
materials to treat the casualty.
STANDARDS: Successfully insert a nasopharyngeal airway into an unconscious casualty and place the
casualty in the recovery position. Does not cause further injury to casualty.
NOTE: THIS TASK HAS BEEN MODIFIED FOR EFMB USE ONLY.
PERFORMANCE STEPS/MEASURES PASS FAIL
1. Insert Nasopharyngeal Airway (NPA).
a. Place the casualty supine with the head in a neutral position
CAUTION: Do not use the NPA if there is a clear fluid coming from the ears or nose. This may indicate a
skull fracture.
b. Assess nasal passages for apparent obstruction.
EVALUATOR STATES: “NASAL PASSAGES ARE NOT OBSTRUCTED.”
c. Select appropriately sized airway using one of the following methods:
(1) Measure the airway from the casualty’s nostril to the earlobe.
T
(2) Measure the airway from the casualty’s nostril to the angle of the jaw.
AF
NOTE: The NPA will be inserted on a mannequin or training device.
d. Lubricate the NPA with a water-soluble lubricant.
CAUTION: Do not use petroleum based or non-water based lubricant. These substances can cause
R
damage to the tissues lining the nasal cavity and pharynx, thus increasing the risk for infection.
e. Push the tip of the nose upwards gently.
D
f. Position the tube so that the bevel of the airway faces towards the septum.
g. Insert the airway into the nostril and advance it until the flange rest against the
nostril.
CAUTION: Never force the airway into the casualty’s nostril. If resistance is met, pull the tube out and
attempt to insert it into the other nostril.
2. Place the casualty in the recovery position.
3. Did not cause further injury to the casualty.
REASON(S) CANDIDATE INITIALS IF ELECTING TO REBUTTAL YES NO
FOR JD
FAILURE
1c. Measured the airway from the casualty’s earlobe to the corner of the mouth.
LANE EVALUATOR’S SIGNATURE DATE

OIC/NCOIC
10 May 2006
INITIALS
BCC
SFC B. Right
Figure 4-1. Example Completed Grade Sheet.
4-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
4-11. WRITTEN TEST. Candidates must pass a WT consisting of 100 questions. Two
hours are allowed for administering the WT. To pass, candidates must correctly answer
a minimum of 75 questions within the two hour time limit.
a. The test board will administer and grade the WT and cannot delegate these
responsibilities to a person who is not on the test board. Non test board members may
be utilized as proctors only. Test proctors must be an officer or NCO who is an EFMB
awardee. The test board chairperson will ensure that all test proctors are properly
briefed.
(1) Test proctors will:
(a) Read and comply with the requirements of paragraph 4-11.
(b) Understand the importance of proper test security and administration.
(c) Understand the order in which the examination material is to be

distributed and collected.
T
(d) Understand they must continuously monitor the testing candidates.
AF
(e) Understand the actions to take if a candidate is suspected of cheating.
(f) Understand that only questions from candidates concerning testing

R
procedures, time checks, and purpose and use of examinations may be answered.
D
(g) Ensure that no talking between candidates occurs once testing materials
are passed out until they have turned in their test materials and completed their rebuttal,
if applicable.
b. Prior to the examination, each test board member will:
(1) Understand the importance of proper test security and administration and
comply with paragraph 2-17.
(2) Ensure all materials are available for the examination the day prior.
(3) Ensure the appropriate testing conditions exist. The environment will be free
from distractions with adequate space and lighting.
(4) Ensure that test proctors have been briefed on their roles and
responsibilities.
(5) Sign for the exact number of examination booklets and sheets from the test
board chairperson. Upon signature, the test board members accept responsibility for
4-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
examination security; however, the test board chairperson still remains ultimately
responsible for over all security.
(6) AT NO TIME LEAVE THE EXAMINATION MATERIAL UNATTENDED.
c. At the beginning of the examination, the test board will:
(1) Ensure the testing area is completely cleared with only authorized testing
material present (i.e., scrap paper, pencils, answer sheet, and test).
(2) Ensure that candidates are not seated in positions which allow them to easily
see other candidates’ answer sheets.
(3) Ensure that no talking between candidates occurs once testing materials are
passed out until they have turned in their test materials and completed their rebuttal, if
applicable.
(4) Ensure each candidate completes the required information on the front of the
answer sheet per instructions.
(5) Read the testing instructions verbatim as stated in Table 4-1.

T
AF
d. During the examination each test board member or proctor will:
(1) Take the following actions for a candidate suspected of cheating.

R
(a) Allow the candidate to complete the examination, unless they are
D
disrupting other candidates.
(b) Make a written documentation of the time the incident occurred and a
summary of the observations.
(c) After the candidate turns in their examination, inform him of the suspected
violations. Direct the candidate to report to the test board immediately.
(2) Continuously monitor the group.
(3) Under no circumstances leave the candidates unattended. At least one test
board member must be in the testing area at all times.
(4) Only answer routine questions concerning testing procedures, time limits,
and purpose and use of examinations. Do not provide explanations or answers to test
questions. This includes definitions of words included in the actual questions on the
written test.
(5) Provide periodic announcements of time remaining for the examination. At a
4-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
minimum, warnings should be given at the last 30-, 10-, and 2-minute intervals.
(6) Direct candidates to the turn-in station when they have finished.
(7) Stop the examination when the allotted time has expired.
e. At the testing material turn in station, the test board member(s) will:
(1) Collect the test booklets, answer sheets, and scrap sheets of paper.
(2) Count the examination test booklet pages in front of candidate and ensure
that no pages are missing before dismissing the candidate.
(3) Ensure all answer sheets are properly filled out with no stray marks present
and erasures are complete.
(4) Ask each candidate if they want to rebut any of the questions. All test
rebuttals must be completed prior to the candidate leaving the test turn-in station. If the
candidate does not wish to rebut, the candidate will be directed to the designated area
to wait for test results.
T
(5) If the candidate wishes to rebut, the candidate will be provided a written test
AF
rebuttal sheet, a copy of the test booklet, and any notes they made while taking the test
to fill out the rebuttal form. The answer sheet will not be returned to the candidate. At
no time will the candidate be allowed to review their answer sheet once it has been
R
turned-in. Candidates are not provided a copy of the actual references to complete their
rebuttal.
D
(6) Candidates will be directed to an area established for them to complete their
rebuttal forms. They are not allowed to talk to each other or permitted to look at other
candidates’ paperwork. No further questions may be asked. Once completed, the
candidate will return the rebuttal sheet, scrap sheets of paper, and test booklet to the
test turn in station. The test board member will perform steps 2 and 3 stated above and
direct the candidate to a designated area (separate from the other candidates) to wait to
for the decision of test board on their rebuttal. No interaction with other candidates is
permitted until after you have appeared before the rebuttal board.
(7) Ensure all examinations and answer sheets are accounted for prior to
dismissing the candidates or leaving the designated area.
(8) Upon completion of the examination and rebuttals, the test board will take the
test booklets and answer sheets to the test grading station.
f. At the test grading station, the test board members will:
(1) Receive all test booklets, completed examinations and rebuttals.
4-11
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Use the answer key cut out template provided by the EFMB TCO to grade
the candidates’ answer sheets.
(3) Mark all incorrect answers with a yellow, pink, or light blue highlighter only.
No pen or pencil marks are permitted on the answer sheets by the test board members.
The total number of correct answers will be marked on the front of the answer sheet.
(4) All answer sheet grading will be double checked to verify the correct score.
g. After all examinations have been graded; the test board will convene to review all
rebuttals IAW paragraph 4-9.
h. After all examinations have been graded, and rebuttals are completed, no test
review will be given.
i. The test board chairperson will destroy all copies of the test booklets and secure
all copies of the answer sheets IAW paragraph 2-17. If the EFMB TCO is on site, the
test answer sheets will be hand delivered. If the EFMB TCO is NOT on site, the answer
sheets must be mailed through the official military mail system.
T
j. Changes are NOT authorized without an exception to policy approval.
AF
R
D
4-12
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMB Written Test Instructions

1 You are about to take the EFMB Written Test. You must correctly answer 75 out of
100 questions to pass. NO talking is allowed from this point until you leave the testing
area. If you have a question, raise your hand and a proctor will assist you. Clear all
materials from your desk/table except test booklet, answer sheet, scratch paper, and
pencil (If not pre-positioned, pass these items out to the candidates).
2 DO NOT touch any materials on your desk/table until told to do so.
3 You will use a number two pencil only in completing your answer sheet. A pencil
sharpener is located at __________. If you need to sharpen your pencil while taking
the test, move directly to the pencil sharpener without looking at other candidates
testing material, sharpen your pencil, and then return to your chair.
4 At this time look at the front of your answer sheet. Do NOT start filling in the
administrative data until told to do so. Fill in all appropriate blocks at this time.
(Explain each section). Put your answer sheet and the pencil down when finished.
5 DO NOT write on any material except the answer sheet or scratch paper.
6 DO NOT make any stray marks on your answer sheet; stray marks may count against
you. If you must erase, erase completely. Completely fill in the correct bubbles on
the sheet with your pencil.
7 At this time, pick up your test booklet. Review the test booklet to ensure all pages are
T
present. The test booklet contains page _____ through _____. After verifying your
pages, close the test booklet and place it face down in front of you. Is anyone missing
AF
any pages?
8 Giving and/or receiving any unauthorized assistance during this test, for example
looking at other candidates’ test materials, assisting another candidate, crib/cheat
R
notes, and talking will constitute cheating and you will receive an administrative No-
Go and be dropped from EFMB. You will be referred to your chain of command for
D
appropriate action.
9 You will NOT be allowed to leave the testing area until you have completed the test.
However, if it becomes necessary to use the bathroom, raise your hand and a cadre
member will escort and remain with you until you return to the testing area (optional).
All of your examination materials will be secured prior to leaving the room.
10 When you are taking the examination, select the best answer to the question;
interpretation may be required. Test administrators and proctors CANNOT provide
explanations or answers to test questions, only testing procedures, time checks, and
purpose and use of examinations. If you decide to skip a question and come back to
it, ensure that you fill in the answer that corresponds to the appropriate question.
11 Once you have completed the test, check to ensure you have answered all test
questions and that the answer matches the corresponding question.
12 When you have completed your test, secure all examination items and take them to
the test turn in station which is located ______. If there are other candidates waiting,
form a line keeping at least 3 feet distance from the candidate in front of you. No
talking or interaction is allowed between candidates. When called forward by the
cadre, you will turn in your test booklet, answer sheet, scratch paper, and pencil.
13 They will count the pages in your test booklet to ensure no pages are missing and to
ensure your answer sheet is properly filled out with no stray marks present and
4-13
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
erasures are complete. The cadre may ask you if you want to rebut any of the
questions. However, it is your responsibility to inform the cadre at this time if you
want to rebut. All rebuttals must be completed prior to leaving the test turn-in station.
If you do not wish to rebut, you will be directed to go to _________ to wait for your
test results.
14 If you wish to rebut, you will be provided a written test rebuttal sheet, a copy of the
test booklet, a pen, and any notes that you made while taking the test to fill out the
rebuttal sheet. Your answer sheet will not be returned to you. At NO time will you be
allowed to review your answer sheet once it has been turned-in. You will NOT be
provided a copy of any references to complete your rebuttal. You will be directed to
an area established to complete your rebuttal sheet. You will NOT talk to each other
or permitted to look at other candidates’ paperwork. NO further questions may be
asked. Once completed, the candidate will return the rebuttal sheet, scrap sheets of
paper, and test booklet to the test turn in station. The test board member will count
the pages in your test booklet to ensure NO pages are missing and review your
rebuttal form to ensure it is legible. You will be directed to go to _________ to wait
and appear before the test board for your rebuttal. NO interaction with other
candidates is permitted until the test board renders their decision.
15 The test board will research all rebuttals. If clarification is required, they may call you
into the rebuttal board to provide more information on your rebuttal.
16
T
If the test board determines that the candidate’s rebuttal does NOT merit warrant to
be overturned, they will inform the candidate that they may appeal the decision.
AF
17 If the test board determines that the candidate’s rebuttal does merit warrant, they will
inform the EFMB TCO to review the rebuttal. The test board does NOT have the
authority to make the decision to throw out any question. The candidate will be
R
informed that they may appeal the decision.

18 (If an EFMB TCO is on site, they will render a decision after reviewing the rebuttal. In
D
the event an EFMB TCO is not on site, every effort will be made to contact the EFMB
TCO via email or phone. The candidate will be allowed to continue with testing until a
decision is rendered). Other candidates that missed the question and have the
potential to be a GO on the written test if it is overturned will be given the opportunity
to continue with testing.
19 If a question is overturned, ALL candidates affected by the decision will be rescored.
20 The candidate has the right to appeal the test board’s rebuttal decision on the WT
event ONLY through the EFMB TCO to the Commander, AMEDDC&S. The appeal
must be submitted by the candidate through the host unit and the EFMB TCO to the
Commander, AMEDDC&S, not later than 15 days after completion of the EFMB test.
21 Are there any questions on the rebuttal or appeal process for the written test?
22 During the examination, the cadre WILL announce, at intervals, the amount of time
remaining. The start time and end time will be posted.
23 You will NOT discuss examination items with candidates who have not tested yet.
24 You will have 2 hours to complete this test. At the end of the 2 hours, you will put
your pencil down and turn in your examination material. Are there any questions?
25 Your time begins now. (Post start time and end time on board or butcher block).
Table 4-1. Written Test Instructions.
4-14
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
4-12. LAND NAVIGATION TASKS.
a. Objective. The objective of the land navigation courses are to measure the
candidate's ability to navigate from a start point, through intermediate points, and to an
end point during daylight and darkness.
b. Requirements. The candidate must successfully complete the performance

measures for both the day and night courses to receive a GO. The tasks listed in
paragraph 4-12c, below, are tested in a field environment with the required equipment
IAW paragraph 4-5.
(1) Each point will be marked with a sign. The sign will-
(a) Be constructed of metal or wood.
(b) Measure 12 inches by 12 inches (30.4 by 30.4 centimeters).
(c) Be painted diagonally half-white and half-international orange.

T
(d) Be staked into the ground so that its bottom is between 5- and 7-feet
(1.52 and 2.13 meters) above the ground. It WILL NOT BE mounted on trees or
AF
vegetation.
(e) Have a clearly identifiable, unique letter or number on it for identification.

R
Other markings (grid coordinates, azimuths, directions) are NOT authorized on the
signs or other areas within the land navigation course.
D
(2) The host unit will use a satellite-type navigational system to verify the points
on the course.
(3) The host unit will not use preestablished points and score sheets from
previous EFMB tests or utilized by other units or agencies (i.e., EIB, Range Control). A
minimum of five start points and end points will be set up.
(4) The host unit will run standardization week the same as test week.
Candidates, without assistance, will be allowed one opportunity to complete the day and
night courses during standardization week. All signs should be changed between
standardization and testing phases.
(5) The host unit will place a minimum of three observers on the course to
enforce land navigation standards.
(6) The host unit will NOT review the points with the candidates upon completion
of both the day and night courses during standardization and test weeks. Candidates
will receive a GO or NO GO only. The host unit will not give more information.
4-15
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(7) Candidates will carry a red, green, or blue-lens flashlight and a chemical light
stick during the night course. No larger than two “D” cell battery flashlights may be
utilized on the night land navigation course. The use of white light or a chemical light
stick is for emergencies only.
(8) Prior to testing, candidates will be briefed on their responsibility to provide

first aid to other candidates if the need arises. Candidates are not penalized for
providing assistance. They will be allowed to retake the test without penalty if they
should fail as a result of rendering aid.
(9) Candidates will be checked by host units for unauthorized test aids before
and after the start of both the day and night courses.
(10) Candidates, without assistance, must negotiate each course within the time
specified in the respective standard. Evaluators must be present within the vicinity of
the end points to annotate the candidate's end time. They will NOT be penalized for the
time it takes to move from the end point to the score sheet collection point.
(11) The land navigation site will have compass verification and pace count
areas established for the candidates. These areas will be checked for accuracy during
T
validation.
AF
(12) No talking or interaction between candidates is permitted on the land
navigation courses at any time. Candidates should stay at least 10 feet away from other
R
candidates at all times.

D
c. Tasks.
(1) Day course. The day course must measure between 3,500 and 4,000
meters. The course has three direction changes, the first at point one (not the start
point). No point on the course, to include distractor points, will be closer than 100
meters to another point. Candidates must navigate the course IAW the task standards.
(2) Night course.
(a) The night course must measure between 3,000 and 3,500 meters. The
course has three direction changes, the first at point one (not the start point). No point
on the course, to include distractor points, will be closer than 100 meters to another
point. Candidates must navigate the course IAW the task standards.
(b) Artificial illumination (such as light sticks) may be used to mark the
general boundaries of the course, but not the individual points. Candidates may not use
artificial illumination or red/green/blue-lens flashlight to mark their direction.
(c) The host unit may start the night course no earlier than 1 hour after
4-16
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
sunset. The test board chairperson will determine the actual start time based on local
conditions.
d. Equipment. The equipment required for the day and night courses are specified
in the land navigation score sheets. NO OTHER EQUIPMENT IS AUTHORIZED. The
host unit will issue the topographic map, score sheet, and the eight digit coordinates of
the five points to the candidates for both the day and night courses. The map and score
sheet must be returned to the host unit upon completion of each course. Candidates
may use a clipboard or other flat surface to plot their points.
e. Changes. Changes are NOT authorized without an exception to policy approval.
4-13. TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS.
a. Objective. To measure the candidate's ability to prioritize casualties and apply

tactical combat casualty care and emergency medical treatment skills in a contemporary
combat operating environment.
b. Requirements. The candidate is required to complete the 15 tasks listed in

paragraph 4-13c, below, within a time limit established by the EFMB test board
T
chairperson, and pass 12 of the 15. The tasks are tested in a simulated battlefield
scenario with the required equipment IAW paragraphs 4-5 and 4-6. The candidates' aid
AF
bags will contain the items on a packing list provided by the EFMB test board. The
candidate is placed in a scenario with numerous simulated casualties (minimum of 4)
incurred in the negotiation of the CTL. At the end of the time established by the test
R
board chairperson, the tasks not completed will be scored a NO GO. This includes
performing a casualty assessment for each casualty.
D
c. Tasks. The following tasks are tested in a lane using reaction-style testing.
(1) Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures.
(2) Control bleeding using a tourniquet.
(3) Control bleeding using a hemostatic device.
(4) Triage casualties.
(5) Perform tactical combat casualty assessment.
(6) Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent hypothermia.
(7) Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion.
(8) Insert a nasopharyngeal airway.
4-17
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(9) Treat a penetrating chest wound.
(10) Perform needle chest decompression.
(11) Treat an open abdominal wound.
(12) Control bleeding using dressings.
(13) Treat an open head wound.
(14) Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye.
(15) Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm.
d. Communication.
(1) Upon arrival at the lane where TCCC tasks are evaluated, all platoons will
receive a FRAGO. Prior to the candidate starting the lane the evaluator will provide
them with a team briefing.
(2) Any acronyms (i.e., DCAP-BTLS, TIC) that the candidate will use during the
T
testing of the TCCC tasks will be defined by the candidate to the evaluator following the
AF
team brief. This portion of the lane will not be timed. If the candidate utilizes an
acronym during the lane that was not defined prior, the evaluator will ask for it’s
definition, which will be included in their time.
R
(3) All communication between the evaluator and the candidate during testing of
D
tasks will be IAW the evaluator cues (“Evaluator States”) on the applicable score
sheets. The evaluator may add additional information to further clarify a cue (i.e. “Pulse
is strong and bounding”). FRAGOs will be utilized throughout the lane to communicate
the situation.
e. Equipment. The host unit will provide all equipment and supplies for TCCC tasks
at the tested sites (see Appendix E).
(1) The host unit may not recycle used consumable medical supplies during
testing with the exception of cravats, tourniquets, hemostatic devises, Asherman chest
seal, and Hypothermia Prevention and Management Kit.
(2) The host unit will have hazardous sharps disposable containers for each lane
that is testing the TCCC tasks.
(3) Candidates are required to pack their own aid bag prior to the start of the
lane. Improper packing of the aid bag by the candidate is not grounds for rebuttal.
(4) The test board will provide the final aid bag packing list. The test board will
4-18
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
only authorize equipment that is listed in the tasks. No other equipment is authorized
for use during testing.
(5) Simulated casualty mannequins and training devices are required and/or
may be utilized for various TCCC tasks (i.e., IV arm, torso to perform needle
decompression). It is recommended that these devices be made to look as much like a
real patient as possible by using uniforms and moulage. Staging and incorporation into
the lane should be accomplished in a method to increase the realism of the event.
(6) Several of the tasks have various techniques and/or equipment that can be
tested. The candidate may choose any of the listed techniques, based on the
equipment that they have in their aid bag IAW the packing list.
f. Moulage. All casualties will be moulaged to clearly indicate wounds without the
necessity for verbal prompting by the evaluator. Casualties will be moulaged to the
same standard during standardization as testing. Special attention should be made that
the quality of moulage doesn’t deteriorate as candidates rotate through the lanes.
g. Conducting Testing of TCCC. Testing of the TCCC tasks will be divided into
three distinct phases, each with its own characteristics and limitations. Medical and
Casualty Evacuation tasks, Warrior Skills tasks, and Communication Skills tasks should
T
be incorporated into these phases. The task Perform Tactical Combat Casualty Care
AF
Procedures will assist in establishing the sequence of the tasks as they will be
evaluated. The TCCC tasks will be evaluated in different phases. The concept briefing
will show where they will be evaluated. During standardization, candidates will be
R
standardized on how and when they will react and what is expected from them when
they are being evaluated. The TCCC Handbook listed in Appendix A is an excellent
D
overview to become more familiar with TCCC principles. The three phases are broadly
described below.
(1) Care under fire. This is the care rendered at the point of injury while both the
medic and the casualty are under effective hostile fire. The risk of additional injuries
from hostile fire at any moment is extremely high for both the casualty and medic.
Available medical equipment is limited to that carried by the medic and the casualty.
(2) Tactical field care. This is the care rendered by the medic once he and the
casualty are no longer under effective hostile fire. It also applies to situations in which
an injury has occurred on a mission, but there has been no hostile fire. Available
medical equipment is still limited to that carried into the field by mission personnel.
Time to evacuation may vary from minutes to hours.
(3) Combat Casualty Evacuation (CASEVAC) care. This is the care rendered
once the casualty has been picked up by an aircraft, vehicle, or boat. Additional
medical personnel and equipment that has been pre-staged in these assets should be
available during this phase of casualty management.
4-19
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
h. Body Substance Isolation (BSI). The majority of the TCCC tasks have a
performance step/measure to take BSI precautions. The EFMB host unit will
standardize candidates on what actions they will take with the applicable tasks
depending on their concept of operation.
i. Performance steps/measures with grey shaded GO/NO-GO boxes on the

scoresheet will NOT be evaluated in EFMB. They are listed to avoid confusion due to
the fact that many organizations train their medical personnel to perform these tasks.
j. Changes. Changes are NOT authorized without an exception to policy approval.
4-14. MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS.
a. Objective. To measure the candidate’s ability to evacuate casualties using

manual carries, medical devices, tactical vehicles, evacuation platforms, and aircraft in
a battlefield scenario.
b. Requirements. The candidate is required to complete 10 performance tasks listed

below and pass 8 of the 10. The test board chairperson will determine which vehicle or
aircraft is tested if there are more than one option (i.e., The test board chairperson will
T
determine if paragraph 4-14c(4a) or 4-14c(4b) is tested). The tasks are tested in a
simulated battlefield scenario with the required equipment IAW paragraphs 4-5 and 4-6.
AF
(1) The host unit will not establish a combat testing lane with all evacuation tasks
or evacuation platforms on it. Some of these tasks must be incorporated into the testing
R
of the TCCC tasks. Paragraph 4-13(g) and Appendix E provide additional information
on creating the combat testing lanes and TCCC.
D
(2) The host unit will train the candidates on all of the one and two person
manual carries and drags, litter carries, and SKED litter listed in this publication that
may be performed IAW their approved concept briefing. The candidates will be
standardized on the best carry or drag for the various situations that they will encounter
during EFMB testing. This also includes the 4-person carry position and the commands
to lift, move, load, and lower the litter. The test board chairperson will determine the
placement and order of any obstacles, the distance, and the grade of terrain between
obstacles. This criteria must be safe and achievable, and similar on each lane for each
candidate.
(3) Candidates will serve as the number 1 litter bearer when loading casualties
onto a tactical vehicle, evacuation platform, or aircraft. The candidate does not have to
be in the number 1 position, but may position the litter bearers to best utilize the litter
squad’s strengths. All commands and directions will be given by the candidate to the
litter bearers.
(4) Candidates still in the running for the EFMB will not be used as casualties at
any time during testing. Candidates will not be used during two-person carries or drags
4-20
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
or as part of the litter bearer squad to load a vehicle or aircraft except when they are
being tested. The test board chairperson can choose to utilize noncandidates or
candidates as part of the litter bearer squad when performing the Evacuate Casualties
Using Litter Carries task. If candidates are utilized in this capacity, the following
information will be adhered to:
(a) Each candidate on the litter squad is graded individually. The squad
members are rotated so that they are evaluated as the number 1, 2, 3, and 4 person at
some point during the negotiation of the lane.
(b) Only the number 1 person will provide the commands to the litter squad.
Other members will not assist with the commands if the number 1 person forgets them.
Candidates will not provide any advice in the performance of the task to any other
member of the litter squad. Failure to follow these guidelines will result in an
administrative NO GO for that candidate on this task. The number 1 person does not
have to use the exact verbage (i.e., “Two-Person Carry Move”) to execute a litter carry
as long as they clearly communicate what must be accomplished to the other members
of the litter team. The number 1 person may issue additional commands or instructions
to correct a deficiency or control the squad. Other candidates will not be penalized if
given the wrong instructions or if another member of the litter squad causes further
injury to the casualty. T
AF
(5) Casualties will weigh between 140 and 180 pounds (63.56 and 81.72
kilograms). Mannequins are authorized as casualties on litters, including the SKED, as
long as they meet the weight requirement and are wearing a military uniform.
R
Mannequins are also authorized for use during the manual carries or extrication tasks,
only if the casualty is intended to be unconscious. Casualties and mannequins will give
D
a visual presentation of the injuries that are applicable to them (i.e., moulaged,
dressings applied, splints applied, tourniquets applied).
(6) Candidates must prepare all evacuation platforms for loading without
assistance from noncandidates (except for the M1113 Stryker Medical Evacuation
Vehicle).
(7) The host unit may request an exception to policy to utilize other military
vehicles that are organic to their organization (i.e., M1114 Up-Armored HWMMV) in lieu
of the vehicles listed in this chapter. The host unit must submit proposed task,
conditions, standards, and performance steps/measures along with the exception to
policy to the EFMB TCO for approval.
(8) The host unit may use a mockup medical evacuation helicopter with an
approved exception to policy. The other alternative is for the host unit to request an
exception to policy to test another nonstandard vehicle or evacuation platform in lieu of
a medical evacuation helicopter. These will not replace the ones that are already being
tested.
4-21
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(9) Upon arrival at the lane where these tasks are evaluated, all platoons will
(10) All communication between the evaluator and the candidate during testing
of tasks will be IAW the evaluator cues (“Evaluator States”) on the applicable score
sheets. The evaluator may add additional information to further clarify a cue (i.e. “For
EFMB testing purposes, that power line is not present in your selection of your
helicopter landing zone”). FRAGOs will be utilized throughout the lane to communicate
the situation.
(11) When loading vehicles and evacuation platforms, casualties are prioritized
IAW priorities for treatment listed in the TCCC - TRIAGE CASUALTIES task in this
publication. DD Forms 1380 will be placed on the casualties with the exact verbage of
injuries from forenamed task. If the concept of operations on a lane makes it
advantageous to utilize casualties that were treated during the performance of TCCC
tasks by the candidate, then these casualties (without cadre made DD Forms 1380)
may be loaded on the vehicle or evacuation platform.
(12) Performance steps/measures with grey shaded GO/NO-GO boxes on the

scoresheet will NOT be evaluated in EFMB. They are listed to assist candidates in their
T
preparation for EFMB testing. The objective of the various one- and two-man carries
AF
and drags along with the litter carries is to evacuate the casualty without causing further
injury. However, selection and execution of a misappropriate carry, drag or litter carry
that would put the casualty and/or candidate in danger due to the tactical situation will
R
receive a No-Go; even if executed correctly.

D
c. Tasks. The following tasks are tested using reaction-style testing.
(1) Establish a helicopter landing point.
(2) Load casualties onto a medical evacuation helicopter.
(a) UH-60 helicopter.
(b) HH-60L helicopter.
(3) Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform.
(a) M996, M997, or M113.
(b) M1113, Stryker Medical Evacuation Vehicle (MEV).
(4) Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle.
(a) 5-ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2½-ton M-1081.
4-22
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(b) 2½-ton, 6x6 or 5-ton, 6x6, cargo truck.
(5) Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1¼-ton, 4x4, M998).
(6) Extricate casualties from a vehicle.
(7) Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter.
(8) Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags.
(9) Evacuate casualties using two-person carries or drags.
(10) Evacuate casualties using litter carries.
d. Equipment. The host unit will provide all equipment and supplies for evacuation
tasks at the tested sites.
4-15. COMMUNICATION TASKS.

T
AF
a. Objective. The objective of the communication tasks is to measure the
candidate's ability to install, initiate, and operate field communications equipment and
use correct communications procedures in a battlefield scenario.
R
b. Requirements. The candidate is required to complete the performance measures

D
in the 5 performance tasks listed in paragraph 4-15c, below, and receive a GO in 4 of

the 5. The task “Prepare and Transmit a MEDEVAC Request” is a “Mandatory Go.” All
tasks will be tested in a battlefield scenario with the required equipment IAW
paragraphs 4-5 and 4-6.
(1) The host unit will provide the candidates information required to conduct the
communications tasks (i.e., call signs, frequency, and medical evacuation (MEDEVAC)
request) during the OPORD, FRAGO, or scenario brief.
(2) The host unit will issue the candidate one GTA 03-06-008 (NBC Warning and
Reporting System), one GTA 08-01-004 (MEDEVAC Request Form), one GTA 09-12-
110 (Unexploded Ordnance Procedures), and one CBRN 1 report map before the start
of the combat lane that requires them. Losing one of the GTAs, while negotiating a lane,
is not a valid rebuttal. Candidates may use their own GTA cards, but they must be
presented to the evaluator prior to negotiating the lane and have no markings present.
(3) Candidates will not be allowed to use the issued GTA cards, CBRN 1 report
map, or information provided in the OPORD, FRAGO, or scenario brief until the task is
tested.
4-23
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(4) Candidates’ notepads will not be used to prescript communications tasks

prior to testing of the task.
(5) Evaluators will report all test integrity violations to the lane OIC/NCOIC and
the test board.
(6) The precedences on line 3 of the MEDEVAC request are determined from
their assessment of the casualties and IAW Table 4-2. Since these are moulaged
casualties and not real patients, interpretation problems are possible. To ensure that
candidates are clear and there is no confusion, the EFMB host unit will tell what
evacuation category precedence each casualty will fall into during standardization.
The MEDEVAC request will not be tested with a written scenario. The candidate will
utilize the information gained from the OPORD, FRAGO, and/or scenario brief along
with their assessment of the casualties evaluated in their testing of the TCCC tasks.
(a) Evacuation time periods are associated with each evacuation category.
These time periods are flexible, mission dependent, and vary greatly among the
services based upon the different types of evacuation assets that each uses. The times
listed in Table 4-2 are applicable for Army, Navy, and Marines. The Air Force is
different. T
AF
(b) The Army uses “Urgent Surgical” and “Convenience” evacuation
categories on the medical evacuation request. These evacuation categories are not
used by all of the other branches of the military.
R
(7) Communications will not be tested as a stand alone lane. Tasks will be
D
incorporated into the testing of the various CTLs. Appendix E provides additional
information on creating the CTLs.
sheets. The evaluator may add additional information to further clarify a cue or in acting
as higher headquarters receiving a report or message. FRAGOs will be utilized
throughout the lane to communicate the situation.
4-24
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EVACUATION CATEGORY
EVACUATION TIME PERIODS
PRECEDENCES
URGENT To save life, limb, or eyesight within 2 hours.
URGENT SURGICAL Condition may need immediate surgical intervention.
PRIORITY Medical condition could deteriorate within 4 hours.

Condition is not expected to deteriorate significantly
ROUTINE
while awaiting evacuation within 24 hours.
Condition is not expected to significantly change for an
CONVENIENCE
extended period of time, greater than 72 hours.
Table 4-2. Medical Evacuation Precedences.
c. Tasks. Candidates will be tested on one task from each area below. If the model
of communications equipment that will be utilized for testing can’t support the
performance steps/measures listed in this publication, the host unit must request an
exception to policy. They must also submit proposed performance steps/measures that
can be performed on the applicable communications equipment. The test board
T
chairperson will determine which tasks are tested prior and include them in the concept
briefing submitted to the EFMB TCO. All candidates will be tested on the same task,
AF
using the same type of equipment.
(1) Radio.
R
(a) Assemble and operate a single channel ground and airborne radio
D
system (SINCGARS) (Advanced System Improvement Program [ASIP]) without

automated net control device (ANCD).
(b) Assemble and operate a SINCGARS without the ANCD.
(2) Radio net.
(a) Load frequency hop (FH)/communications security (COMSEC) data and

conduct radio check using SINCGARS (ASIP).
(b) Load FH/COMSEC data and conduct radio check using SINCGARS.
(3) Prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request (using secure mode radio).
MANDATORY GO.
(4) Submit CBRN 1 report.
(5) Submit explosive hazard spot report.
4-25
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
d. Equipment. Some of the communications tasks offer a choice of equipment. The

test board chairperson selects the equipment. At no time will the equipment for tasks
not selected be on the testing lane. The host unit will be required to obtain training fills
for the ANCDs. It is also strongly recommended to have backup equipment in case of
unexpected equipment failure.
4-16. WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS.
a. Objective. To measure the candidate's ability to apply warrior skills to protect

himself and the casualty in a battlefield scenario.
b. Requirements. The candidate is required to complete 13 tasks, as indicated in

paragraph 4-16c, below, and pass 10 of the 13. These tasks are tested in a simulated
battlefield scenario with the required equipment IAW paragraphs 4-5 and 4-6.
(1) The host unit will provide the following supplies/materials to the candidate:
(a) One set of nerve agent autoinjector training aids prior to the start of the
combat lane.
T
AF
(b) One M295 individual equipment decontamination kit (IEDK).
(c) One loaded magazine with a minimum of seven blank rounds and one
R
dummy round prior to the start of the “Correct Malfunction of an M4 Carbine or M16-
Series Rifle” task.
D
(2) Candidates will have their unit issued CBRN supplies (except M295 IEDK
and nerve agent autoinjector training aids) prior to the start of the combat lanes that
require them.
(3) Candidates are required to bring fully functional MOPP or JSLIST gear. If
their gear becomes unserviceable or has deficiencies, they are required to inform the
evaluator prior to beginning testing on the applicable testing lane.
(4) Warrior Skills tasks will not be tested as a stand alone lane. Tasks will be
incorporated into the testing of the various CTLs. Appendix E provides additional
information on creating the CTLs.
4-26
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
sheets. The evaluator may add additional information to further clarify a cue. FRAGOs
will be utilized throughout the lane to communicate the situation.
(7) The test board chairperson will determine the placement and order of any
obstacles, the distance, and the grade of terrain between obstacles. This criteria must
be realistic and similar on each lane for each candidate.
c. Tasks. The tasks listed in this paragraph are tested using reaction-style testing.
(1) Candidates will only test on one of the following tasks depending on which
type of protective mask they were issued, with or without hood.
(a) Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination using your

assigned protective mask.
(b) Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination using your

assigned protective mask with JSLIST mission oriented protective posture gear.
(2) Decontaminate yourself using chemical decontaminating kits.
T
type of CBRN protective gear they were issued, MOPP or JSLIST.
AF
(a) Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with MOPP gear.
R
(b) Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with JSLIST chemical

protective ensemble.
D
(4) Perform self-aid for mild nerve agent poisoning.
type of CBRN protective gear they were issued, MOPP or JSLIST.
(a) Protect yourself from biological or chemical injury/contamination when

removing MOPP gear.
(b) Protect yourself from chemical or biological injury/contamination when

removing mission oriented protective posture using JSLIST.
type of protective mask they were issued, with or without hood.
(a) Store the M40-series protective mask without hood.
(b) Store the M40-series protective mask with hood.
4-27
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(7) Correct malfunction of an M4-series carbine or M16-series rifle.
(8) Disassemble and assemble an M9 pistol and perform a function check.
(9) Move under direct fire.
(10) React to indirect fire.
they were issued, either the M16-series rifle or M4/M4A1 carbine:
(a) Disassemble, assemble, and perform a function check on an M16-series

rifle.
(b) Disassemble, assemble, and perform a function check on an M4 or M4A1

carbine.
(12) Move over, through, or around obstacles.
(13) React to an unexploded ordinance (UXO) or possible improvised explosive

devise (IED). T
AF
d. Equipment. Candidates will be tested on the same type of equipment with the
exception of their assigned protective mask, MOPP or JSLIST gear, and weapon.
R

D
4-17. FOOT MARCH.
a. Objective. To measure a candidate’s physical stamina, state of training, and

mental attitude.
b. Requirements. Candidates must complete a 12-mile (19.3 kilometers) foot march,

within 3 hours, carrying their individual field equipment IAW Table 2-2. This event is the
last event tested during EFMB testing.
(1) Test board members will verify the march route to 63,360 feet (12 miles or
19,308 meters) with a calibrated measuring wheel. A vehicle odometer will not be used.
Markers will be placed at each mile along the route.
(2) The test board chairperson will develop a thorough risk assessment and
revise it, as necessary, depending on weather conditions. The risk for heat injuries is
always present in strenuous events. Occurrences rise rapidly when the wet bulb globe
temperature (WBGT) reaches 65°F. Risk reduction measures, such as unblousing the
pants, are allowed. The test board chairperson may approve these measures as
weather conditions necessitate.
4-28
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Standing operating procedures must be developed for the provision of

medical care. Measures include WBGT readings, treatment of injuries, and evacuation
procedures and routes. Active surveillance of the participants along the march route is
essential. Sufficient ice must be available for immediate body cooling. Intravenous and
oral fluids must be readily available for immediate re-hydration. Automated defibrillation
should be available if transport to an acute care life support-qualified medical facility
cannot be accomplished in less than 6 minutes. Position a combat lifesaver or medic,
with aid bag, at each water point. They should have a radio or telephone for
communications with the EFMB operations center. These personnel must be able to
recognize the initial stages of heat injuries and take appropriate action. An aid station
should be set up at the end of the march to evaluate the candidates for injuries,
dehydration, confusion or disorientation, and temperature before releasing them.
Immediate IV re-hydration is extremely beneficial.
(4) Proper hydration procedures must be enforced. On the day before the
march, candidates should consume several quarts (liters) of water. On the morning of
the march, candidates should consume one or two quarts of water. They should
consume at least one quart (.9 liter) an hour during the march, preferably drinking some
every 15 to 30 minutes. Maximum consumption should not exceed 1.25 quarts (1.18
liters) an hour or 12 quarts (11.35 liters) a day. Actual amounts required will vary with
T
the individual and weather conditions.
AF
(5) The host unit will have a minimum of two stopwatches, a primary and an
alternate, to maintain the official march time. The time starts when the last candidate
R
crosses the start line. Elapsed time readings are recommended because they assist the
candidates in pacing themselves. A large race time clock is recommend for the finish
D
line.
(6) The host unit will brief the candidates in detail on the route, mile markers,
water points, and direction changes. (A strip map of the route will be provided.)
(7) The host unit test board chairperson will set the parameters on the
participation of noncandidates and other personnel on the road march based on the
host sites’ support capabilities. All noncandidates that participate in the road march are
not allowed to enter the course until at least 300 meters after the start line and must be
removed from the course at least 100 meters before the finish line.
(8) Candidates must start and finish the course with the equipment in Table 2-2.
The host unit will conduct a uniform and equipment inspection prior to and at the end of
the march.
(9) Candidates must carry their weapon “at the ready.” They will not strap the
weapon to the rucksack, disassemble the weapon, or carry the weapon at sling arms.
The weapon will not be slung in any manner to the candidate’s body or equipment.
4-29
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(10) Candidates must carry the protective mask with carrier strapped around
their waist or shoulder.
(11) Candidates will not be assisted during the march in any way. This includes,
but is not limited to, adjusting their equipment for them and providing items such as dry
socks, food, or drink. Candidates must secure their own water or refill their canteens at
authorized water stations. Candidates may carry additional items for their own
consumption, such as sports drinks and energy bars. However, they must carry these
additional items and have them on their person prior to beginning the march.
Candidates may not receive additional items after the march starts.
(12) A rest or sleep period must be afforded the candidates prior to the march.
The duration of this rest or sleep period will be at least 4 to 6 continuous hours.
(13) The candidate will receive a NO GO for any of the following:
(a) Not completing the entire road march route.
(b) Not completing the road march within the 3-hour time limit.
(c) Not starting and finishing with the equipment listed in Table 2-2.
T
AF
(d) Receiving assistance along the route.
(e) Not carrying the weapon and/or mask as stated in paragraphs 4-17b(9)
R
and 4-17b(10).
D
(14) The host unit must maintain positive control of the finish line and allow no
contact between the candidates and non-candidates until the final inspection of
equipment and medical clearance is completed.
c. Equipment. The host unit will provide all equipment and supplies to administer the
foot march.
d. Changes. Changes are NOT authorized without an exception to policy approval.
4-30
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CHAPTER 5
THE EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL COMPETITION
5-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter explains procedures, provisions, authorities, and

testing requirements for the Expert Field Medical Competition (EFMC). The EFMC is an
individual, annual competition that challenges the Army’s best medics in a demanding,
continuous, and realistic simulated combat environment. The winner claims the title as
the Army’s Top Medic for that year.
5-2. EFMC TESTING.
a. The EFMC is an individual competition during which the competitors are tested on
the following areas:
(1) Physical Fitness Test (PFT).
(2) Written Test (WT).
(3) Marksmanship.
(4) Obstacle Course (OC).

T
AF
(5) Combat Medical Lanes (CMLs).
R
(a) EFMB Tactical Combat Casualty Care (TCCC) tasks.

D
(b) EFMB Medical and Casualty Evacuation tasks.
(c) EFMB Warrior Skills tasks.
(d) EFMB Communications tasks.
(e) Selected tasks from WT references.
(6) Top Medic Stakes. Selected tasks or material from the WT references.
(7) Day and Night Land Navigation.
(8) 12-Mile Foot March.
b. Paragraph 5-10 outlines the scoring system for the competition.
c. All events, except for in- and out-processing and awards ceremony, will be
completed within 72 hours.
5-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
d. The sequence and concept of execution of the tested events will be approved by
the Commander, AMEDDC&S.
e. There are no rebuttal boards during the EFMC. The EFMB TCO and the EFMC
test board will monitor all EFMC events and review score sheets to ensure that testing
is IAW the standards in this publication.
f. The EFMC test board chairperson will establish a realistic time limit for
competitors to move on foot from one location to another during the competition. For
example, giving competitors 1-hour to move on foot from the obstacle course to the
weapons range. Competitors not meeting an established time limit will automatically be
ranked at the bottom of the tested event at the location they were moving to.
g. The competitors will receive an initial OPORD issued during in-processing.

FRAGOs for each testing lane will be driven from the initial OPORD. The CMLs will be
conducted with reaction style testing based off of a realistic scenario.
h. The competition will be executed with all necessary recourses (i.e., OPFOR,
smoke, simulators) to create realism during the event.
i. Competitors must perform all tasks during the competition professionally and
T
ethically IAW this publication and the Army values.
AF
5-3 . HOSTING THE EFMC.
R
a. Camp Bullis, TX, is the only authorized site to conduct the EFMC.
D
b. The request to host the EFMC will be submitted NLT 180 days prior to the
competition start date for approval by the Commander, AMEDDC&S.
c. All concept briefings, exceptions to policy and other requirements will be

submitted to the EFMB TCO for review and approval by the Commander, AMEDDC&S.
d. Paragraph 5-6d stipulates all suspenses associated with hosting the EFMC.
e. The EFMB TCO, under the direction of the Commander, AMEDDC&S, will
maintain and update the EFMC Program and maintain a continuity package.
5-4. COMPETITOR ELIGIBILITY REQUIREMENTS.
a. Only Army personnel who have been awarded the EFMB and/or the CMB are
eligible to participate and must meet the following requirements:
(1) Officers must be assigned or detailed to an AMEDD corps.
5-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Warrant Officers must have an AMEDD primary MOS controlled by The
Surgeon General. Warrant Officer pilots with a “D” special qualifications identifier
(Aeromedical Evacuation Pilot) and assigned to an air ambulance unit are also eligible.
(3) Enlisted personnel must have an AMEDD primary MOS or MOS 18D. This
includes all MOSs in the 68-career management field.
b. Other branches of the military and allied forces are not eligible to compete.
5-5. COMPETITOR PREREQUISITES.
a. Volunteered for the competition.
b. Recommended by their unit commander.
c. Selected to represent one of the commands allocated slots for competitors.
d. Be physically and mentally prepared to cope with the rigorous demands of the
EFMC and are trained in the prevention of heat- and cold-related injuries. Competitors
must not be on a medical profile that would prevent them from participating in any event
of the competition, and must meet the weight standards of AR 600-9.
T
AF
5-6. PROVISIONS AND AUTHORITIES.
a. The Surgeon General.

R
(1) Staff agent for the EFMC.

D
(2) The US Army Medical Command (MEDCOM) will distribute allocations for
EFMC participation. Each division, group, regiment, medical brigade, regional medical
command, or other organization receiving an allocation will determine who will represent
their command as EFMC competitor(s). Organizations must submit a memorandum
stating if they will be filling their allocations no later than 120 days prior to the EFMC
start date. All competitor registration documentation must be submitted no later than 90
days prior to the EFMC start date. Eligible organizations who fail to register individuals
before the deadline will forfeit their allocation(s).
b. Commander, AMEDDC&S.
(1) Executive agent for the management of the EFMC.
(2) Directs to conduct the EFMC through the EFMB TCO NLT 180 days prior to
the EFMC start date.
5-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Appoints an AMEDD field grade officer as the EFMC test board chairperson.
This individual is responsible for conducting the EFMC IAW this publication and must be
an awardee of the EFMB.
(4) Provides guidance and approves the sequence and concept of execution of
the EFMC.
c. EFMB TCO.
(1) The EFMB TCO, under the direction of the Commander, AMEDDC&S, will
maintain and update the EFMC Program, as required.
(2) Reviews all score sheets, concept briefings, and submits exceptions to policy
to the Commander, AMEDDC&S.
(3) As the representative of the Commander, AMEDDC&S, validates and

observes all phases of the competition.
(4) Enforces the standards in this publication and the intent of the Commander,
AMEDDC&S and reports deviations to the test board chairperson IAW paragraph 2-9.
T
(5) Submits a report of test deviation to the Commander, AMEDDC&S, in cases
AF
of unresolved competition standard deficiencies.
(6) Provides guidance to the EFMC test board chairperson and provides
R
feedback to the Commander, AMEDDC&S on all EFMC issues.

D
(7) Provides, administers, and grades the EFMC WT.
(8) Serves as the website administrator for the EFMC Army Top Medic Website
(https://www.us.army.mil/suite/page/276652) and maintains and updates the EFMC
information.
(9) Maintains a historical package of each year’s competition.
(10) Maintains a continuity package for conducting the EFMC.
(11) Prepares and submits an AAR to the Commander, AMEDDC&S on the

competition NLT three weeks after the competition.
d. EFMC Test Board Chairperson.
(1) Establishes an EFMC test board. The test board will consist of three
AMEDD officers or noncommissioned officers in the rank of MSG or higher. Test board
members must be awardees of the EFMB and/or CMB.
5-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Assigns OIC and NCOIC who will be responsible for the overall operation of
the competition. Both will be in the rank of SFC or above and awardees of the EFMB.
(3) Assigns lane OICs/NCOICs who will be responsible for the operation of each
of the tested events.
(4) Assigns evaluators who are subject matter experts on the tasks they will be
evaluating. All evaluators of tasks on the CMLs and medical tasks on the Top Medic
Stakes must be awardees of the EFMB and/or CMB. Subject matter experts may be
utilized with the approval of the Commander, AMEDDC&S.
(5) Conducts an analysis of previous EFMCs to identify weaknesses that require

corrections or further preparation. The EFMB TCO will assist the EFMC test board
chairperson and staff to ensure a better testing environment and utilization of resources.
(6) Prepares the EFMC memorandum of instruction (MOI) and submits to

organizations allocated EFMC slots NLT 150 days prior to the EFMC start date.
(7) Submits lane concept briefings and score sheets to the EFMB TCO for
approval by the Commander, AMEDDC&S NLT 120 days prior to the competition.
Establishes competitor foot movement and CML negotiation time limits.
T
AF
(8) Requests exception to policy on tasks or equipment, as applicable, NLT 60
days prior to the EFMC start date.
R
(9) Prepares and forwards a competitors letter to all competitors and their
sponsors to explain other details of the EFMC.
D
(10) Coordinates administrative, logistical, and medical support for the EFMC.
during all phases of the EFMC IAW guidance from the Commander, AMEDDC&S and
FM 5-19.
(12) Conducts evaluator and lane validations, with the assistance of the EFMB
TCO, to include 12-mile foot march and land navigation courses prior to the competition.
(13) Conducts the competition IAW the standards in this publication and
guidance from the EFMB TCO and Commander, AMEDDC&S.
(14) Ensures all test board members are present during the entire validation
process and that at least two test board members are onsite during testing.
(15) Removes competitors that compromise test integrity.
(16) Establishes an EFMC operations center to aid in command and control.
5-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(17) May reproduce any part of this publication to facilitate conduct of the EFMC.
(18) Conducts an appropriate awards ceremony at the end of the competition.
(19) Submits an after action report to the EFMB TCO, within two weeks after the
competition end date IAW FM 7-1 and TC 25-20. Notable issues will be utilized for
future EFMC improvements.
(20) Provides the EFMB TCO copies of all documentation and requested items
involved in the EFMC for incorporation in the EFMC historical and continuity packages.
e. Commanders Allocated EFMC Slots.
(1) Submits a memorandum stating if they will be filling their allocation for
competitors no later than 120 days prior to the EFMC start date to the designated office
as stated in the EFMC MOI.
(2) Registers competitor(s) IAW paragraph 5-7. All competitor registration

documentation must be submitted no later than 90 days prior to the EFMC start date.
(3) Ensures competitor(s) are physically prepared to cope with the rigorous
T
demands of the EFMC and are trained in the prevention of heat- and cold-related
AF
injuries. Competitors must meet all eligibility requirements and prerequisites, not be on
a medical profile that would prevent them from participating in any phase of the
competition, and must meet the weight standards of AR 600-9.
R
(4) Changing competitors is strongly discouraged. However, it is recommended

D
that the commands have a backup competitor(s) should their primary competitor(s)
become unable to compete prior to the competition.
5-7. COMPETITOR REGISTRATION.
a. Organizations must register their competitor(s) by submitting the following items

to the designated office as stated in the EFMC MOI NLT 90 days prior to the EFMC
start date. Eligible organizations who fail to register competitors before the deadline will
forfeit their allocation(s).
(1) A competitor registration memorandum IAW the format in Figure 5-1.
(2) A current copy of the competitor’s ERB or ORB with photo.
(3) A copy of the competitor’s orders awarding the EFMB and/or CMB.
(4) A commander’s recommendation letter.
b. The EFMC MOI will provide detailed information on the competition.
5-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

REPLY TO
ATTENTION OF
OFFICE SYMBOL Date
MEMORANDUM FOR Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB) Test Control Office
SUBJECT: Expert Field Medical Competition (EFMC) Competitor Registration
1. Reference US Army Medical Department Center and School Pamphlet 350-10, Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB)
Test, dated 1 October 2006 and EFMC MOI dated XX XXXX.
2. I recommend the following Soldier to represent our command in the upcoming EFMC.
a. Rank and Name: SSG Doe, John J.
b. Social security number: XXX-XX-XXXX
c. MOS/AOC: XXXXX
d. Gender: Male or Female
:
e.
T
Major Command (MACOM): Organization that the competitor is representing
AF
f. Assigned unit and mailing address: Competitor’s unit and unit mailing address
g. Unit phone number: DSN XXX-XXXX Civilian XXX-XXX-XXXX Fax XXX-XXXX

R
h. Competitor’s home mailing address: Competitor’s home mailing address
i. Competitor’s AKO email address: john.doe4@us.army.mil

D
j. Competitor’s daytime phone number: DSN XXX-XXXX Civilian XXX-XXX-XXXX Fax XXX-XXXX
k. Equipment sizes. Protective mask: XX MOPP/JSLIST suit: XX Body armor: XX T-Shirt: XX
l. Medical Information: Blood type: XXX Allergies: XXX Previous Hot or Cold Injury: XXX
m. Awards, badges, and tabs: List all awards, badges, and tabs awarded to the competitor.
n. Current and previous assignments/positions: Chronological listing of assignments and positions.
o. Deployments: List deployments.
p. Sponsor’s Rank and Name: MSG Jones, Jack B.
q. Sponsor’s AKO email address: jack.jones@us.army.mil
r. Sponsor’s phone number: DSN XXX-XXXX Civilian XXX-XXX-XXXX Fax XXX-XXXX
3. A copy of the above stated Soldier’s orders awarding the EFMB and/or CMB, copy of their ERB/ORB with photo, and
commander’s recommendation letter are attached.
4. Point of contact for memorandum is CPT Bond at DSN XXX-XXXX or Civilian XXX-XXX-XXXX.
JOHN G. JEFFERSON
BG, MS
Commanding
Figure 5-1. Competitor Registration Memorandum.
5-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
5-8. COMPETITOR EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. Competitors are required to

bring all items listed in the EFMB packing list (see Table 2-2), complete Army Physical
Fitness Uniform with running shoes, and patrol cap. The EFMC MOI will provide further
guidance, address any additional requirements, and clarify equipment and testing
issues. Competitors should bring only what is absolutely necessary to compete in the
competition. Failure to bring all of the required items will result in an automatic
disqualification from the competition.
5-9. EFMC EVENTS.
a. In-processing. The EFMC MOI will provide specific guidance on in-processing.
b. PFT. Competitors will be tested on their physical fitness level. The PFT consists
of three events: push-ups, sit-ups, and 2-mile run, conducted IAW FM 21-20. NO
ALTERNATE EVENTS ARE AUTHORIZED FOR THIS COMPETITION. The PFT is
administered to each EFMC competitor IAW FM 21-20. The uniform for the PFT will be
stated in the EFMC MOI. All competitors are graded IAW age group standards 27-31.
Points will be awarded to the competitors based on overall performance IAW Table 5-1.
A variation of the extended scale will be utilized for individuals achieving the maximum
score in each of the PFT events. Competitors will be ranked from first to last based on
T
their total points for the PFT. The fastest run time will determine the ranking in cases of
AF
a tie.
R
300 = 50 289 − 288 = 39 263 − 261 = 27 223 − 220 = 15

299 = 49 287 − 286 = 38 260 − 258 = 26 219 − 216 = 14
D
298 = 48 285 − 284 = 37 257 − 255 = 25 215 − 212 = 13

297 = 47 283 − 282 = 36 254 − 252 = 24 211 − 208 = 12
296 = 46 281 − 280 = 35 251 − 249 = 23 207 − 204 = 11
295 = 45 279 − 278 = 34 248 − 246 = 22 203 − 200 = 10
294 = 44 277 − 276 = 33 245 − 243 = 21 199 − 196 = 9
293 = 43 275 − 274 = 32 242 − 240 = 20 195 − 192 = 8
292 = 42 273 − 272 = 31 239 − 236 = 19 191 − 188 = 7
291 = 41 271 − 270 = 30 235 − 232 = 18 187 − 184 = 6
290 = 40 269 − 267 = 29 231 − 228 = 17 183 − 180 = 5
266 − 264 = 28 227 − 224 = 16 179 − 0 = 0
*add 1 point for every five points higher than 300, based on the standard APFT
extended scale.
Table 5-1. EFMC PFT Scoring System.
c. WT. Competitors will be tested on their knowledge of various military references.

The EFMB TCO provides, administers, and grades the EFMC WT. No other personnel
are authorized to administer the WT for the EFMC. The WT can be administered at any
point in the competition and in any type of environment. The WT questions will be
5-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
derived from the same references as the EFMB WT listed in paragraph 2-15. The WT
will consist of 100 questions with a 60-minute time limit. Competitors will receive one
point for each correct answer. Competitors will be ranked from first to last based on
their total points for the WT. The fastest time to complete the WT will determine the
ranking in cases of a tie.
d. Marksmanship. Competitors will be tested on their marksmanship skills with a M9

pistol and M16A2 rifle or M4 carbine. Competitors will be provided an opportunity to
zero their M16A2 rifle or M4 carbine. The firing positions, execution of the
marksmanship event, and number of targets and rounds to be fired will be included in
the concept briefing that must be submitted for approval.
(1) Battle sight zero. The standard 25 meter zero targets will be used to battle
sight zero their M16A2 rifle or M4 carbine. Each competitor will receive nine rounds to
zero their weapon, making adjustments every three rounds. No points are awarded for
this portion of the event.
(2) Point system. Competitors will be awarded one point for every target hit.
The total number of hits will be added together. Competitors will be ranked from first to
last based on their total marksmanship points. In cases of a tie, the competitor who has
the most hits with the M16A2 or M4 carbine will receive the higher ranking. If there is
T
still a tie, the competitor with the most hits with the M9 pistol will receive the higher
AF
ranking.
e. Obstacle Course. Competitors will be tested on their ability to successfully

R
negotiate an obstacle course. Other tasks (i.e., carry a simulated casualty over an
obstacle, drag a casualty on a SKED litter) may be incorporated in the obstacle course.
D
The obstacles and layout will be included in the concept briefing that must be submitted
for approval. All competitors will be standardized on the proper execution of the
obstacle course prior to testing. Should the competitor fail to honestly attempt and/or
incorrectly negotiate an obstacle, they will be informed by the evaluator immediately and
will have one opportunity to re-attempt negotiating the obstacle. A four minute penalty
will be assessed for every obstacle the competitor fails to honestly attempt and/or
negotiate properly. The total penalty time from all obstacles will be added to the time
taken to negotiate the obstacle course. Competitors will be ranked from first to last
based on their overall time for the obstacle course.
f. Land Navigation. Competitors will be tested on their ability to successfully

negotiate a land navigation orienteering course during day and night conditions. The
required equipment for the course includes: Lensatic compass, pencil, area map, GTA
5-2-12 protractor, flashlight with red lens, chemical light stick, and score sheet. Other
information as stated in paragraph 4-12b of this publication is applicable. Competitors
must start and finish the course with the required equipment. Competitors will carry a
fully packed medical aid bag during the land navigation course for EFMC.
5-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Course. Each competitor will receive a score sheet with 20 different grid
coordinates. The start point and score sheet turn-in point will be at the same location
for all competitors. No point on the course, to include distracter points, will be closer
than 50 meters to another point. Competitors will be given 20 minutes to plot their
points/course prior to the official start time. The land navigation course will begin three
hours prior to sunset or prior to sunrise. All competitors will start the land navigation
course at the same time. Competitors will have a maximum of six hours to negotiate
the land navigation course. Competitors are not required to find their points in any
particular order.
(2) Point system. 10 points will be awarded for each correct point (position
marker) found. Competitors with the same number of points will be ranked by the
fastest time. Based on their score and time during land navigation, the candidates will
be ranked from first to last. Competitors exceeding the 6 hour time limit will receive
zero points, regardless of the number of correct points (position markers) found.
g. CMLs. Competitors will be tested on their ability to perform various tasks while
conducting medical operations in a simulated combat environment. Competitors are
tested using reaction-style testing during each CML. The EFMC test board chairperson
will establish realistic time limits for each CML. All lane concept briefings and score
sheets will be included in the concept briefing that must be submitted for approval.
T
AF
(1) Uniform. Competitors will negotiate each CML with their medical aid bag and
other equipment required IAW their FRAGO. A fully stocked medical aid bag will be
provided to the competitors at the start of the competition and resupply points will be
R
established. A recommended medical aid bag packing list will be provided to the
competitors by the EFMC test board chairperson.
D
(2) CML Tasks. Each of the EFMB critical performance areas listed below will
be integrated into the CMLs and tested according to the EFMB standards in Appendix B
of this publication. In addition, two to four tasks from the WT references listed in
paragraph 2-15 will be integrated into each of the CMLs. The performance
steps/measures for each task will be taken from this publication, with any changes, and
the selected tasks from WT references.
(a) EFMB Tactical Combat Casualty Care (TCCC) tasks.
(b) EFMB Medical and Casualty Evacuation tasks.
(c) EFMB Warrior Skills tasks.
(d) EFMB Communications tasks.
(e) Selected tasks from the Written Test references.
5-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Points system. Competitors will receive one point for each performance
step/measure successfully completed on all tasks. Competitors who exceed the
established time limit on a CML will not receive any points for anything performed past
that point on that lane. Competitors will be ranked from first to last on each CML based
on their total points on that lane. The fastest time to complete the lane will determine
the ranking in cases of a tie. Each CML will have its own ranking.
h. Top Medic Stakes. Competitors will be tested on their ability to perform various
Soldier and medical tasks in a round robin testing environment. The EFMC test board
chairperson will select tasks from the WT references listed in paragraph 2-15 to be
tested in the Top Medic Stakes. All tasks that will be tested in the Top Medic Stakes will
be listed in the concept briefing and score sheets must be submitted for approval at the
same time. Competitors will receive one point for each performance step/measure
successfully completed on all tasks. Competitors will be ranked from first to last based
on their total points for this event. In case of a tie, the candidate with the most number
of tasks without any incorrectly performed performance steps/measures will determine
the ranking.
i. 12-Mile Foot March. Competitors will be tested on their ability to complete a 12-
mile foot march while carrying their individual equipment listed in Table 2-2. All
equipment will be worn properly IAW EFMB standards stated in this publication and
T
IAW AR 670-1 (no unauthorized boots will be worn). Competitors will be ranked from
AF
first to last based on the fastest time to complete the 12-mile foot march with all required
equipment.
R
j. Awards Ceremony and Out-processing. An appropriate awards ceremony will be

conducted at the end of the competition to recognize the winner and all competitors.
D
The planned execution of the awards ceremony will be included in the concept briefing
that must be submitted for approval. The EFMC MOI will provide specific guidance on
out-processing.
5-10. SCORING SYSTEM. The scoring system for the EFMC is designed to determine
who the best all around medic in the Army is. Each event and CML weighs equally in
this determination.
a. Tested events scoring.
(1) The scoring systems for each of the events that comprise the EFMC are
listed in paragraph 5-9(b-i).
(2) Competitors will be ranked from first to last in each of the events based on
these scoring systems. The number of points associated with this ranking is dependent
on the number of Soldier’s competing in the EFMC. The competitors ranking score in
each of the events factors into their overall competition score.
5-11
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(a) For example, a competitor who finishes in first place on the PFT would
receive 60 points towards their overall competition score if there were 60 Soldier’s
competing in the EFMC. The competitor who finished in 15th place would receive 45
points towards their overall competition score. The competitor who finished in last place
(60th place) in the same event would receive only one point towards their overall
competition score.
(b) The number of competitors who start the EFMC will remain the number of
points awarded to the competitor with the highest ranking in an event. This will remain
constant throughout the EFMC regardless if competitors drop out.
(c) Criteria for breaking ties is listed in each of the sections in paragraph 5-9.
The EFMC test board will determine tie break criteria in the unlikelihood one still exists.
(d) There are no mandatory tasks during the competition.
b. Overall competition score.
(1) Each competitor’s ranking score from every event in the competition will be
added together. This cumulative score will comprise their overall competition score.
T
(2) The competitor with the highest overall competition score is the winner of the
AF
EFMC.
(3) In case of an overall tie at the end of the competition for one of the top five
R
positions, an oral board conducted by the EFMC test board will serve as the tie breaker.
D
(a) The oral board will be based on the written test references.
(b) The oral board will be conducted after the last tested event.
(c) The host unit will provide an MOI for conducting the board to the EFMB
TCO for review and approval by the Commander, AMEDDC&S NLT 45 days prior to the
start of the competition.
(4) Any competitor who fails to start any event will be dropped from the
competition and be moved to the bottom of the overall standings. Failure to complete
any tested event will result in zero points for the tasks not completed.
c. The score sheets in Appendix B of this publication will be utilized for all applicable
tasks in the EFMC. The EFMC test board chairperson will develop score sheets for all
other events and tasks tested in the EFMC (i.e., the Top Medic Stakes tasks, OC).
(1) These score sheets will be developed IAW the standards in the applicable
references.
5-12
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) The score sheets will be submitted in conjunction with the concept briefings
that are due to the EFMB TCO for review and approval by the Commander,
AMEDDC&S NLT 120 days prior to the start of competition.
(3) All other exceptions to policy other than that stated earlier in this paragraph
must be submitted NLT 60 days prior to the start of the competition.
5-11. CHANGES. Changes are NOT authorized without an exception to policy

approval.
T
AF
R
D
5-13
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
5-14
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
Section I
Required Publications.
AR 25-55, The Department of the Army Freedom of Information Act Program. (Cited in
paragraph 2-17e.)
AR 335-15, Management Information Control System. (Cited in paragraph 2-8b (4) and
2-9b (3).)
AR 600-8-22, Military Awards. (Cited in paragraph 1-3, 2-1a, 2-18a, 2-20b, 2-20d.)
AR 600-9, The Army Weight Control Program. (Cited in paragraph 5-5c.)
AR 670-1, Wear and Appearance of Army Uniforms and Insignia. (Cited in paragraph
2-20a and 5-10h.)
T
CTA 50-900, Clothing and Individual Equipment. (Cited in Table 2-2.)
AF
FM 4-25.12, Unit Field Sanitation Team. (Cited in paragraph 2-15b (2).)
R
FM 5-0, Army Planning and Orders Production. (Cited in paragraph 4-6b (4).)
D
FM 5-19, Composite Risk Management. (Cited in paragraph 2-8c (7).)
FM 7-1, Battle Focused Training. (Cited in paragraph 2-8d(20) and 2-16a(5).)
FM 8-10-6, Medical Evacuation in a Theater of Operations: Tactics, Techniques, and

Procedures. (Cited in paragraph 2-15b (1).)
FM 21-20, Physical Fitness Training. (Cited in paragraph 5-10b.)
GTA 03-06-008, NBC Warning and Reporting System. (This graphic training aid may
be downloaded off the General J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library on the
Army Training Support Center’s website, http://www.atdtl.army.mil.) (Citied in
paragraph 4-15b (2).)
GTA 05-02-012, Coordinate Scale and Protractor. (Simple Device) (This graphic
training aid may be obtained from the installation Training Audiovisual Support Center.)
(Cited in paragraph 5-10f.)
GTA 08-01-004, MEDEVAC Request Form. (This graphic training aid may be
A-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
downloaded off the General J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library on the Army
Training Support Center’s website, http://www.atdtl.army.mil.) (Citied in paragraph 4-
15b (2).)
GTA 09-12-001, Unexploded Ordnance Procedures. (This graphic training aid may be
downloaded off the General J. Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library on the Army
Training Support Center’s website, http://www.atdtl.army.mil.) (Citied in paragraph 4-
15b (2).)
ST 4-02.46, Medical Support to Detainee Operations. (Cited in paragraph 2-15b (3).)
STP 8-91W15-SM-TG, Soldier’s Manual and Trainer's Guide, MOS 91W, Health Care
Specialist, Skill Levels 1/2/3/4/5. (Cited in paragraph 2-15b (4).)
STP 21-1-SMCT, Soldier's Manual of Common Tasks (SMCT) Skill Level 1.
TC 25-20, A Leader’s Guide to After Action Reviews. (Cited in paragraph 2-8d (20) and
2-16a (5).)
Section II T
Related Publications.
AF
AR 40-66, Medical Record Administration and Health Care Documentation.
FM 3-3, Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance.

R
D
FM 3-3-1, Nuclear Contamination Avoidance.
FM 3-5, NBC Decontamination.
FM 3-11.4, Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological,

and Chemical (NBC) Protection.
FM 3-21.38, Pathfinder Operations.
FM 3-22.9, Rifle Marksmanship M16A1, M16A2/3, M16A4 and M4 Carbine.
FM 3-23.35, Combat Training with Pistols, M9 and M11.
FM 3-25.26, Map Reading and Land Navigation.
FM 4-02, Force Health Protection in a Global Environment.
FM 4-25.11, First Aid.
A-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
FM 7-8, Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad.
FM 8-285, Treatment of Chemical Agent Casualties and Conventional Military Chemical

Injuries.
FM 21-60, Visual Signals.
FM 21-75, Combat Skills of the Soldier.
STP 3-54B1-SM, Chemical Operations Specialist, Skill Level 1, Soldier’s Manual.
STP 7-11B1-SM-TG, Soldier’s Manual and Trainer’s Guide, MOS 11B, Infantry Skill
Level 1.
STP 21-24-SMCT, Soldier's Manual of Common Tasks Skill Levels 2-4.
TB 11-5820-890-12, Operator and Unit Maintenance for AN/CYZ-10 Automated Net

Control Device (ANCD) (NSN 5810-01-343-1194) (EIC: QSU) with the Single Channel
Ground and Airborne Radio Systems (SINCGARS).
T
TM 3-4230-229-10, Operator’s Manual for Decontaminating Kit, Skin: M291, (NSN
AF
4230-01-251-8702).
TM 3-4230-235-10, Operator’s Manual for Decontamination Kit, Individual Equipment:

R
M295 (NSN 6850-01-357-8456).

D
TM 3-4240-279-10, Operator’s Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Field, ABC-M17

(NSN 4240-00-542-4450) Small; (4240-00-542-4451) Medium; (4240-00-542-4452)
Large; M17A1 (4240-00-926-4199) Small; (4240-00-926-4201) Medium; (4240-00-926-
4200) Large; M17A2 (4240-01-143-2017) X-Small; (4240-01-143-2018) Small;
(4240-01-143-2019) Medium; (4240-01-143-2020) Large.
TM 3-4240-280-10, Operator’s Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Aircraft, ABC-

M24 and Accessories and Mask, Chemical-Biological, Tank, M25A1 and Accessories.
TM 3-4240-300-10-2, Operator's Manual for Chemical-Biological Mask Combat Vehicle,

M42 (NSN 4240-01-258-0064) Small, (4240-01-258-0065) Medium, (4240-01-258-
0066) Large. (Cited in Table 2-2.)
TM 3-4240-346-10, Operator’s Manual for Chemical-Biological Mask: Field, M40A1

(NSN 4240-01-370-3821-Small) (4240-01-370-3822-Medium) (4240-01-370-3823-
Large); Chemical-Biological Mask: Combat Vehicle, M42A2 (4240-01-4100-Small)
(4240-01-413-4101-Medium) (4240-01-413-4102-Large).
TM 9-1005-249-10, Operator’s Manual for Rifle, 5.56-mm, M16 (NSN 1005-00-856-

6885) Rifle, 5.56-mm, M16A1 (1005-00-073-9421).
A-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
TM 9-1005-317-10, Operator’s Manual for Pistol, Semiautomatic, 9mm, M9 (NSN 1005-

01-118-2640).
TM 9-1005-319-10, Operator’s Manual for Rifle, 5.56mm, M16A2 W/E (NSN 1005-01-
128-9936) (EIC: 4GM); Rifle, 5.56mm, M16A3 (1005-01-357-5112); Rifle, 5.56mm,
M16A4 (1005-01-383-2872) (EIC: 4F9) ; Carbine, 5.56mm, M4 W/E (1005-01-231-
0973) (EIC: 4FJ); Carbine, 5.56mm, M4A1 (1005-01-382-0953) (EIC: 4GC).
TM 10-8415-220-10, Operator Manual for Joint Service Lightweight Integrated Suit

Technology (JSLIST) Chemical Protective Ensemble.
TM 11-5820-890-10-8, Operator's Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net Radio,

ICOM Manpack Radio, AN/PRC-119A (NSN 5820-01-267-9482) (EIC: L2Q), Short
Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-87A (5820-01-267-9480) (EIC: L22), Short Range
Vehicular Radio with Single Radio Mount AN/VRC-87C (5820-01-304-2045) (EIC:
GDC), Short Range Vehicular Radio with Dismount AN/VRC-88A (5820-01-267-9481)
(EIC: L23), Short Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-89A (5820-01-267-
9479) (EIC: L24), Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-90A (5820-01-268-5105) (EIC:
L25) Short Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio with Dismount AN/VRC-91A (5820-01-
T
267-9478) (EIC: L26), Short Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio AN/VRC-92A (5820-
01-267-9477) (EIC: L27) used with Automated Net Control Device (ANCD) (AN/CYZ-10)
AF
Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) (AN/PSN-11) Secure Telephone Unit
(STU) Frequency Hopping Multiplexer (FHMUX).
R
MILITARY EDITION PHTLS, Norman E McSwain, Jr (Editor), Basic and Advanced

Prehospital Trauma Life Support, 5th Edition, Elsevier Mosby, 2005.
D
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE HANDBOOK, John Pennington (Editor),

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures, Number 06-18, Center for Army Lessons
Learned, May 2006.
Section III
Prescribed Forms.
AMEDDC&S Form 1200-R, Expert Field Medical Badge Statistics. (Cited in paragraph
2-8d (15) and 2-16a (1).)
AMEDDC&S Form 1232-R, Expert Field Medical Badge Qualification Record. (Cited in
paragraph 2-8d (18) and 2-16a (4).)
Section IV
Referenced Forms.
DD Form 1380, US Field Medical Card. (Cited in paragraph 2-13b.)
A-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX B
REPRODUCIBLE SCORE SHEETS AND REBUTTAL SHEETS
B-1. GENERAL.
The various score sheets and rebuttal sheets included within this appendix are designed for
EFMB use only and prescribe the testing standards for use during EFMB. They may be
reproduced locally as needed.
T
AF
R
D
B-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
B-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

LAND NAV — NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT TO ANOTHER DURING THE DAY
CANDIDATE’S RANK AND NAME CANDIDATE #
TASK: NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT TO ANOTHER DURING THE DAY.

CONDITIONS: Given a standard topographic map, scale 1:50,000; a lensatic compass; Graphic Training Aid (GTA) 05-
02-012 (coordinate scale and protractor); a pencil; a score sheet; and the eight digit grid coordinates of the start point,
three intermediate points, and end point.
STANDARDS: Plotted the start point, intermediate points, and the end point on the map. Navigated from the start
point, through each intermediate point, in order, to the end point, and correctly recorded at least three points within 3
hours.
NOTE: THIS TASK HAS BEEN MODIFIED FOR EFMB TESTING PURPOSES USE ONLY.
PERFORMANCE STEPS/MEASURES GO NO-GO
1. Plot all five points on the map.
2. Navigate from the start point, through the intermediate points, to
the end point.
3. Correctly record the point number or letter of at least three points,
excluding the start point.
4. Complete all performance measures within 3 hours.
5. Return the map and score sheet.
DAY LAND NAVIGATION COURSE LANE # __________
T
START TIME: __________ END TIME: __________ TOTAL TIME : ____ Hours _____ Minutes
AF
END POINT CADRE SIGNATURE: _________________________________
POSITION STAKE
8 DIGIT GRID COORDINATES GO NO-GO
NUMBER
R
START POINT
D
1ST POINT
2ND POINT
3RD POINT
END POINT
TOTAL CORRECT / INCORRECT POINTS
REASON(S) DOES THE CANDIDATE WISH TO REBUT THIS TASK? YES NO
FOR FAILURE (CANDIDATE INITIALS APPROPRIATE BOX)
LANE OIC/NCOIC EVALUATOR’S SIGNATURE DATE

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, LAND NAV, NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT TO ANOTHER DURING THE DAY, DEC 06
B-1-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

LAND NAV — NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT TO ANOTHER DURING THE NIGHT
TASK: NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT TO ANOTHER DURING THE NIGHT.

CONDITIONS: Given a standard topographic map, scale 1:50,000; a lensatic compass; Graphic Training Aid (GTA)
05-02-012 (coordinate scale and protractor); a pencil; a score sheet; a red-lens flashlight; a chemical light stick for
emergency use; and the eight digit grid coordinates of the start point, three intermediate points, and end point.
STANDARDS: Plotted the start point, intermediate points, and the end point on the map. Navigated from the start
point, through each intermediate point, in order, to the end point, and correctly recorded at least three points within 4
hours.
NOTE: THIS TASK HAS BEEN MODIFIED FOR EFMB TESTING PURPOSES USE ONLY.
1. Plot all five points on the map.
2. Navigate from the start point, through the intermediate points, to the
end point.
3. Did not mark the route of travel with the flashlight.
4. Correctly record the point number or letter of at least three points,
excluding the start point.
5. Complete all performance measures within 4 hours. T
6. Return the map and score sheet.
AF
NIGHT LAND NAVIGATION COURSE LANE # __________
START TIME: __________ END TIME: __________ TOTAL TIME : ____ Hours _____ Minutes
END POINT CADRE SIGNATURE: _________________________________

R
POSITION STAKE
8 DIGIT GRID COORDINATES GO NO-GO
D
NUMBER
START POINT
1ST POINT
2ND POINT
3RD POINT
END POINT
TOTAL CORRECT / INCORRECT POINTS

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, LAND NAV, NAVIGATE FROM ONE POINT TO ANOTHER DURING THE NIGHT, DEC 06
B-1-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC—PERFORM TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE PROCEDURES
TASK: PERFORM TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE PROCEDURES.

CONDITIONS: Given multiple trauma casualties in a simulated combat environment and necessary equipment to
perform applicable performance steps and measures.
STANDARDS: Perform all steps and measures IAW the concepts and principles of Tactical Combat Casualty Care
and the EFMB Program without causing further injury to the casualties.
NOTE: THIS TASK HAS BEEN MODIFIED FOR EFMB TESTING PURPOSES ONLY.
NOTE: Performance steps/measures with grey shaded GO/NO-GO boxes will NOT be evaluated in EFMB. They are
listed to avoid confusion due to the fact that many organizations train their medical personnel to perform these tasks.
NOTE: Performance steps/measures that are evaluated in other EFMB TCCC tasks (i.e. control bleeding using a
tourniquet) will not be marked as a NO-GO on this task as long as they were attempted at the appropriate phase in the
CTL. Performance of a step/measure during the wrong phase (i.e. splinting a fracture in the care under fire phase) or
not performing at all will be marked as a NO-GO on this task.
1. Perform care under fire procedures.
a. Take cover. Return fire as directed or required before providing medical treatment.
b. Determine if casualty is alive or dead.
c. T
Direct and expect the casualty to continue to return fire if able.
d. Direct the casualty to move to cover/apply self-aid if able.
AF
e. Direct the casualty to return fire, move to cover, and administer self-aid (stop bleeding),
if possible. If the casualty is unable to move and you are unable to move the casualty to
cover and the casualty is still under direct enemy fire, have casualty “play dead.”
R
f. Try to keep the casualty from sustaining additional wounds and reassure him.
g. If you decide you can safely move the casualty to a safe area, you may need to
D
administer life-saving care (stop bleeding) before moving the casualty.

(1) If casualty is unresponsive, move the casualty and his weapon to cover as
the tactical situation permits.
NOTE: If the casualty has equipment that is essential to the mission, move the mission-essential equipment also. Do
not try to move equipment that is not mission essential.
(2) If the casualty has severe bleeding, administer life-saving hemorrhage control
before moving the casualty.
NOTE: You must determine the relative threat of the tactical situation versus the risk to the casualty. Can you remove
the casualty to a place of relative safety without becoming a casualty yourself? Is the casualty safer where he is? If
possible, seek assistance from your leader.
(a) Direct the casualty to control hemorrhage by self-aid if he is able.
(b) Use a tourniquet for hemorrhage that is anatomically amenable to tourniquet
application (Evaluated IAW Control Bleeding with Tourniquet task).
(c) For hemorrhage that cannot be controlled with a tourniquet, apply a HemCon
dressing (Evaluated IAW Control Bleeding with Hemostatic Device task).
NOTE: Airway management is generally best deferred until the tactical field care phase.
h. Communicate the medical situation to the team leader, the evaluator for EFMB testing
purposes (Evaluated IAW Triage Casualties task).
i. Tactically transport the casualty, his weapon, and mission-essential equipment to cover
(Evaluated IAW Evacuate Casualties tasks).
j. Recheck the bleeding control measures as the tactical situation permits.
2. Perform tactical field care procedures.
B-2-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
a. Immediately disarm any casualty with an altered mental status.

b. Communication. In the following situations, communicate medical situation to the unit
leader, the evaluator for EFMB testing purposes (Evaluated IAW Triage Casualties).
(1) Upon determining that casualty will not be able to continue mission.
(2) Before initiating any medical procedures. Ensure that the tactical situation
allows for time to treat the casualty before initiating any medical procedures.
(3) Upon any significant change in casualty’s status.
c. Form a general impression of the casualty as you approach (i.e., extent of injuries,
chance of survival) and evaluate the tactical situation.
d. Perform a tactical combat casualty assessment (Evaluated IAW Perform a Tactical
Combat Casualty Assessment task).
e. Airway management:
(1) Unconscious casualty without airway obstruction:
(a) Chin-lift or jaw-thrust maneuver.
(b) NPA (Evaluated IAW Insert a Nasopharyngeal Airway task).
(c) Place casualty in recovery position.
(d) Consider Combitube or King LT.
(2) Casualty with or impending airway obstruction:
(i) Allow conscious casualty to assume any position that best protects
(ii)
the airway, including sitting up.
T
Place unconscious casualty in recovery position.
AF
(c) Surgical cricothyroidotomy if above measures fail.
f. Breathing:
(1) Treat penetrating chest wounds with a three-sided dressing or Asherman’s
R
Chest Seal (Evaluated IAW Treat a Penetrating Chest Wound task).

(2) Consider tension pneumothroax (PTX) and perform needle decompression
D
(Evaluated IAW Perform a Needle Decompression task).

g. Bleeding:
(1) Assess for unrecognized hemorrhage and control bleeding (Evaluated IAW
Control Bleeding with a Tourniquet or Hemostatic Device task).
(2) Assess for discontinuation of any tourniquets (Evaluated IAW Control
Bleeding Using Dressings task).
h. Access (Evaluated IAW Initiate a Saline Lock and IV task):
(1) Start an 18-gauge IV or initiate a saline lock.
(2) If fluid resuscitation is needed and IV access is not obtainable, use sternal IO
access.
i. Fluid resuscitation (Evaluated IAW Initiate a Saline Lock and IV task):
(1) Resuscitate only if in shock:
(a) Weak or absent peripheral pulses.
(b) Altered mental status.
(2) Hextend 500-ml IV bolus.
(3) Repeat once after 30 minutes if casualty is still in shock.
(4) No more than 1,000 ml of Hextend.
j. Prevent hypothermia (Evaluated IAW Initiate Treatment for Hypovolemic Shock and
Prevent Hypothermia task):
(1) Minimize exposure.
(2) Replace wet clothing, if able.
(3) Apply Ready-Heat blanket to torso.
B-2-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(4) Wrap in Blizzard Rescue Blanket.

(5) Put Thermolite Hypothermia Prevention System cap on casualty’s head,
under helmet.
(6) Use any other method to retain heat if above gear is not available.
k. Monitor:
(1) Continue to monitor clinically.
(2) Initiate pulse oximetry monitoring.
l. Analgesia:
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the candidate will verbally state they are instructing the casualty to take or
assisting the casualty in taking the Combat Pill Pack if the casualty has received a penetrating wound. Actual
medications will not be administered.
(1) Able to fight:
NOTE: If the casualty has received a penetrating wound on the battlefield, he will be instructed or assisted in taking the
Combat Pill Pack, which includes oral pain medications and antibiotics.
(a) Mobic 15 mg orally (PO), daily (qd).
(b) Tylenol 650 mg bi-layer caplet, 2 PO.
(2) Unable to fight:
(a) Naloxone should be available before administering opiates.
(b) Non-IV/IO access: Oral transmucosal fentanyl citrate 400-microgram
lozenge.
(c) IV/IO access:
(i) Morphine sulfate 5 mg IV/IO repeat every (q) 10 minutes as needed
(PRN). T
(ii) Promethazine 25 mg IV/IO/IM.
AF
m. Splint fractures (Evaluated IAW Immobilize a Suspected Fracture of the Arm task).
n. Antibiotics (Recommended for all open wounds):
(1) PO: Gatifloxacin 400 mg PO qd.
(2) IV:
R
(a) Cefotetan 2 gm IV.

D
(b) Ertapenem 1 gm IV.

o. Communicate: Encourage, reassure, and explain to the casualty.
p. Document: Initiate documentation and forward with casualty (See performance
step/measure 3p).
3. Perform combat CASEVAC care.
a. Airway management:
(1) Unconscious casualty without airway obstruction
(c) Place casualty in recovery position.
(2) Casualty with airway obstruction or impending airway obstruction:
(3) If measures above are unsuccessful,
(a) Surgical cricothyroidotomy or
(b) Combitube, King LT or
(c) Endotracheal intubation.
b. Breathing:
(1) Treat penetrating chest wounds with a three-sided dressing or Asherman’s
Chest Seal (Evaluated IAW Treat a Penetrating Chest Wound task).
(2) Consider tension PTX and perform needle decompression (Evaluated IAW
Perform a Needle Decompression task).
B-2-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Consider chest tube insertion if no improvement and/or long transport

anticipated.
(4) Administer oxygen if:
(a) Low oxygen saturation by pulse oximetry.
(b) Injuries associated with impaired oxygenation.
(c) Unconscious patient.
(d) TBI patients (maintain oxygen saturation >90).
(e) Casualties in shock.
(f) Casualties at altitude.
c. Bleeding:
(1) Assess for unrecognized hemorrhage and control all sources of bleeding
(Evaluated IAW Control Bleeding with a Tourniquet or Hemostatic Device
task).
(2) Assess for discontinuation of tourniquets once bleeding is controlled by other
means. Before releasing any tourniquet on a casualty who has been
resuscitated for hemorrhagic shock, assure a positive response to
resuscitation efforts (i.e., a peripheral pulse normal in character and normal
mentation if there is no TBI) (Evaluated IAW Control Bleeding Using
Dressings task).
d. Access(Evaluated IAW Initiate a Saline Lock and IV task):
(1) Reassess need for IV access:
(a) If indicated, start an 18-gauge IV or saline lock.
(b) If resuscitation is required and IV access is not obtainable, use sternal
T
intraosseous route.
e. Fluid resuscitation (Evaluated IAW Initiate a Saline Lock and IV task):
AF
(1) Reassess for hemorrhagic shock: altered mental status (in the absence of
brain injury) and/or abnormal vital signs.
(2) If not in shock:
R
(a) No IV fluids necessary.

(b) PO fluids permissible if conscious.
D
(3) If in shock:
(a) Hextend 500-ml IV bolus.
(b) Repeat once after 30 minutes if casualty is still in shock.
(c) No more than 1,000 ml of Hextend.
(4) Continue resuscitation with packed red blood cells, Hextend, or LR as
indicated.
(5) If a casualty with TBI is unconscious and has a weak or absent peripheral
pulse, resuscitate as necessary to maintain a systolic blood pressure of 90
mm Hg or above.
f. Prevention of hypothermia (Evaluated IAW Initiate Treatment for Hypovolemic Shock
and Prevent Hypothermia task):
(1) Minimize casualty’s exposure to the elements. Keep protective gear on or
with the casualty if feasible.
(2) Continue Ready-Heat blanket, Blizzard Rescue Blanket and Thermolite cap.
(3) Apply additional interventions as needed.
(4) Utilize the Thermal Angel or other portable fluid warmer on all IV sites, if
possible.
(5) Protect the casualty from wind if doors must be kept open.
g. Monitoring:
(1) Institute electronic monitoring of pulse oximetry and vital signs if indicated.
h. Inspect and dress known wounds if not already done (Evaluated IAW various other
TCCC tasks).
B-2-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
i. Check for additional wounds (Evaluated IAW Perform a Tactical Combat Casualty
Assessment task).
j. Analgesia as necessary.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the candidate will verbally state they are instructing the casualty to take or
assisting the casualty in taking the Combat Pill Pack if the casualty has received a penetrating wound. Actual
medications will not be administered.
(1) Able to fight:
NOTE: If the casualty has received a penetrating wound on the battlefield, he will be instructed or assisted in taking the
Combat Pill Pack, which includes oral pain medications and antibiotics.
(a) Mobic 15 mg PO qd.
(b) Tylenol, 650 mg bi-layer caplet, 2 PO q 8 hours.
(2) Unable to fight:
(a) Have naloxone readily available whenever administering opiates.
(b) Does not otherwise require IV/IO access:
(i) Morphine sulfate 5 mg IV/IO repeat every (q) 10 minutes as needed
(PRN).
(c) IV or IO access obtained:
(i) Morphine sulfate 5 mg IV/IO repeat q 10 min PRN.
(ii) Promethazine 25 mg IV/IO/IM q 4 hours, for synergistic analgesic
effect and as a counter to potential nausea.
k. Reassess fractures and recheck pulses (Evaluated IAW Immobilize a Suspected
Fracture of the Arm task).
l.
T
Antibiotics: recommended for all open combat wounds.
(1) If able to take PO:
AF
(a) Gatifloxacin 400 mg PO qd.
(2) If unable to take PO (shock, unconscious, or penetrating torso injuries):
(a) Cefotetan 2 g IV or
R
(b) Ertapenem 1 gm IV.

m. PASG may be useful for stabilizing pelvic fractures and controlling pelvic and abdominal
D
bleeding. Its application and extended use must be carefully monitored. It is

contraindicated for casualties with thoracic and brain injuries.
n. Document clinical assessments, treatments rendered, and changes in casualty’s status.
Forward this info with the casualty to the next level of care.
NOTE: The EFMB host unit will standardize the method of documentation for all candidates.
(1) Initiate a U.S. Field Medical Card (DD Form 1380) on each casualty.
(a) Remove the protective sheet from the carbon copy.
NOTE: Evaluator will inspect the DD Form 1380 book to verify that candidate removed protective sheets.
(b) Complete the minimum required blocks (1, 3, 4, 7, 9, and 11) correctly on
each casualty.
(i) Block 1. Enter the casualty's name, rank, and complete social
security number (SSN). If the casualty is a foreign military person
(including prisoners of war), enter his or her military service number.
Enter the casualty's MOS or AOC for specialty code. Enter the
casualty's religion and sex.
(ii) Block 3. Use the figures in the block to show the location of the injury
or injuries. Check the appropriate box(es) to describe the casualty's
injury or injuries.
NOTE: When more space is needed, attach another DD Form 1380 to the original. Label the second card in the
upper right corner "DD Form 1380 #2." It will show the casualty's name, grade, and SSN.
B-2-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: Use only authorized abbreviations. Except for those listed below, abbreviations may not be used for diagnostic
terminology.
Abr W - Abraded wound. Cont W - Contused wound. FC - Fracture (compound) open.
FCC - Fracture (compound) open comminuted. FS - Fracture (simple) closed. LW - Lacerated wound.
MW - Multiple wounds. Pen W - Penetrating wound. Perf W - Perforating wound.
SL - Slight. SV - Severe.
(iii) Block 4. Check the appropriate box.
(iv) Block 7. Check the yes or no box. Write in the dose administered
and the date and time that it was administered.
(v) Block 9. Write in the information requested. If you need additional
space, use Block 14.
(vi) Block 11. Initial the far right side of the block.
NOTE: All candidates, regardless of rank or profession, are being evaluated as combat medics.
(c) Complete the other blocks as appropriate or as time permits. Most blocks are
self-explanatory.
(d) Attach the correct completed Field Medical Card to each casualty.
(2) Initiate documentation using the Battlefield Medical Information System-
Tactical (BMIS-T) or other computerized system on each casualty.
(3) Initiate documentation in another method (i.e. writing on a piece of tape
placed on casualty) on each casualty.
4. Did not cause further injury to any casualties
FOR (CANDIDATE INITIALS APPROPRIATE BOX)
FAILURE
T
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, PERFORM TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE PROCEDURES, DEC 06
B-2-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — CONTROL BLEEDING USING A TOURNIQUET
TASK: CONTROL BLEEDING USING A TOURNIQUET.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty who has significant extremity hemorrhage in a simulated combat environment and is
under effective fire (care under fire phase) with the necessary materials to treat the casualty.
STANDARDS: Perform all steps and measures correctly without causing further injury to the casualty.
1. Take body substance isolation (BSI) precautions.
2. Expose the wound.
3. Apply an improvised tourniquet or Combat Application Tourniquet (CAT) to control bleeding.
a. Improvised tourniquet.
(1) Make a band at least 2 inches wide.
(2) Position the tourniquet 2 – 4 inches above the edge of the wound but not on a joint.
(3) Tie a half knot.
(4) Place a stick (or similar object) on top of the knot.
(5) Tie a full knot over the stick.
(6) Twist the stick until the tourniquet is tight around the limb and the bright red bleeding has
stopped. T
EVALUATOR STATES: “THE BRIGHT RED BLEEDING HAS STOPPED,” AFTER CANDIDATE TWISTS WINDLASS
AF
TO AVOID INJURY TO THE SIMULATED CASUALTY.
CAUTION: Do NOT over-tighten the tourniquet on the simulated casualty.
(7) Secure the stick without loosing positive control.
R
(8) Do not cover the tourniquet.

b. Combat Application Tourniquet (CAT).
D
(1) Remove CAT Tourniquet from carrying pouch.

(2) Slip the wounded extremity through the loop of the self-adhering band.
(3) Position the CAT about 2 inches above the injury site.
NOTE: If the wound is on the lower leg or the forearm, you may not be able to completely control the bleeding with the
tourniquet two inches above the wound. If not, you may have to reposition the tourniquet above the knee or elbow to
completely control the bleeding.
(4) Pull the free running end of the self-adhering band tight and securely fasten it back on itself (if
applying to an arm wound). Do not adhere the band past the windlass clip.
(5) If applying to a leg wound the self-adhering band MUST be routed through the friction
adaptor buckle, and fastened back on itself. This will prevent it from loosening when
twisting the windlass clip.
(6) Twist the windlass rod until bleeding has stopped.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THE BRIGHT RED BLEEDING HAS STOPPED,” AFTER CANDIDATE TWISTS WINDLASS
TO AVOID INJURY TO THE SIMULATED CASUALTY.
NOTE: Do NOT over-tighten the tourniquet on the simulated casualty.
(7) Lock the windlass rod in place with the windlass clip.
NOTE: For added security (and always before moving the casualty) secure the windlass rod with the windlass strap. For
small extremities, continue to wind the self-adhering band across the windlass clip and secure it under the windlass
strap.
(8) Grasp the windlass strap, pull it tight and adhere it to the Velcro on the windlass clip.
(9) Do not cover tourniquet.
4. Place a “T” on the casualty’s forehead and record the date and time the tourniquet was applied.
B-2-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: The candidate will ensure that the time the tourniquet was applied is documented and forwarded with the
casualty. This will be done as standardized at the EFMB Test Site (i.e., on a DD 1380, tape applied on the casualty).
EVALUATOR WRITES: TIME TOURNIQUET WAS APPLIED:
5. If the tourniquet was applied on a casualty with an amputation, apply a dressing to cover the
stump.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS T
AF
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, CONTROL BLEEDING USING A TOURNIQUET, DEC 06
R
D
B-2-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — CONTROL BLEEDING USING A HEMOSTATIC DEVICE
TASK: CONTROL BLEEDING USING A HEMOSTATIC DEVICE.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty who has significant extremity hemorrhage in a simulated combat environment with the
necessary materials to treat the casualty.
3. Apply a hemostatic device to control the bleeding.
a. Apply a HemCon Chitosan Bandage.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the EFMB host unit may reuse HemCon Chitosan Bandages or use a simulated
Hemcon Chitosan Bandage due to the high logistical cost of these items.
(1) Open the sterile HemCon Chitosan package.
(a) Peel back the unsealed edges at the top of the package.
(b) Remove the bandage from the package without contaminating the cream-
colored portion of the bandage. T
(c) Hold the bandage by the non-absorbable polyester backing and discard the
foil pouch.
AF
(2) Place the cream-colored sponge portion of the bandage directly into the wound
where the bleeding is the heaviest.
(3) Hold pressure on the bandage for 2 to 4 minutes or until the bandage adheres to the
wound and bleeding stops.
R
NOTE: Once the bandage is applied and in contact with the blood and tissue, the bandage cannot be repositioned.
D
EVALUATOR STATES: “THE BANDAGE HAS ADHERED TO THE WOUND AND BLEEDING HAS STOPPED,” AFTER
CANDIDATE APPLIED PRESSURE FOR 2 TO 4 MINUTES ON THE INJURY OF THE SIMULATED CASUALTY OR
INSTRUCTED THAT FOUR MINUTES HAVE PASSED.
NOTE: If the bleeding has not stopped, remove the original bandage and apply direct pressure until a new bandage is in its
place. Again hold pressure on the bandage for 2 to 4 minutes or until the bandage adheres to the wound and bleeding stops.
(4) Apply a sterile dressing over the bandage to secure it in place.
b. Apply QuickClot Hemostatic Powder.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the EFMB host unit may use a simulated Hemcon Chitosan Bandage due to the high
logistical cost of these items.
(1) Open the sterile QuckClot packet.
(a) Uses a gauze bandage to open the packet of QuickClot.
(b) Open the packet facing away from the face.
(2) Use a wiping motion to clear the wound of excess blood, immediately start a slow
pouring of one QuickClot packet directly into the wound.
(3) Stop as soon as the QuickClot covers the wound.
(4) If bleeding continues, apply more QuickClot
(5) Apply firm pressure to the QuickClot-covered wound with a gauze bandage.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THE BLEEDING HAS STOPPED,” AFTER CANDIDATE APPLIED PRESSURE FOR 4 MINUTES
ON THE INJURY OF THE SIMULATED CASUALTY OR INSTRUCTED THAT FOUR MINUTES HAVE PASSED.
(6) Apply a pressure dressing to cover the wound.
B-2-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10


OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, CONTROL BLEEDING USING A HEMOSTATIC DEVICE, DEC 06
T
AF
R
D
B-2-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — TRIAGE CASUALTIES
TASK: TRIAGE CASUALTIES.

CONDITIONS: Given casualties in a simulated combat environment with the necessary equipment to perform the
task..
STANDARDS: Perform all steps and measures correctly without causing further injury to the casualties.
2. Assess the situation.
a. Sort the casualties and allocate treatment.
(1) Assess and classify the casualties for the most efficient use of available medical
supplies.
(2) Give available treatment first to the casualties who have the best chance of survival.
(3) A primary goal is to locate and return to duty troops with minor wounds.
(4) Triage establishes the order of treatment, not whether treatment is given.
b. Determine the tactical and environment situation.
T
(1) Whether casualties must be transported to a more secure area for treatment.
(2) The number and location of the injured and severity of injuries.
AF
(3) Available assistance (self-aid, buddy-aid, and medical personnel).
3. Assess the casualties and establish priorities for treatment.
NOTE: The injuries listed under each triage category are examples. It is not all inclusive.
R
a. Immediate. Casualties whose conditions demand immediate treatment to save life,

limb, or eyesight. This group includes those Soldiers requiring lifesaving surgery. The
D
surgical procedures in this category should not be time consuming and should concern
only those patients with high chances of survival.
(1) Upper airway obstruction.
(2) Severe respiratory distress.
(3) Life threatening bleeding.
(4) Tension Pneumothorax.
(5) Hemothorax.
(6) Flail chest.
(7) Extensive 2nd or 3rd degree burns.
(8) Untreated poisoning (chemical agent) and severe symptoms.
(9) Heat Stroke.
(10) Decompensated shock.
(11) Rapidly deteriorating level of consciousness.
(12) Severe eye injuries.
(13) Any other life threatening condition that is rapidly deteriorating.
b. Delayed. Casualties who have less risk of loss of life or limb if treatment is delayed.
This group includes those wounded who are badly in need of time consuming surgery,
but whose general condition permits delay in surgical treatment without unduly
endangering life. Sustaining treatment will be required (i.e., stabilizing intravenous
fluids, splinting, administration of antibiotics, catheterization, gastric decompression,
and relief of pain).
B-2-11
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Compensated shock.

(2) Fracture, dislocation, or injury causing circulatory compromise.
(3) Severe bleeding, controlled by a tourniquet or other means.
(4) Suspected compartment syndrome.
(5) Penetrating head, neck, chest, back, or abdominal injuries without airway or breathing
compromise or decompensated shock.
(6) Uncomplicated immobilized cervical spine injuries.
(7) Large, dirty, or crushed soft tissue injuries.
(8) Severe combat stress symptoms or psychosis.
(9) Severe eye injuries without hope of saving eyesight..
c. Minimal. These casualties have relatively minor injuries and can effectively care for
themselves or can be helped by non-medical personnel.
(1) Uncomplicated closed fractures and dislocations.
(2) Uncomplicated or minor lacerations (including those involving tendons, muscles, and
nerves).
(3) Frostbite.
(4) Strains and sprains.
(5) Minor head or eye injury (loss of consciousness of less than five minutes with normal
mental status and equal pupils).
d. Expectant. Casualties in this category have wounds that are so extensive that even if
they were the sole casualty and had the benefit of optimal medical resource
application, their survival would be unlikely. The expectant casualty should not be
T
abandoned, but should be separated from the view of other casualties. Using a
minimal but competent staff, provide comfort measures for these casualties, if
AF
available.
(1) Traumatic cardiac arrest.
(2) Massive brain injury.
(3) 2nd or 3rd degree burns over 70 percent of the body surface area.
R
(4) Gunshot wound to the head with a Glasgow Coma Scale of 3.

D
NOTE: Provide ongoing supportive care to expectant casualties if time and condition permits; keep separate from
other triage categorized casualties.
4. Establish a triage area separating the casualties by treatment priority IAW prescribed method.
NOTE: The host unit will standardize how the candidates will establish the triage area (i.e., “Wheel Method” with the
casualties organized in a circle with the medic in the middle to better monitor and treat the casualties IAW METT-T).
5. Collect all applicable information needed to communicate the medical situation.
NOTE: The communication of the medical situation is necessary for the medical officer and/or unit leadership to
provide further medical treatment and to analyze the necessity for requesting medical evacuation of the casualties.
a. Determine number of casualties.
b. Determine each casualty’s priority for treatment determined during triage.
c. Determine if special equipment is required to evacuate the casualties.
d. Determine the number of casualties by type, litter and/or ambulatory.
e. Determine casualties’ nationality and status, if other than U.S. Army.
EVALUATOR STATES: “WHAT IS THE MEDICAL SITUATION,” WHEN THE CANDIDATE STATES THEY ARE
READY TO GIVE THE MEDICAL SITUATION.
6. Communicate the medical situation to the medical officer (evaluator for testing purposes).
a. Number of casualties.
b. Each casualty’s priority for treatment determined during triage.
c. Special equipment required to evacuate the casualties.
d. Number of casualties by type, litter and/or ambulatory.
e. Casualties’ nationality and status, if other than U.S. Army.
B-2-12
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EVALUATOR WRITES: THE MEDICAL SITUATION GIVEN BY THE CANDIDATE.
Number of casualties: __________

PT 1 PT 2 PT 3 PT 4 PT 5
Each casualty’s priority for treatment determined during triage: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
Special equipment required to evacuate the casualties: __________________________________________
Number of casualties by type, litter and/or ambulatory: Litter _________ Ambulatory ___________
Casualties’ nationality and status: _________________________________________________________

7. Did not cause further injury to the casualties.
T
AF
OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
R
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, TRIAGE CASUALTIES, DEC 06

D
B-2-13
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — PERFORM A TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY ASSESSMENT
TASK: PERFORM A TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY ASSESSMENT.

CONDITIONS: Given casualties in a simulated combat environment.
STANDARDS: Perform all steps and measures correctly without causing further injury to the casualties.
2. Perform an initial assessment:
NOTE: Life-threatening injuries should be treated as they are identified according to casualty triage in conjunction with
the tactical situation and TCCC principles. If casualty is expectant, move on to the next casualty.
a. Assess the patient’s mental status using the AVPU scale:
(1) A – Alert and oriented.
(2) V – Responsive to verbal stimuli.
(3) P – Responsive to painful stimuli.
(4) U – Unresponsive.
b. Assess the airway: T
(1) Perform appropriate maneuver to open and maintain the airway.
AF
(2) Insert a nasopharyngeal airway adjunct, if necessary (Evaluated IAW Insert a
Nasopharyngeal Airway task).
(3) Position unconscious casualty in the recovery position.
c. Assess breathing:
R
(1) Determine the rate, rhythm, and quality of breathing.

D
(2) Inspect for any penetrating chest wounds.

(3) Apply occlusive dressing to both entrance and exit wound (Evaluated IAW Treat a
Penetrating Chest Wound task).
(4) Observe for progressive respiratory distress.
(5) Perform needle chest decompression, if necessary (Evaluated IAW Perform Needle
Chest Decompression task).
d. Assess Circulation :
(1) Control gross hemorrhage with direct pressure, pressure bandage, elevation,
hemostatic bandage, or tourniquet (Evaluated IAW Control Bleeding tasks).
(2) Blood sweep for any additional hemorrhages.
(3) Check the radial pulse, if present the blood pressure is at least 80mmHg.
(4) Loosen tourniquet and convert to pressure dressing or use hemostatic agent to
control bleeding (Evaluated IAW Control Bleeding tasks).
NOTE: The candidate will perform either a rapid trauma assessment (step 3) or a focused assessment (step 4)
depending on the casualty’s mental status and injuries.
3. Perform a rapid trauma assessment.
a. Assess the head.
(1) Inspect for deformities, contusions, abrasions, punctures or penetration, burns,
tenderness, lacerations, swelling (DCAP-BTLS).
(2) Inspect for crepitus.
b Assess the neck.
(1) Inspect for DCAP-BTLS.
B-2-14
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Palpate spine step-offs.

(3) Inspect for jugular vein distention.
(4) Inspect for tracheal deviation.
(5) Apply cervical collar, if necessary.
c. Assess the chest.
(2) Inspect for crepitus.
(3) Inspect for paradoxical motion.
NOTE: A casualty with penetrating chest trauma will generally have some degree of hemo/pneumothorax as a result of
the primary wound.
d. Assess the abdomen.
(2) Palpate for tenderness.
(3) Palpate for rigidity.
(4) Inspect for distention.
e. Assess the pelvis.
(2) Gently compress to detect instability and crepitus.
(3) Determine the level of pain.
(4) Inspect for priapism. T
f. Assess the extremities.
AF
(2) Check distal pulse.
(3) Check distal motor functions.
R
(4) Check distal sensation.

g. Assess the posterior.
D
NOTE: The casualty should be log rolled to do this portion of the assessment, unless contraindicated by injuries.
(2) Inspect for rectal bleeding.
4. Perform a focused assessment.
a. Perform a focused physical examination of the affected body part.
b. Provide interventions and treatment per triage priority.
5. Perform ongoing assessment (if time permits).
a. Repeat initial assessment.
b. Reevaluate interventions/treatments.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, PERFORM A TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY ASSESSMENT, DEC 06
B-2-15
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — CONTROL BLEEDING USING DRESSINGS
TASK: CONTROL BLEEDING USING DRESSINGS.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty who has a bleeding wound of the arm or leg in a simulated combat environment in
tactical field care conditions and the necessary materials to treat the casualty. The casualty has already been treated in
the “care under fire” phase, and an effective tourniquet is in place.
3. Loosen tourniquet slowly; if brisk bleeding returns, re-tighten tourniquet.
EVALUATOR STATES: “BRISK BLEEDING DOESN’T RETURN” AFTER CANDIDATE LOOSENS THE TOURNIQUET.
NOTE: If using a CAT, do not remove the tourniquet, only loosen it. This allows the tourniquet to be re-applied if the
hemorrhage cannot be controlled by other methods.
4. Apply a field/pressure dressing or emergency trauma dressing to the wound.
T
a. Field and pressure dressing.
AF
(1) Apply the field dressing directly over the wound.
(2) Wrap the tails around the extremity.
(3) Tie a non-slip knot over the outer edge of the dressing, not over the wound.
R
(4) Check the tightness of the dressing.

(5) Check the distal pulse to make sure that the dressing has not been applied too tightly.
D
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS A PULSE.”

(6) Tuck or cut excess tails from dressing.
EVALUATOR STATES: “WOUND CONTINUES TO BLEED.”
(7) Place a wad of padding directly over the wound.
(8) Apply a field dressing/cravat/elastic bandage on top of the padding to create a pressure
dressing.
(9) Tie a non-slip knot directly over the wound or secure elastic bandage.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS A PULSE AND THE BLEEDING HAS STOPPED.”
(11) Tuck or cut excess tails from dressing.
b. Emergency trauma dressing.
(1) Open the sterile package and apply the white portion of the bandage directly over the
wound.
(2) Wrap the elastic portion of the bandage around the extremity.
(3) Insert the elastic wrap completely into the pressure bar.
(4) Pull the bandage tight and reverse it back over the top of the pressure bar forcing it down
onto the pad.
(5) Continue to wrap the elastic bandage tightly over the pressure bar and wound pad.
Ensure that the edges of the wound pad are covered.
(6) Secure the hooking ends of the closure bar onto the last wrap of the bandage.
B-2-16
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS A PULSE AND THE BLEEDING HAS STOPPED.”

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
T
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, CONTROL BLEEDING USING DRESSINGS, DEC 06
AF
R
D
B-2-17
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — INITIATE A SALINE LOCK AND INTRAVENOUS INFUSION
TASK: INITIATE A SALINE LOCK AND INTRAVENOUS INFUSION.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment that requires intravenous access and follow on
IV fluids. Necessary materials and equipment are available.
NOTE: A mannequin or training aid will be used to initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion.
2. Prepare to establish a saline lock.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, other sizes of needles and catheters may be utilized than those stated.
a. Assemble and inspect the necessary equipment for defects, expiration date, and
contamination (if applicable).
(1) 20 gauge IV catheter/needle x2.
(2) 21 gauge 1 ¼” needle.
(3) Saline lock adapter plug. T
(4) Adhesive tape.
AF
(5) Alcohol and Betadine® swabs.
(6) Constricting band.
(7) 5cc syringe.
R
(8) Sterile fluid.

b. Explain the procedure and the purpose of the saline lock to the casualty.
D
c. Place the casualty in a comfortable position with the arms supported.

d. Select catheter insertion site.
e. Prepare the insertion site. Apply constricting band 2” above venipuncture site (tight
enough to stop venous flow, but not so tight that the radial pulse cannot be felt).
f. Clean skin with an alcohol and/or Betadine® swab in a circular motion from the center
outward.
3. Insert the saline lock.
a. Perform the venipuncture. Hold catheter with dominant hand and remove protective
cover without contaminating the needle. Hold flash chamber with thumb and forefinger
directly above the vein. Draw skin below the cleansed site downward to hold the skin
taut over the site of the venipuncture.
b. Position the needlepoint, bevel up, parallel to the vein and about 1/2 inch below the
venipuncture site. Continue advancing the needle/catheter until the vein is pierced.
EVALUATOR STATES: “YOU HAVE A FLASH,” IF THE CANDIDATE INSERTS THE NEEDLE CORRECTLY.
c. When "flash" of blood enters the flash chamber, decrease the angle between the skin
and needle until the angle is almost parallel to the skin, and advance further to secure
catheter placement in the vein.
d. Place pressure on the vein above the insertion site by pressing with one finger of the
non-dominant hand. Release the constricting band.
e. Remove the needle after advancing the plastic catheter into the vein.
EVALUATOR: ADMINISTRATIVELY GAIN CONTROL OF THE NEEDLE AND PLACE IT IN A SHARPS
CONTAINER.
f. Quickly uncap and insert the male end of the saline lock adapter plug into the hub of the
catheter.
B-2-18
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
g. Apply adhesive tape to secure the hub of plastic catheter.

h. Flush the IV catheter. Using the 21-gauge needle and 5 cc syringe filled with sterile
fluid, penetrate the transparent dressing and insert the needle into the saline lock. Inject
5cc of sterile fluid into the IV catheter.
i. Verbally state they are looking for signs of infiltration.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE ARE NO SIGNS OF INFILTRATION.”
EVALUATOR STATES: “CASUALTY NEEDS FLUIDS” OR STATES REASONS WHY NEEDED (I.E., THE
CASUALTY IS SUFFERING FROM SEVERE LOSS OF BLOOD, EXHIBITING ABSENT OR WEAK PERIPHERAL
PULSES, AND AN ALTERED MENTAL STATUS, AND OTHER SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF HYPOVOLEMIC
SHOCK).
4. Convert the saline lock to a continuous infusion IV.
a. Explain the procedure and the purpose of the saline lock to the casualty.
b. Assemble and inspect the necessary equipment for defects, expiration date, and
contamination (if applicable).
NOTE: In order to conserve resources, a crystalloid solution such as lactated ringers or normal saline may be used
with a notional label of Hextend® placed on the bag for EFMB testing.
(1) Fluids, spike, drip chamber, tubing, and needle adapter. Discard them if there are cracks
or holes or if any discoloration is present.
(2) Tubing clamp. Ensure that the clamp releases and catches.
(3) 20 gauge needle for 5cc syringe; discard if it is flawed with barbs.
(4) 5 cc syringe for cracks.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE ARE NO DEFECTS IN THE EQUIPMENT OR FLUIDS.”
c. Prepare the equipment. T
(1) Clamp the tubing 6 to 8 inches below drip chamber.
(2) Remove the protective covers from the spike and the outlet of the container.
AF
CAUTION: DO NOT TOUCH THE SPIKE OR THE OUTLET OF THE IV CONTAINER.
(3) Insert spike into container.
(4) Hang the container at least 2 feet above the level of the casualty’s heart.
R
(5) Squeeze the drip chamber until it is half full of IV fluid.

D
(6) Prime tubing.

NOTE: Ensure all air is expelled from the tubing.
(7) Fill 5cc syringe with sterile saline for injection.
d. Clean the rubber diaphragm of the saline lock with an antiseptic wipe.
e. Uncap the needle on the saline syringe, insert it into the rubber diaphragm, and aspirate
to assess patency of the IV. Blood return should be evident.
EVALUATOR STATES: “YOU HAVE BLOOD RETURN.”
NOTE: If the IV is not patent, do not continue with the conversion. Remove the saline lock and establish a new IV
site.
f. Carefully remove the tape and loosen the adapter plug from the hub of the needle.
g. Using aseptic technique, quickly remove the adapter plug and insert the end of the IV
tubing securely into the needle hub.
h. Set the roller clamp on the IV tubing and observe the site and ensure that normal flow is
occurring.
i. Redress the site.
NOTE: If after 30 minutes the casualty still has no peripheral pulse or still has altered mental status, administer a
second 500-ml of Hextend®. If the casualty is still in shock after this, the casualty is probably still bleeding.
CAUTION: Do not administer more than 1,000 ml of Hextend®. This is equivalent to six liters of lactated ringers.
5. Secure the site.
a. Apply a sterile 2x2-inch dressing over the puncture site and secure it with tape, leaving
the hub and tubing connection visible.
b. Loop the IV tubing onto the extremity and secure the loop with tape.
B-2-19
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
6. Readjust the flow rate.

7. Recheck site for infiltration and verbally states they are looking for signs of infiltration.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE ARE NO SIGNS OF INFILTRATION.”

FAILURE

OIC/NCOIC T
INITIALS
AF
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, INITIATE A SALINE LOCK AND INTRAVENOUS INFUSION, DEC 06
R
D
B-2-20
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC— INITIATE TREATMENT FOR HYPOVOLEMIC SHOCK AND PREVENT HYPOTHERMIA
TASK: INITIATE TREATMENT FOR HYPOVOLEMIC SHOCK AND PREVENT HYPOTHERMIA.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment who is suffering from severe loss of blood,
exhibiting absent or weak peripheral pulses, and an altered mental status, and other signs and symptoms of
hypovolemic shock and the necessary materials to treat the casualty are available.
1. Reassure the casualty to reduce anxiety.
3. Initiate a saline lock and convert it to continuous fluid infusion IV 500-ml bolus of
Hextend® (Evaluated IAW Initiate a Saline Lock and Convert to Intravenous Infusion
task).
NOTE: In order to conserve resources, a crystalloid solution, such as lactated ringers or normal saline, may be used
with a notional label of Hextend® placed on the bag for EFMB testing.
NOTE: If after 30 minutes the casualty still has no peripheral pulse or still has altered mental status, administer a
second 500-ml of Hextend®. If the casualty is still in shock after this, the casualty is probably still bleeding.
T
CAUTION: Do not administer more than 1,000 ml of Hextend®. This is equivalent to six liters of lactated ringers.
AF
4. Loosen casualty’s clothing and boots.
5. Elevate the casualty's legs above chest level, without lowering the head below chest
level.
NOTE: The casualty’s legs should not be elevated without assessing for injuries that contradict this measure.
R
6. Prevent hypothermia.
D
NOTE: In any temperature conditions, a casualty suffering from hemorrhagic shock is prone to hypothermia and
subsequent coagulopathy.
a. Minimize exposure.
b. Remove any wet clothing and replace them with dry clothes, if possible.
c. Keep the casualty warm by using the Hypothermia Prevention and Management Kit
(HPMK) or other methods.
(1) Use the HPMK.
(a) Put Thermolite Hypothermia Prevention System cap on casualty’s head,
under helmet.
(b) Place the casualty on the Blizzard Rescue Blanket.
(c) Apply Ready-Heat blanket to torso and back of the casualty.
(d) Wrap the rescue blanket around the casualty.
(2) If the HPMK is not available, wrap the casualty in a space blanket, survival
blanket, blanket, poncho liner, body bag, or anything that will retain heat
and keep the casualty dry. Use any other method to retain heat if above
gear is not available.
7. Monitor the casualty every 5-15 minutes.
EVALUATOR WRITES: TIMES CANDIDATE MONITORS THE CASUALTY: __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________

8. Encourage the casualty to drink water, if conscious.
9. Did not cause further injury to the casualty
B-2-21
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

FAILURE

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, INITIATE TREATMENT FOR HYPOVOLEMIC SHOCK AND PREVENT HYPOTHERMIA, DEC 06
T
AF
R
D
B-2-22
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC— INSERT A NASOPHARYNGEAL AIRWAY
TASK: INSERT A NASOPHARYNGEAL AIRWAY.

CONDITIONS: Given an unconscious casualty in a simulated combat environment who has a need for a patent airway
and the necessary materials to treat the casualty.
1. Place the casualty supine with the head in a neutral position
3. Assess nasal passages for apparent obstruction.
EVALUATOR STATES: “NASAL PASSAGES ARE NOT OBSTRUCTED.”
CAUTION: Do not use the NPA if there is a clear fluid (cerebrospinal fluid) coming from the ears or nose. This may
indicate a skull fracture.
4. Select appropriately sized airway using one of the following methods:
a. Measure the airway from the casualty’s nostril to the earlobe
b. Measure the airway from the casualty’s nostril to the angle of the jaw.
NOTE: Choosing the proper length ensures appropriate diameter. Standard adult sizes are 34, 32, 30, and 28 French.
T
For EFMB testing purposes, any size may be utilized, but the candidate is required to measure to select the appropriate
size.
AF
NOTE: A mannequin or training aid will be used to insert NPA.
5. Lubricate the tube with a water-based lubricant or tap water.
CAUTION: Do not use petroleum based or non-water based lubricant. These substances can cause damage to the
R
tissues lining the nasal cavity and pharynx, thus increasing the risk for infection.
6. Insert the NPA
D
a. Push the tip of the nose upwards gently

b. Position the tube so that the bevel of the airway faces towards the septum.
c. Insert the airway into the nostril and advance it until the flange rest against the nostril.
CAUTION: Never force the airway into the casualty’s nostril. If resistance is met pull the tube out and attempt to insert it
into the other nostril. Most attempts to insert the NPA should be in the right nostril. If unable to insert into the right
nostril, try the left. If inserting in the left nostril, the bevel will not be against the septum.
7. Place the casualty in the recovery position.
FAILURE

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, INSERT A NASOPHARYNGEAL AIRWAY, DEC 06
B-2-23
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC— TREAT A PENETRATING CHEST WOUND
TASK: TREAT A PENETRATING CHEST WOUND.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment with a penetrating chest wound and the
necessary materials to treat the casualty.
2. Check the casualty for signs and symptoms of a penetrating chest wound.
NOTE: Casualty will exhibit one or more of the following signs and symptoms.
a. A "sucking" or "hissing" sound when the casualty inhales.
b. Difficulty breathing.
c. A puncture wound of the chest.
d. An impaled object protruding from the chest.
e. Froth or bubbles around the injury.
f.
g.
Coughing up blood or blood-tinged sputum.
Pain in the chest or shoulder.
T
AF
NOTE: Do not remove clothing stuck to the wound.
4. Cover the open wound immediately with their gloved hand.
R
5. Check for an exit wound.

D
a. Feel and/or look at the casualty's chest and back.

b. Remove the casualty's clothing, if necessary.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS NO EXIT WOUND.”
6. Seal the wound(s), covering the larger wound first with an occlusive dressing (“Asherman
chest seal”, field first aid dressing wrapper, petrolatum gauze, plastic wrap, or other occlusive
material may be used).
NOTE: All penetrating chest wounds should be treated as if they were sucking chest wounds. In an emergency, any
airtight material can be used. It must be large enough so it is not sucked into the chest cavity.
a. If using a field first aid dressing wrapper:
(1) Cut the dressing wrapper on one long and two short sides and remove the dressing.
(2) Apply the inner surface of the wrapper to the wound when the casualty exhales.
(3) Ensure that the covering extends at least 2 inches beyond the edges of the wound.
(4) Seal by applying overlapping strips of tape to three sides of the plastic covering to
provide a flutter-type valve.
(5) Cover the exit wound in the same way, if applicable, but tape the wound on all sides.
NOTE: Assess the effectiveness of the flutter valve when the casualty breathes. When the casualty inhales, the plastic
should be sucked against the wound, preventing the entry of air. When the casualty exhales, trapped air should be able
to escape from the wound and out the open side of the dressing.
(6) Dress the wound.
B-2-24
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(a) Place a field first aid dressing over the seal and tie the ends directly over the
wound. This may negate the flutter-valve effect, so reevaluate and adjust the
dressing to maintain the flutter-valve effect.
(b) Use padding material or another dressing for pressure and stability.
(c) Dress the exit wound in the same way, if applicable.
CAUTION: Ensure that the dressings are not tied so tightly that they interfere with the breathing process of the flutter-
type valve.
b. If using an occlusive dressing with no organic valve:
(1) Apply occlusive dressing to the wound when the casualty exhales.
(2) Ensure that the covering extends at least 2 inches beyond the edges of the wound.
(3) Seal by applying overlapping strips of tape to three sides of the plastic covering to
provide a flutter-type valve.
(5) Dress the wound.
(a) Place a field first aid dressing over the seal and tie the ends directly over the
wound. This may negate the flutter-valve effect, so reevaluate and adjust the
dressing to maintain the flutter-valve effect.
(b) Use padding material or another dressing for pressure and stability.
(c) Dress the exit wound in the same way, if applicable.
CAUTION: Ensure that the dressings are not tied so tightly that they interfere with the breathing process of the flutter-
T
type valve.
c. If using the “Asherman Chest Seal:”
AF
(1) Use the 4 X 4 gauze to clean and dry the area around the chest wound.
(2) Peel off the protective paper liner, exposing the adhesive portion of the seal.
(3) Place the chest seal directly over the wound.
R
NOTE: Tape may be used to secure the edges of the “Asherman Chest Seal” if needed.
D
7. Place the casualty in a sitting position or on their injured side (recovery position) during
transport.
8. Monitor the casualty.
a. Monitor breathing and the wound seal.
b. Assess the effectiveness of the flutter valve.
c. Check vital signs.
d. Observe for signs of shock.
CASUALTY STARTS GASPING FOR AIR AND STATES: “I’M HAVING DIFFICULTY BREATHING.” REPOSITIONING
OF THE CASUALTY DOES NOT IMPROVE BREATHING.
9. Perform a needle chest decompression if the casualty exhibits worsening shortness of breath
(evaluator/casualty will indicate so). (Evaluated IAW Perform Needle Chest Decompression
task).
B-2-25
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
REASON(S) FOR DOES THE CANDIDATE WISH TO REBUT THIS TASK? YES NO
FAILURE (CANDIDATE INITIALS APPROPRIATE BOX)

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, TREAT A PENETRATING CHEST WOUND, DEC 06

T
AF
R
D
B-2-26
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC— PERFORM NEEDLE CHEST DECOMPRESSION
TASK: PERFORM NEEDLE CHEST DECOMPRESSION.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment with a tension pneumothorax and the necessary
CASUALTY STARTS GASPING FOR AIR AND STATES: “I’M HAVING DIFFICULTY BREATHING.” REPOSITIONING
OF THE CASUALTY DOES NOT IMPROVE BREATHING. THE EVALUATOR MAY ADD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TO COMMUNICATE THE SIGNS OF A TENSION PNEUMOTHORAX.
2. Assess the casualty to ensure the progressive respiratory distress is due to a penetrating chest
wound.
3. Perform needle chest decompression.
NOTE: A mannequin or training aid will be utilized to perform needle chest decompression.
a.
b.
Expose the chest for access to insertion site.
T
Locate the insertion site. Locate the second intercostal space (between the second and
AF
third ribs) on the anterior chest wall at the midclavicular line (approximately in line with
the nipple) on the same side of the casualty's chest as the penetrating wound;
approximately two-finger widths below the clavicle.
c. Insert a large bore (14 gauge; 2.5-3 inch) needle and catheter unit.
R
(1) Removes the plastic cap from the 2.5-3 inch 14 gauge needle and catheter unit.
(2) Firmly insert the needle into the skin over the top of the third rib into the second
D
intercostal space at a 90 degree angle.

(3) As the needle enters the pleural space in the chest cavity, a “pop” will be felt, followed by
a possible hiss of air escaping the chest cavity.
EVALUATOR STATES: “YOU HEAR A POP,” WHEN NEEDLE ENTERS THE CHEST CAVITY AND “YOU HEAR A
HISS,” WHEN AIR ESCAPES.
WARNING: Proper positioning of the needle is essential to avoid puncturing blood vessels and/or nerves. Blood vessels
and nerves run along the bottom of each rib.
d. Withdraw the needle while holding the catheter in place. Stabilize the catheter hub to the
chest wall with adhesive tape.
EVALUATOR: ADMINISTRATIVELY GAIN CONTROL OF THE NEEDLE AND SYRINGE UNIT AND PLACE IT IN A
SHARPS CONTAINER.
4. Place the casualty in a sitting position or on their injured side (recovery position) during transport.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, PERFORM NEEDLE CHEST DECOMPRESSION, DEC 06
B-2-27
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — TREAT AN OPEN ABDOMINAL WOUND
TASK: TREAT AN OPEN ABDOMINAL WOUND

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment with an open abdominal wound without protruding
internal organs and the necessary materials to treat the casualty.
2. Position the casualty.
a. Place the casualty on his back (face up).
b. Flex the casualty's knees after the casualty assessment is completed.
c. Turn the casualty's head to the side and keep the airway clear if vomiting occurs.
4. Apply a sterile abdominal dressing. T
a. Place the dressing directly on top of the wound.
AF
b. Tie the dressing tails loosely in a non-slip knot at the casualty's side.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY PRESSURE ON THE WOUND OR EXPOSE INTERNAL PARTS.
c. If two dressings are needed to cover a large wound, repeat steps 3a and 3b. Ensure that the
ties of additional dressings are not tied over each other.
R
d. If necessary, loosely cover the dressings with cravats. Tie them on the side of the casualty,
opposite that of the dressing ties.
D

FAILURE

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, TREAT AN OPEN ABDOMINAL WOUND, DEC 06
B-2-28
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — TREAT AN OPEN HEAD INJURY
TASK: TREAT AN OPEN HEAD INJURY.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment with an open head injury and the necessary
materials to treat the head injury.
2. Assess the casualty's pupil size and reaction.
a. Observe the size of each pupil.
NOTE: A variation of pupil size may indicate a brain injury. In a very small percentage of people, unequal pupil size is
normal.
b. Shine a light into each eye to observe the pupillary reaction to light.
NOTE: The candidate will not turn the pin light on for EFMB testing.
EVALUATOR STATES “PUPILS ARE EQUAL AND REACTIVE TO LIGHT” IF APPLICABLE OR STATE OTHER
OBSERVATIONS. T
NOTE: The pupils should constrict promptly when exposed to bright light. Failure of the pupils to constrict may
AF
indicate brain injury.
3. Assess the casualty's motor function. Evaluate the casualty's strength, mobility, coordination,
and sensation.
NOTE: Progressive loss of strength or sensation is an important indicator of brain injury.
R
4. Position the casualty.

NOTE: The casualty can be placed sitting up or with his head elevate depending on if they are conscious or have
D
other injuries that contradict sitting the casualty up.

5. Treat the head injury.
a. Expose the wound
b. Apply a dressing to the wound, either a first aid dressing or emergency trauma
dressing can be used.
6. Monitor the casualty at 15-minute intervals.
EVALUATOR WRITES: TIMES CANDIDATE MONITORS THE CASUALTY: __________ __________
__________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________ __________


OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, TREAT AN OPEN HEAD INJURY, DEC 06
B-2-29
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC — IMMOBILIZE A SUSPECTED FRACTURE OF THE ARM
TASK: IMMOBILIZE A SUSPECTED FRACTURE OF THE ARM.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment with a suspected closed fracture of the arm and
the necessary materials to treat the casualty.
1. Take body substance isolation (BSI) precautions, if necessary.
2. Check the casualty's radial pulse. If no pulse is felt, bandage and/or splint the extremity
and arrange for immediate evacuation.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS A PULSE” AFTER PULSE CHECK.
3. Position the fractured arm by having the casualty support it with the uninjured arm and
hand in the least painful position, if possible.
CAUTION: DO NOT TRY TO REDUCE OR SET THE FRACTURE. SPLINT IT WHERE IT LIES.
4. Immobilize the injury. Apply an appropriate treatment depending on the location of the
injury and the equipment available.
a.
T
Use a basswood or an improvised splint for a fractured forearm.
(1) Pad the splint.
AF
(2) Place the padded splint under the casualty's forearm so that it extends from the
elbow to beyond the fingertips.
(3) Place a rolled cravat or similar material in the palm of the cupped hand.
R
(4) Tie the cravats in a nonslip knot in the following order and recheck the radial
pulse after each cravat is applied.
D
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS A PULSE” AFTER EACH PULSE CHECK UNLESS OBVIOUSLY TIED TOO
TIGHTLY.
(a) Above the fracture site near the elbow.
(b) Below the fracture site near the wrist.
(c) Over the hand and tied in an "X" around the splint.
(5) Tie each cravat on the outside edge of the splint.
b. Use a wire ladder splint for a fractured humerus and for multiple fractures of an
arm or a forearm when the elbow is bent.
(1) Prepare the splint using the uninjured arm for measurements.
(a) Bend the prong ends of the splint away from the smooth side, about 1 ½
inches down on the outside of the splint.
(b) With the smooth side against the elbow, place one end of the splint even
with the top of the uninjured shoulder.
(c) Select a point slightly below the elbow.
(d) Remove the splint from the arm and bend the splint at the measured point
to form an "L."
(e) Pad the splint.
NOTE: If padding is unavailable, apply the splint anyway.
(2) Position the splint on the outside of the injured arm, extending from the shoulder
to beyond the fingertips.
B-2-30
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: Extend the "L" angle of the splint beyond, but do not touch the elbow of the injured arm. Extend the leg of the
angle touching the forearm beyond the ends of the fingers. If the splint is too short, extend it with a basswood splint. If
possible, have the casualty support the splint.
(3) Place a rolled cravat or similar material in the palm of the cupped hand.
(4) Check the radial pulse.
TIGHTLY.
pulse after each cravat is applied.
(a) On the humerus above any fracture site.
(b) On the humerus below any fracture site.
(c) On the forearm above any fracture site.
(d) On the forearm below any fracture site.
(e) Around the hand and splint.
(6) Tie each cravat on the outside edge of the splint.
NOTE: If the pulse is weaker or absent after tying the cravat, loosen and retie the cravat.
c. Use a wire ladder splint for a fractured or dislocated humerus, elbow, or forearm
when the elbow is straight.
(1) Prepare the splint.
(2) Position the splint on the outside of the arm against the back of the hand.
pulse after each cravat is applied. T
TIGHTLY.
AF
(a) Above the injury.
(b) Below the injury.
(c) High on the humerus, above the first cravat.
R
(d) Around the hand and wrist.

D
(4) Tie each cravat on the outside of the splint.

NOTE: If the pulse is weaker or absent after tying the cravat, loosen and retie the cravat.
(5) Apply swathes.
(a) Place the arm toward the midline in front of the body. Bind the forearm to
the pelvic area with a cravat. Tie the knot on the uninjured side.
(b) Apply an additional cravat above the elbow. Secure it on the uninjured side
at breast pocket level.
d. Use a SAM splint for a fractured wrist or forearm.
(1) Prepare the splint using the uninjured arm for measurements.
(a) Unroll the splint and fold in half so it is flat.
(b) Form the splint to the curvature of the forearm and roll the end to fit in the
cupped hand.
(2) Place the formed splint under the casualty's fractured arm.
(3) Secure the SAM Splint to the fractured arm using cravats or a wrap.
(a) If using cravats, tie the cravats in nonslip knots on the outside of the splint so
that the splint is secured and recheck the radial pulse after each cravat is
applied.
(b) If using Kerlex or an ACE wrap, wrap the material around the arm, secure it,
and recheck the radial pulse.
TIGHTLY.
5. Apply an arm sling and swathe using cravats.
a. Apply the arm sling.
B-2-31
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Insert the splinted arm in the center of the sling.

(2) Bring the ends of the sling up and tie them at the side (or hollow) of the neck on
the uninjured side.
(3) Twist and tuck the corner of the sling at the elbow.
NOTE: A sling should place the supporting pressure on the casualty’s uninjured side. The supported arm should have
the hand positioned slightly higher than the elbow.
b. Apply the swathe.
(1) Apply swathes to the injured arm by wrapping the swathe over the injured arm,
around the casualty’s back, and under the arm on the uninjured side.
(2) Tie the ends on the uninjured side.
6. Recheck radial pulse.
EVALUATOR STATES: “THERE IS A PULSE” AFTER PULSE CHECK UNLESS OBVIOUSLY TIED TOO TIGHTLY.
T
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, IMMOBILIZE A SUSPECTED FRACTURE OF THE ARM, DEC 06
B-2-32
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

TCCC- TREAT LACERATIONS, CONTUSIONS, AND EXTRUSIONS OF THE EYE
TASK: TREAT LACERATIONS, CONTUSIONS, AND EXTRUSIONS OF THE EYE.

CONDITIONS: Given a casualty in a simulated combat environment who has an eye injury and the necessary
NOTE: The EFMB host unit will determine which type of eye injury will be tested. Only one injury will be tested.
2. Position the casualty and remove his headgear, if necessary.
a. Conscious--seated.
b. Unconscious--lying on his or her back with the head slightly elevated.
3. Examine the eyes for the following:
a. Objects protruding from the globe.
b. Swelling of or lacerations on the globe. T
c. Bloodshot appearance of the sclera.
d. Bleeding.
AF
(1) Surrounding the eye.
(2) Inside the eyeball.
(3) Coming from the eyeball.
R
e. Contact lenses. Ask the casualty if he or she is wearing contact lenses, but do not
force the eyelids open.
D
f. Extrusion (the eye is protruding from the socket).

4. Categorize and treat the injury.
NOTE: Torn eyelids should be handled carefully. Wrap any detached fragments in a separate moist dressing and
evacuate with the casualty.
a. Lacerations and contusions of tissue surrounding the eye.
(1) Close the lid of the affected eye.
(2) Cover the injury with an eye pad or a small sterile dressing.
CAUTION: Do not put pressure on the eyeball.
(3) Cover torn eyelids with a loose dressing.
(4) Place a field dressing over the eye pad or dressing of the affected eye.
b. Injury to the eyeball.
(1) Cover the injured eyelid with a sterile dressing soaked in saline to keep the wound
from drying.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes potable water may be used in place of saline to moisten bandage.
(2) Place a field dressing over the eye pad.
(3) Cover the uninjured eye to prevent sympathetic eye movement.
NOTE: In hazardous conditions, leave the good eye uncovered long enough to ensure the casualty's safety.
(4) Tell the casualty not to squeeze the eyelids together.
c. Extrusion or avulsion.
B-2-33
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CAUTION: Do not attempt to reposition the eyeball or replace it in the socket.

(1) Position the casualty face up.
(2) Cut a hole in several layers of dressing material, and then moisten it. Use sterile liquid,
if available.
(3) Place the dressing so the injured globe protrudes through the hole, but does not touch
the dressing. The dressing should be built up higher than the globe.
NOTE: If available, place a paper cup or cone-shaped piece of cardboard over the eye. Do not apply pressure to the
injury site. Apply roller gauze to hold the cup in place.
(4) Cover the uninjured eye to prevent sympathetic eye movement.
NOTE: In hazardous conditions, leave the good eye uncovered long enough to ensure the casualty's safety.
T
AF

OIC/NCOIC
R
INITIALS
D
EFMB SCORE SHEET, TCCC, LACERATIONS, CONTUSIONS, AND EXTRUSIONS OF THE EYE, DEC 06
B-2-34
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — ESTABLISH A HELICOPTER LANDING POINT
TASK: ESTABLISH A HELICOPTER LANDING POINT.

CONDITIONS: Given strobe lights, flashlights or vehicle lights, marker panels, and an area to be prepared for
landing site.
STANDARDS: Established the landing site large enough for a helicopter to land and take off marking or identifying
all obstacles that cannot be removed within 10 minutes.
1. Select the landing site.
EVALUATOR STATES: “STATE THE FOUR FACTORS FOR SELECTING A LANDING SITE AND THE
CONSIDERATIONS FOR EACH.” CANDIDATE MUST ADDRESS ALL. EVALUATOR WILL ALSO STATE ALL
OTHER NECESSARY INFORMATION (I.E., DISREGARD THE TELEPHONE POLES, TREELINE).
NOTE: Time starts after the evaluator states the above.
a. The size of the landing site.
(1) A helicopter requires a relatively level landing area 30 meters in diameter. This does not
mean that a loaded helicopter can land and take off from an area of that size. Most
helicopters cannot go straight up or down when fully loaded; therefore, a larger landing
site and better approach and departure routes are required.
(2) When obstacles are in the approach or departure routes, 10 to 1 ratio must be used to
T
lay out the landing site. For example, during the approach and departure, if the
helicopter must fly over trees that are 15 meters high, the landing site must be at least
AF
150 meters long (10x15=150 meters).
R
D
Landing Site Landing Ratio.
b. The ground slope of the landing site. When selecting the landing site, the ground slope
must be no more than 15 degrees. Helicopters cannot safely land on a slope of more
than 15 degrees.
(1) When the ground slope is less than 7 degrees, the helicopter should land upslope.
(2) When the ground slope is 7 to 15 degrees, the helicopter must land sideslope.
c. Surface conditions.
(1) The ground must be firm enough that the helicopter does not bog down during loading or
unloading. If firm ground cannot be found, the pilot must be told. He may hover at the
landing site during the loading or unloading.
(2) Rotor wash on dusty, sandy, or snow-covered surfaces may cause loss of visual contact
with the ground; therefore, these areas should be avoided.
(3) Loose debris that can be kicked up by the rotor wash must be removed from the landing
site. Loose debris can cause damage to the blades or engines.
d. Obstacles.
B-3-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Landing sites should be free of tall trees, telephone lines, power lines or poles, and
similar obstructions on the approach or departure ends of the landing site.
(2) Obstructions that cannot be removed (such as large rocks, stumps, or holes) must be
marked clearly within the landing site.
2. Remove all obstacles and debris at the landing site and mark obstructions that cannot be
removed. Ensure that the marker is properly secured to the obstacle or ground.
3. Mark the landing site and identify the touchdown point.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, only step 3b will be tested, utilizing strobe lights, flashlights, or chemical lights
and will be tested during daylight hours.
a. When and how the landing site should be marked is based on the mission, capabilities,
and situation of the unit concerned. Normally, the only mark or signals required are
smoke (colored) and a signalman. VS-17 marker panels may be used to mark the
landing site, but MUST NOT be used any closer than 50 feet to the touchdown point. In
addition to identifying the landing site, smoke gives the pilot information on the wind
direction and speed.
b. An inverted “Y,” composed of four lights, marks the landing site and touchdown point at
night. Strobe lights, flashlights, or vehicle lights may also be used to mark the landing
site. The marking system used will be fully explained to the pilot when contact is made.
T
AF
R
D
Inverted “Y” Landing Site.

EVALUATOR STATES: “WHAT MARKING SYSTEM DID YOU USE AND IDENTIFY THE TOUCHDOWN POINT,”
AFTER THE CANDIDATE COMPLETES MARKING THE LANDING SITE.
4. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures within 10 minutes.
EVALUATOR WRITES: CANDIDATE’S TIME FOR THE TASK:

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, ESTABLISH A HELICOPTER LANDING POINT, DEC 06
B-3-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO A UH-60 HELICOPTER
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO A UH-60 HELICOPTER.

CONDITIONS: Given a UH-60 helicopter, three treated casualties secured on litters with straps. You and three
noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad, with you serving as the number 1 person to load the casualties. The
flight crew has configured the aircraft to receive the casualties.
STANDARDS: Prioritized, loaded, and secured three casualties onto a UH-60 helicopter within 15 minutes, in the
proper sequence, without causing further injury to the casualties.
1. Survey and prioritize the casualties to determine loading sequence.
NOTE: Time starts when the candidate starts surveying the casualties or starts the steps to secure the casualties
onto the litters.
NOTE: Casualties are prioritized IAW priorities for treatment listed in the TCCC - TRIAGE CASUALTIES task in this
publication. DD Forms 1380 will be placed on the casualties with the exact verbage of injuries from forenamed task.
a. Position litter casualties in the helicopter according to the nature of their injuries or
condition.
b. Load the most seriously injured casualties last on the bottom pans of the litter support
unit. However, if in-flight emergency medical care may be required, such as
T
cardiopulmonary resuscitation, load the casualty onto either of the top pans to facilitate
access.
AF
c. Load casualties receiving IV fluids or oxygen on any litter pan, depending on their
injuries or condition (if applicable).
d. Load casualties in traction splints last on a bottom pan (if applicable).
2. Verify the security of the straps on the three casualties on litters.
R
3. Under the supervision of the flight personnel, serve as the number 1 position and with the
assistance of the noncandidate Soldiers—
D
a. Move the litter to the aircraft.

NOTE: The UH-60 can be loaded on both sides. Load the casualty so that upon rotating the litter support, his or her
head will be forward in the cabin.
b. Do not approach aircraft until the flight crew directs you to do so.
c. Load litters onto litter pans.
(1) If loading from the aircraft’s left side with the carousel turned, the sequence is upper
right, upper left, lower right, and then lower left.
(2) If loading from the aircraft’s right side with the carousel turned, the sequence is upper
left, upper right, lower left, and then lower right.
(3) Direct the litter squad to move into the semioverhead carry, lifting the litter just high
enough for the litter stirrups of one end to slide onto the litter pan.
(4) Direct the litter squad to slide the litter forward until the litter stirrups of both ends are
secured on the pan. The candidate raises the pan back to its upright position and
secures it and the litter.
d. The litter squad departs only when directed to do so by the flight crew.
NOTE: The litter team may assist the candidate in securing the pan and the litter, but it is still the candidate’s
responsibility to ensure that the pan and litter are secured properly.
WARNING: THE LITTER SQUAD DEPARTS ONLY WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY THE FLIGHT CREW. AT NO
TIME SHOULD ANY MEMBER OF THE LITTER SQUAD GO NEAR THE TAIL ROTOR SECTION OF THE
AIRCRAFT.
4. Load the remaining casualties IAW steps 2b and 2c.
NOTE: Time ends when the litter squad departs the aircraft after loading and securing the last litter.
B-3-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

LANE
OIC/NCOIC
EVALUATOR’S SIGNATURE
T DATE
AF
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO A UH-60 HELICOPTER, DEC 06
R
D
B-3-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO A HH-60L HELICOPTER
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO A HH-60L HELICOPTER.

CONDITIONS: Given a HH-60L helicopter, three treated casualties, two secured on litters with straps and one
ambulatory. You and three noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad, with you serving as the number 1 person to
load the casualties. The flight crew has configured the aircraft to receive the casualties.
STANDARDS: Prioritized, loaded, and secured three casualties onto a HH-60L helicopter within 15 minutes, in the
proper sequence, without causing further injury to the casualties or damage to the aircraft.
NOTE: Time starts when the candidate starts surveying the casualties or starts the steps to secure the casualties
onto the litters.
a. Position litter casualties in the helicopter according to the nature of their injuries or
condition.
NOTE: Both litter casualties will be loaded in the litter pans on the right side of the aircraft.
b. Load the most seriously injured casualties last on the bottom pan of the litter support
T
access.
AF
R
2. Verify the security of the straps on the two casualties on litters.

3. Under the supervision of the flight crew, serve as the number 1 position and with the assistance
D
of the noncandidate Soldiers—

a. Move the litter to the aircraft.
NOTE: Move to the aircraft from the rear at a 45 degree angle allowing the litter to clear the external fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not allow the litter to come into contact with the external fuel tank.
WARNING: THE LITTER SQUAD DEPARTS ONLY WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY THE FLIGHT CREW. AT NO
TIME SHOULD ANY MEMBER OF THE LITTER SQUAD GO NEAR THE TAIL ROTOR SECTION OF THE
AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The HH-60L can be loaded on both sides. Load the litter casualties so that their heads are facing the medical
attendant’s seat.
b. Do not approach aircraft until the flight crew directs you to do so.
c. Load litters onto litter pans.
(1) Ensure the litter pan is lowered into the load position.
(2) Direct the litter squad to slide the litter forward until the litter stirrups of both ends are
secured on the pan.
(3) Secure litter to pan with restraining straps.
(4) Raise litter pan into the upper transport position.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes the Crew Chief will operate the litter lift for the candidate.
d. The litter squad departs only when directed to do so by the flight crew.
NOTE: The litter team may assist the candidate in securing the pan and the litter but it is still the candidate’s
B-3-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
4. Load the remaining litter casualty IAW steps 3b and 3c.

5. Prepare ambulatory seats.
a. Lower the seat pan.
b. Raise the head rest.
c. Unlatch safety belt and move straps to the side.
6. Load ambulatory casualty.
NOTE: Ambulatory casualties must be seated in the seats closest to the Medical attendant’s seat on the left side of
the aircraft.
a. Do not approach aircraft until the flight crew directs you to do so.
b. Guide the ambulatory casualty to the aircraft.
NOTE: Candidate is responsible for escorting the ambulatory casualty to the aircraft.
NOTE: Move to the aircraft from the rear at a 45 degree angle ensuring the casualty does not come in contact with
the external fuel tank.
c. Secure casualty in seat with buckle placed midline no more than 1 inch above the iliac
crest.
NOTE: The litter team may assist the candidate in securing the casualty to the seat, but it is still the candidate’s
NOTE: Time ends when the litter squad departs the aircraft after loading and securing the last casualty.
7. Did not cause further injury to the casualties or damage the aircraft.
FOR FAILURE T (CANDIDATE INITIALS APPROPRIATE BOX)
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO A HH-60L HELICOPTER, DEC 06
B-3-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO GROUND EVACUATION PLATFORM (M996, M997, OR M113)
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO GROUND EVACUATION PLATFORM (M996, M997, OR M113).
CONDITIONS: Given an unconfigured ground evacuation platform and three treated casualties, (two secured on
litters with straps and one ambulatory). You and three noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad, with you serving
as the number 1 person to load the casualties.
STANDARDS: Configured the vehicle properly. Prioritize, load, and secure three casualties (two litter and one
ambulatory) within 15 minutes, in the proper sequence, without causing further injury to the casualties.
NOTE: Time starts when the candidate starts surveying the casualties, starts the steps to secure the casualties onto
the litters, or starts the steps to configure the vehicle.
a. Casualties are normally loaded head first. They are less likely to experience motion
sickness or nausea with the head in the direction of travel. When en route, if care is
required for an injury on one side, it may be necessary to load feet first to access the
casualty from the aisle. T
b. Casualties with wounds of the chest or abdomen or those receiving IV fluids are loaded
AF
in lower berths to provide gravity flow.
c. Casualties wearing bulky splints should be placed on lower berths.
R
3. Configure and prepare the vehicle properly to receive the casualties (two litter and one
ambulatory). Remove any debris and trash.
4. Serve as the number 1 person and, with the assistance of the noncandidate Soldiers, move the
D
litters to the vehicle.

5. Load the casualties, in the proper sequence, onto the vehicle.
a. M996.
(1) Load the litter head first in the right berth and then left.
(2) Instruct the ambulatory casualty to sit in the aisle or tailgate seat.
b. M997 and M113.
(1) Load the litter head first in the upper right berth and then lower right.
(2) Instruct the ambulatory casualty to sit on the left side of the vehicle.
6. Secure the casualties for transport.
NOTE: The noncandidate Soldiers may assist the candidate by securing the litters onto the litter racks. However, it is
still the candidate’s responsibility to ensure that the litters are properly secured.
7. Fold and stow the litter rail extension (if applicable).
8. Close the door and secure the latch.
NOTE: Time ends when the door is secured.
9. Did not cause further injury to the casualties

B-3-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10


OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO GROUND EVACUATION PLATFORM (M996, M997, OR M113), DEC
06
T
AF
R
D
B-3-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO GROUND EVACUATION PLATFORM
(STRYKER MEDICAL EVACUATION VEHICLE (MEV) M1113)
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO GROUND EVACUATION PLATFORM, STRYKER MEDICAL EVACUATION
VEHICLE (MEV) (M1113).
CONDITIONS: Given an unconfigured STRYKER MEV and three treated casualties, (two secured on litters with
straps and one ambulatory). You and three noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad, with you serving as the
number 1 person to load the casualties.
STANDARDS: Configured the vehicle properly. Prioritize, load, and secure three casualties (two litters and one
ambulatory) within 15 minutes, in the proper sequence, without causing further injury to the casualties.
a. Casualties are normally loaded headfirst. They are less likely to experience motion
sickness or nausea with the head in the direction of travel. When en route, if care is
T
required for an injury on one side, it may be necessary to load feet first to access the
casualty from the aisle.
AF
b. Load the most seriously injured casualties last on the bottom pans of the litter support
access.
R
D

3 Configure and prepare the vehicle patient compartments to receive the casualties (two litter
and one ambulatory). Remove any debris and trash.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes the host unit may elect to have an evaluator operate the litter lift for the candidate.
a. Configure left side patient compartment for litter casualties (medic/aide man side).
b. Release seatback latches on left 2-man troop seat and medical attendant side seat to
lower seatback.
c. Remove left platform from stowage mounts. Position one person at each beam.
WARNING: Platform weighs 110 lbs and requires two people to safely maneuver.
d. Attach platform to support mounts.
e. Insert quick release pins to secure platform beams in place.
f. Attach litter lift arms.
g. Open litter lift arms latches.
h. Disengage forward and rear platform latches and move platform out towards center of
patient compartment in load configure position.
i. Engage rear latch and lock platform in position.
j. Remove litter securing pins from litter platform.
k. Pull E-Stop switch on litter control box out and down to DISABLE.
4. Load upper left litter casualty.
B-3-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
a. Candidate directs/assists litter bearers to position forward litter stirrups in channels on

platform.
b. Slide litter forward until litter is fully loaded on platform.
c. Disengage rear platform latch and slide platform towards the wall and lock in transport
position.
d. Close litter latches to secure litter to lift arms.
e. Ensure litter latches are locked in closed position and litter handles are secured.
f. Raise patient to upper litter position.
g. Pull E-Stop switch out and up to RUN position.
h. Press and hold litter control switch in UP position until lift arms stop in highest position.
i. Push E-Stop switch down to DISABLE.
j. Install litter restraint assemblies to secure stirrups and attach snap rings to ceiling loops.
Make sure strap is not twisted.
k. Pull strap to tighten. Slightly lift up on litter and pull tight again so strap bears partial
weight litter and patients.
l. Tie off loose end of strap.
5. Load lower litter casualty.
a. Disengage rear platform latch and slide platform to center of patient compartment and
lock in load position.
b. Candidate directs/assists litter bearers to position forward litter stirrups in channels on
platform.
c.
T
Slide litter forward, until litter is fully loaded on platform, and install four litter securing
pins into channels making sure pins pass inside litter stirrups.
AF
d. Disengage rear platform latch and slide platform and lock in transport position using
forward and rear platform latches.
6. Instruct and assist ambulatory casualty to sit on right side and secure with lap belt.
R
7. Make sure all casualties are properly secured to litters and all litters are properly secured to
litter lift assembly before leaving patient compartment area.
D
8. Secure the door. The EFMB host unit may elect to keep the door opened and have the
candidate verbally state they would secure the door.
NOTE: Time ends when the either the door is secured or the candidate states they would secure the door.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO GROUND EVACUATION PLATFORM (STRYKER MEV), DEC 06
B-3-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (5-TON M-1085, M-1093, OR 2 ½-TON M-1081)
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (5-TON M-1085, M-1093, OR 2 ½-TON M-1081).
CONDITIONS: Given an unconfigured, nonstandard vehicle (without bow and canvas), five treated casualties
secured on litters with straps, and cravats. You and three noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad, with you
serving as the number 1 person to load the casualties.
STANDARDS: Configured the vehicle properly. Prioritized, loaded, and secured five casualties within 15 minutes,
in the proper sequence, without causing further injury to the casualties.
2. Verify the security of the straps on the five casualties on litters.
3. Serve as the number 1 person and, with the assistance of the noncandidate Soldiers, move the
litters to the vehicle.
NOTE: The candidate will only be evaluated on either the M-1085, M-1093, or M-1081.
T
4. Configure and load an M-1085.
AF
R
D
M-1085 Configuration.
a. Lower the seats and secure the vertical support brackets in place. Remove any debris
and trash.
b. Place four litters (litter numbers 1 through 4) crosswise on the seats, forward, next to the
cab. Secure the litters individually to the seats with cravats using nonslip knots.
NOTES: 1. Casualties may be loaded either head to head or head to toe. 2. The noncandidate Soldiers may assist
the candidate by securing the litters to the vehicle. However, it is still the candidate’s responsibility to ensure that the
litters are properly secured.
c. Place one litter (litter number 5) lengthwise on the floor, forward toward the cab, feet
first, ensuring that the patients’ head is exposed from under the upper litters. Secure the
litter to the vertical seat supports with cravats using nonslip knots.
a. Lower the seats and secure the vertical support bracket into place. Remove any debris
and trash.
b. Place three litters (litter numbers 1 through 3) crosswise on the seats, forward, next to
the cab. Secure the litters individually to the seats with cravats using nonslip knots.
B-3-11
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
c. Place two litters (litter numbers 4 and 5) lengthwise on the floor, forward toward the cab,
feet first. Secure the litters together and to the vertical seat support with cravats using
nonslip knots.
d. Clean skin with either an alcohol swab in a circular motion from the center outward.
a. Lower the seats and secure the vertical support bracket into place. Remove any debris and
trash.
b. Place three litters (litter numbers 1 through 3) crosswise on the seats, forward, next to the
cab. Secure the litters individually to the seats with cravats using nonslip knots.
c. Place two litters (litter numbers 4 and 5) lengthwise on the floor, forward toward the cab,
feet first. Secure the litters together and to the vertical seat support with cravats using
nonslip knots.
T
AF
R
D
7. Raise and secure the tailgate.

NOTE: Time ends when the tailgate is secured.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (5-TON M-1085, M-1093, OR 2 ½-TON M-
1081), DEC 06
B-3-12
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (2 ½-TON, 6X6 OR 5-TON, 6X6, CARGO
TRUCK)
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (2 ½-TON, 6X6 OR 5-TON, 6X6, CARGO TRUCK).
CONDITIONS: Given an unconfigured, nonstandard vehicle (without bow and canvas), five treated casualties
secured on litters with straps, and cravats. You and three noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad, with you
serving as the number 1 person to load the casualties.
STANDARDS: Configured the vehicle properly. Prioritized, loaded, and secured five casualties within 15 minutes,
in the proper sequence, without causing further injury to the casualties.
2. Verify the security of the straps on the five casualties on litters.
3. Serve as the number 1 person and, with the assistance of the noncandidate Soldiers,
move the litters to the vehicle. T
4. Configure and load the vehicle.
AF
a. Lower the seats. Remove any debris and trash.
b. Place three litters crosswise on the seats, as far forward as possible, and two
litters lengthwise, in the bed of the truck, as far forward as possible.
R
D
c. Secure the first three litters individually to the seats and secure the other two
litters on the floor together and to the seat with cravats using non-slip knots.
5. Raise and secure the tailgate.
NOTE: Time ends when the tailgate is secured.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (2 ½-TON, 6X6 OR 5-TON, 6X6, CARGO
TRUCK), DEC 06
B-3-13
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (1 ¼-TON, 4X4, M998)
TASK: LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (1 ¼-TON, 4X4, M998)

CONDITIONS: Given a configured, nonstandard vehicle (without the cargo bow and canvas), three treated
casualties secured on litters with straps, and cravats. You and three noncandidate Soldiers will form a litter squad,
with you serving as the number 1 person to load the casualties.
STANDARDS: Prioritized, loaded, and secured three casualties within 15 minutes, in the proper sequence, without
causing further injury to the casualties.
2. Verify the security of the straps on the three casualties on litters.
3. Serve as the number 1 person and, with the assistance of the noncandidate Soldiers,
move the litters to the vehicle.
4. Load an M998. T
AF
R
D
M998, 3-Casualty Configuration.
a. Remove any debris and trash.

b. Place two litters side-by-side across the back of the truck with the litter handles
resting on the sides of the truck.
c. Secure the litters to the vehicle with cravats using nonslip knots.
d. Place one litter lengthwise, head first, in the bed of the truck. Secure it in place.
e. Leave the tailgate open with the two tailgate chain hooks supporting it.
NOTE: Time ends when the last litter is secured and the tailgate is positioned as stated above.
B-3-14
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10


OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, LOAD CASUALTIES ONTO NONSTANDARD VEHICLE (1 ¼-TON, 4X4, M998), DEC 06
T
AF
R
D
B-3-15
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — EXTRICATE CASUALTIES FROM A VEHICLE
TASK: EXTRICATE CASUALTIES FROM A VEHICLE.

CONDITIONS: Given a conscious casualty with a suspected neck or spinal injury that is in the driver’s seat of a
vehicle and another casualty who does not have a suspected neck or spinal injury in the passenger seat of a vehicle
after a motor vehicle accident or explosion. The tactical situation warrants extrication with a short spine board, Kendrick
Extrication Device (KED), or Oregon Spine Splint II (OSS II) which is available. A long spine board is also available, if
required. A noncandidate Soldier is available to assist.
STANDARDS: Secured and extricated casualties from the vehicle without causing further injury.
NOTE: The EFMB host unit may elect to have the candidate perform this task on two to four casualties depending on
the lane concept. At least one casualty will be extricated from a vehicle using a KED, OSS II, or short spine board.
However, they will all be tested on the same testing lane. Failure of the candidate to perform any portion of the task to
standard on any of the casualties will result in a No-Go.
1. Consider extraction priority (i.e., vehicle on fire, under direct fire from the enemy) and
mechanism of injury.
2. Gain access to the casualty.
3. Identify all injuries and either treat or delay treatment until after extrication based on the
T
severity of the injuries and the tactical situation.
a. Prior to attempting to move the casualty, if the tactical situation permits, -
AF
(1) Evaluate the type and extent of the casualty’s injuries.
(2) Ensure that dressings over wounds are adequately reinforced, if applicable.
(3) Ensure that fractured bones are properly immobilized and supported to prevent
R
them from cutting through muscle, blood vessels, and skin, if applicable.
b. Provide life threatening medical treatment at this time if warranted and if the tactical situation
D
permits.
4. Stabilize the spine by directing a noncandidate Soldier to immobilize the casualty's head and
neck using manual stabilization and apply a cervical collar, if necessary and the tactical
situation permits.
a. Directs the noncandidate Soldier to do the following:
(1) Place the hands on both sides of the casualty's skull, with the palms over the ears.
(2) Support the jaw (mandible) with the fingers.
(3) Maintain manual stabilization until directed to release the stabilization.
b. Select, measure, and apply an effective, properly-fitting cervical collar, if available, or
improvise one.
5. Remove casualty from a vehicle.
a. Remove casualty from a vehicle, if the casualty does NOT have suspected neck or spinal
injury and/or the tactical situation doesn’t warrant extraction using a KED, OSS II, or short
spine board (i.e., vehicle on fire, under direct fire from the enemy).
(1) Laterally.
(a) With the assistance of a non-candidate Soldier grasp the casualty’s arms and
(b) While stabilizing the casualty’s head and neck as much as possible, lift the
casualty free of the vehicle and move him to a safe place on the ground.
(2) Upward.
NOTE: You may have to remove a casualty upward from a vehicle, for example, from the passenger compartment of a
wheeled vehicle lying on its side or from the hatch of an armored vehicle sitting upright.
(a) You may place a pistol belt or similar material around the casualty’s chest to help
pull him from the vehicle.
B-3-16
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: A KED or OSS II may be utilized to remove the casualty also following the directions in this task.
(b) With the assistance of a non-candidate Soldier inside the vehicle, draw the
casualty upward using the pistol belt or similar material or by grasping his arms.
(c) While stabilizing the casualty’s head and neck as much as possible, lift the
casualty free of the vehicle and place him on the topmost side of the vehicle.
(d) Depending on the situation, further move the casualty from the topmost side of the
vehicle to a safe place on the ground.
b. Remove casualty from a vehicle, if the casualty does have suspected neck or spinal injury
and/or the tactical situation does warrant extraction using a KED, OSS II, or short spine
board.
NOTE: Candidate will be evaluated on either the short spine board, KED, or OSS II, depending which is utilized.
(1) Secure the casualty to a short spine board.
NOTE: Apply a short spine board when extricating a casualty from a vehicle or location that will not accommodate the
use of a long spine board. If available use a KED which is a commercial spine board.
(a) Push the board as far into the area behind the casualty as possible.
(i) Tilt the upper end of the board toward the head.
(ii) Direct the noncandidate Soldier to position the back of the casualty's head
against the board, maintaining manual stabilization, by moving the head
and neck as one unit.
NOTE: If the cervical collar or improvised collar does not fit flush with the spine board, place a roll in the hollow space
between the neck and board. The roll should only be large enough to fill the gap, not to exert pressure on the neck.
(b) Secure the casualty's head and head supports to the board with straps or cravats.
WARNING: Ensure that the cravats or head straps are firmly in place before the assistant releases stabilization.
T
(i) Apply head supports.
AF
(ii) Use two rolled towels, blankets, sandbags, or similar material.
(iii) Place one close to each side of the head.
(iv) Using a cravat-like material across the forehead, make the supports and
head one unit by tying to the board.
R
(c) Secure the casualty to the short spine board.

D
(i) Place the buckle of the first strap in the casualty's lap.
(ii) Pass the other end of the strap through the lower hole in the board, up the
back of the board, through the top hole, under the armpit, over the shoulder,
and across the back of the board at the neck.
(iii) Buckle the second strap to the first strap and place the buckle on the side of
the board at the neck.
(iv) Pass the other end over the shoulder, under the armpit, through the top
hole in the board, down the back of the board, through the lower hole, and
across the lap. Secure it by buckling it to the first strap.
(d) Tie the casualty's hands together and place them in his lap.
(2) Secure the casualty to an OSS II.
(a) Move the casualty forward to allow two to three inches of space between the
casualty’s back and the seat maintaining the entire spine in alignment.
(b) Remove the OSS from it’s case and unfold the two center sections.
(c) Place the OSS behind the casualty in the space created between the casualty’s
back and the seat.
(d) Release the groin and torso straps. The torso straps should rest just under the
armpits of the casualty.
(e) Pass the shoulder straps across the casualty’s chest and attach them to the
corresponding strap at each of the casualty’s armpits. The buckle of each strap
should be positioned on the anterior portion of the chest and be generally mid-
clavicular.
(f) Attach the second and third set of straps to their corresponding color.
B-3-17
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(g) Ensure that each strap is not tugged, but gently pulled to assure in-line stabilization.
(h) Do not make the straps so tight as to make it difficult for the casualty to breathe.
(i) Bring the groin straps under each leg by using a sawing motion and attach to the
corresponding strap at each thigh.
(j) Pad each strap in the groin area before connecting them if time permits.
(k) Reassess all of the straps to ensure that none are too loose.
(l) Place the provided padding between the casualty’s head and the device as needed.
This will help to ensure that the head and neck will maintain a neutral position. Do
NOT place the padding behind the casualty’s neck.
(m) The candidate will now take over manual cervical spine stabilization and the
noncandidate Soldier will position the head flaps along the sides of the casualty’s
head.
(n) The candidate will direct the noncandidate Soldier to regain control of cervical spine
stabilization and the candidate will position the forehead restraint strap with the
padding toward the casualty. Move any hair from the casualty’s forehead and place
the forehead restraint strap on the casualty with the lower edge covering the
casualty’s eyebrows and attach to the Velcro on the head flaps of the device.
(o) Place the collar strap on the rigid chin rest of the cervical collar. Pull the ends of the
strap upward and at an angle and attach to the Velcro on the device.
(3) Secure the casualty to a KED.
(a) Move the casualty forward to allow two to three inches of space between the
casualty’s back and the seat maintaining the entire spine in alignment.
(b) Position the immobilization device behind the casualty.
T
(c) Secure the device to the casualty’s torso.
(i) Immobilize the torso, from the top to the bottom strap.
AF
(ii) Apply the pelvic straps, ensuring to pad the groin area.
(d) Secure the casualty’s head to the device.
(i) Pad behind the patient's head as necessary.
R
(ii) Place one cravat across the chin angle towards the ear, ensuring the cravat
does not interfere with the airway. Tie cravats to the side of the device.
D
(iii) Place a cravat across the forehead angle towards the base of the head, and
tie it to the side of device.
(e) Evaluate and adjust the straps. They must be tight enough so the device does not
move excessively up, down, left, or right, but not so tight as to restrict the casualty’s
breathing.
6. Remove casualty from vehicle with the assistance of the noncandidate Soldier.
7. Secure casualty to long spine board and then on a litter (if applicable).
NOTE: When positioning a casualty who is secured to a short spine board, on a long spine board, line up the hand grip
holes of the short spine board with the holes of the long spine board, if possible, and secure the two boards together.
NOTE: The pelvic straps of a casualty who is secured in a KED must be released after being placed on a long spine
board.
8. Perform all performance steps/measures without causing further injury.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, EXTRICATE CASUALTIES FROM A VEHICLE, DEC 06
B-3-18
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — EVACUATE A CASUALTY USING A SKED LITTER
TASK: EVACUATE A CASUALTY USING A SKED LITTER.

CONDITIONS: Given a nonambulatory casualty who needs to be evacuated and a SKED litter is available.
STANDARDS: Successfully packaged casualty onto a SKED and moved them without causing further injury.
1. Remove and prepare the SKED litter.
a. Remove SKED from pack and place on ground.
b. Unfasten retainer strap, step on foot end of SKED and unroll completely to
opposite end.
(1) Bend the SKED in half and back roll. Repeat with opposite end of SKED.
(2) SKED litter will now lay flat.
c. Place SKED litter next to casualty. Ensure head end of litter is adjacent to the
head of casualty. Place cross straps under SKED.
2. Load the casualty on the SKED litter.
a. Log roll casualty and slide SKED as far under casualty as possible. Gently roll
T
casualty down on the SKED litter.
AF
b. Slide casualty to center of SKED litter. Be sure to keep spinal column as straight
as possible.
c. Pull straps out from under SKED litter.
d. Lift sides of SKED and fasten the four cross straps to buckles directly opposite the
R
straps.
e. Lift foot portion of SKED and feed foot straps thru unused grommets at foot end of
D
SKED and fasten to buckles.

f. Attach the dragline to the head portion of the SKED litter and use to transport the
casualty off the battlefield.
3. Evacuate the casualty as directed without assistance.
4. Perform all performance steps/measures without causing further injury.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, EVACUATE A CASUALTY USING A SKED LITTER, DEC 06
B-3-19
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING ONE-PERSON CARRIES OR DRAGS
NUMBER
TASK: EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING ONE-PERSON CARRIES OR DRAGS.

CONDITIONS: Given casualties that must be transported to receive further medical aid and/or be evacuated in the
care under fire and/or tactical field care phases and no Soldiers are available to assist with evacuation.
STANDARDS: Transported the casualties using one-person carries and drags without causing further injury.
listed to assist candidates in their preparation for EFMB testing. The objective of the various one-man carries and
drags is to evacuate the casualty off the battlefield without causing further injury. However, selection and execution of
a misappropriate carry or drag that would put the casualty and/or candidate in danger due to the tactical situation will
the lane concept. However, they will all be tested on the same testing lane. Failure of the candidate to perform any
portion of the task to standard on any of the casualties will result in a No-Go. Candidates will be standardized on
when and where the carries or drags must be executed and to what location the casualties must be evacuated.
1. Estimate the time available to transport the casualty by considering the following to
determine the best one-person carry or drag to evacuate the casualties.
a. The casualty’s physical and mental condition to include the endurance time of the casualty
T
and the type and extent of injuries.
AF
b. The tactical situation to include the type of situation and personnel and/or equipment
availability.
c. The environment to include the weather, terrain (natural and man-made), and if the
environment is contaminated or uncontaminated.
R
2. Prior to attempting to move the casualty, if the tactical situation permits, -

a. Evaluate the type and extent of the casualty’s injuries.
D
b. Ensure that dressings over wounds are adequately reinforced, if applicable.

c. Ensure that fractured bones are properly immobilized and supported to prevent them from
cutting through muscle, blood vessels, and skin, if applicable.
3. Select an appropriate one-person carry or drag to transport the casualty based on your
evaluation of the tactical situation and the factors involved in evacuating the casualty.
NOTE: More than one carry or drag may be suitable to the situation. The candidate may select any appropriate carry
or drag. However, selection and execution of a misappropriate carry or drag that would put the casualty and/or
candidate in danger due to the tactical situation will receive a No-Go. For example, despite having a four foot wall
available for cover the candidate performs the fireman’s carry exposing the casualty and himself to direct fire from the
enemy. For example, the neck drag or one-person drag would be more appropriate.
WARNING: Do NOT use manual carries to move a casualty with a neck of spine injury, unless a life-threatening
hazard is in the immediate area.
a. Transport a casualty using the one-person drag.
NOTE: Useful in combat to expeditiously move a casualty. Generally used for short distances. Can use only one
hand to drag the casualty leaving the other hand free to return fire with a weapon.
(1) Position the casualty on their back.
(2) Secure a firm hold of the casualty’s web gear.
(3) Rise and expediently drag the casualty backward without causing further injury.
b. Transport a casualty using the cradle drop drag.
NOTE: Useful to move a casualty, who cannot walk, up or down stairs.
(1) Kneel at casualty’s head with him lying on his back.
B-3-20
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Slide your hands, palms up, under the casualty’s shoulders and get a firm hold
under his armpits.
(3) Rise partially, supporting the casualty’s head with your forearms, chest, or
abdomen.
(4) Rise and expediently drag the casualty backward with him in a semisitting position
without causing further injury.
(5) Back down the steps (or up if appropriate), supporting the casualty's head and body
and letting the hips and legs drop from step to step.
c. Transport a casualty using the firefighter’s carry.
NOTE: Use for an unconscious or severely injured casualty. The easiest way for one individual to carry another.
(1) Positions the casualty for the carry.
(2) Brings the casualty to an upright position.
(3) Steps around to face the casualty.
(4) Lifts the casualty into the carry.
d. Transport a casualty using the fireman’s carry.
NOTE: Use for an unconscious or severely injured casualty. The easiest way for one individual to carry another.
(1) Roll the casualty onto his abdomen, if applicable.
(a) Kneel at the casualty’s uninjured side.
(b) Place the casualty’s arms above his head.
(c) Cross the ankle that is farther from you over the one that is closer to you.
(d) Place one of your hands on the casualty’s shoulder that is farther from you; place
(e) Roll the casualty gently toward you onto his abdomen.
(2) After rolling the casualty onto his or her abdomen, straddle him.
T
(3) Extend your hands under the casualty’s chest and lock them together.
AF
(4) Lift the casualty to his or her knees as you move backward.
(5) Continue to move backward, thus straightening the casualty’s legs and locking his
or her knees.
(6) Walk forward, bringing the casualty to a standing position. Tilt the casualty
R
backward slightly to prevent his knees from buckling.

(7) As you maintain constant support of the casualty with one arm, free your other arm,
D
quickly grasp the casualty’s wrist, and raise his or her arm high. Instantly pass your
head under the casualty’s raised arm, releasing it as you pass under it.
(8) Move swiftly to face the casualty and secure your arms around his or her waist.
Immediately place one foot between the casualty’s feet and spread them apart.
(9) Grasp the casualty’s wrist and raise his arm high over your head.
(10) Bend down and pull the casualty’s arm over and down on your shoulder, bringing
his body across your shoulders. At the same time, pass your arm between the
casualty’s legs.
(11) Grasp the casualty’s wrist with one hand, and place your other hand on your knee
or weapon for support.
(12) Rise with the casualty positioned correctly.
(13) Rise with the casualty positioned correctly and carry the casualty.
NOTE: Your other hand is free for use as needed. For example, the free arm can be used to fire a weapon.
e. Transport a casualty using the saddleback carry.
NOTE: Only a conscious casualty can be transported with this carry. He must be able to hold onto the bearer’s neck.
(1) Raise the casualty to an upright position, as in the fireman’s carry.
(2) Support the casualty by placing an arm around his waist. Move to the casualty’s
side. Have the casualty put his arm around your neck and move in front of him with
your back to him.
(3) Have the casualty encircle his arms around your neck.
(4) Stoop, raise the casualty on your back, and clasp your hands together beneath his
thighs, if possible.
B-3-21
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
f. Transport a casualty using the one-person supporting carry.

NOTE: The casualty must be able to walk, or at least hop on one leg, using the bearer as a crutch. This carry can be
used to transport a casualty as far as he is able to walk or hop.
(1) Raise or lift the casualty from the ground to a standing position, as in the fireman’s
carry.
(2) Grasp the casualty’s wrist and draw his arm around your neck.
(3) Place your arm around his wrist. The casualty is now able to walk or hop, using
you as a support.
g. Transport a using the arms carry.
NOTE: Useful in carrying a casualty for a short distance (up to 50 meters) and for placing a casualty on a litter.
(1) Raise or lift the casualty from the ground to a standing position, as in the fireman’s
carry.
(2) Place one arm under the casualty’s knees and your other arm around his back.
(3) Lift the casualty.
(4) Carry the casualty high to lessen fatigue.
h. Transport a casualty using the pack-strap carry.
NOTE: The casualty’s weight rests high on the bearer’s back. This makes it easier for you to carry the casualty a
moderate distance (50 to 300 meters). To eliminate the possibility of injury to the casualty’s arms, you must hold the
casualty’s arms in a palms-down position. Once the casualty is positioned on the bearer’s back, the bearer
remains as erect as possible to prevent straining or injuring his back.
(1) Lift the casualty from the ground to a standing position, as in the fireman’s carry.
(2) Support the casualty with your arms around him and grasp his wrist closer to you.
(3)
(4)
T
Place his arm over your head and across your shoulders.
Move in front of him while still supporting his weight against your back.
AF
(5) Grasp his other wrist and place this arm over your shoulder.
(6) Bend forward and raise or hoist the casualty as high on your back as possible so
that his weight is resting on your back.
R
i. Transport a casualty using the pistol-belt carry.

NOTE: The best one-man carry for a long distance (over 300 meters). If pistol belts are not available for use, other
items such as rifle slings, two cravat bandages, two litter straps, or any other suitable material which will not cut or
D
bind the casualty may be used.

(1) Link two pistol belts (or three, if necessary) together to form a sling. Place the
sling under the casualty’s thighs and lower back so that a loop extends from each
side.
(2) Lie face up between the casualty’s outstretched legs. Thrust your arms through the
loops and grasp his hands and trouser leg on his injured side.
(3) Roll toward the casualty’s uninjured side onto your abdomen, bringing him onto
your back. Adjust the sling, if necessary.
(4) Rise to a kneeling position. The belt holds the casualty in place.
(5) Place one hand on your knee for support and rise to an upright position. (The
casualty is supported on your shoulders.)
(6) Carry the casualty with your hands free for use in rifle firing, climbing, or
surmounting obstacles.
j. Transport a casualty using the pistol-belt drag.
NOTE: Generally used for short distances (up to 50 meters). It is useful in combat, since both the bearer and the
casualty can remain closer to the ground than in other drags.
(1) Extend two pistol belts or similar objects to their full length and join them together
to make a continuous loop.
(2) Roll the casualty onto his back, as in the fireman’s carry.
(3) Pass the loop over the casualty’s head, and position it across his chest and under
his armpits. Then cross the remaining portion of the loop, thus forming a figure
eight.
(4) Lie on your side facing the casualty.
B-3-22
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(5) Slip the loop over your head and turn onto your abdomen. This enables you to drag
the casualty as you crawl.
k. Transport a casualty using the neck drag.
NOTE: Useful in combat because the bearer can transport the casualty as he creeps behind a low wall or shrubbery,
under a vehicle, or through a culvert. Generally used for short distances. If the casualty is unconscious, his head
must be protected from the ground. The neck drag cannot be used if the casualty has a broken arm.
CAUTION: Do NOT use the neck drag if the casualty has a broken arm or a suspected neck injury.
(1) Tie the casualty's hands together at the wrists. (If conscious, the casualty may
clasp his hands together around your neck.)
(2) Straddle the casualty in a kneeling face-to-face position.
(3) Loop the casualty's tied hands over and/or around your neck.
(4) Crawl forward, looking ahead, dragging the casualty with you.
l. Transport a casualty using a rope or SKED MOUT Lifeline.
NOTE: Generally used for short distances. Useful to allow a Soldier is down in the “line of fire” to be moved to safety
without exposing anyone else to enemy fire.
(1) If using a SKED MOUT Lifeline-
(a) The candidate, positioned behind cover, instructs the casualty to attach the metal
link on the end of the rope to the web gear or assault vest behind the neck or other
appropriate point.
(b) The casualty throws the Lifeline bag to the candidate who is still positioned behind
cover. If the casualty is unable to throw his Lifeline, the candidate can throw one to
him and instruct the casualty to attach it to his gear.
(c)
T
The candidate will tie a quick loop into the Lifeline rope and drag the casualty to
safety.
AF
(2) If using a rope-
(a) The candidate, positioned behind cover, instructs the casualty to attach the rope to
the web gear or assault vest behind the neck or other appropriate point.
(b) The casualty throws the rope to the candidate who is still positioned behind cover.
R
If the casualty is unable to throw his rope, the candidate can throw one to him and
instruct the casualty to attach it to his gear.
D
(c) The candidate will tie a quick loop into the rope and drag the casualty to safety.
j. Transport a casualty through a window or the roof of a building.
NOTE: The EFMB host unit will develop standards based on the window or building that they will be utilizing. These
standards must be submitted to the EFMB TCO for approval and provided to the candidates for preparation.
4. Evacuate the casualties as directed without assistance.
NOTE: If the candidate fails to transport the casualty to the prescribed location they will receive a No-Go.
5. Perform all performance steps/measures without causing further injury to the casualties or
self.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING ONE-PERSON CARRIES OR DRAGS, DEC 06
B-3-23
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING TWO-PERSON CARRIES OR DRAGS
NUMBER
TASK: EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING TWO-PERSON CARRIES OR DRAGS.

CONDITIONS: Given two to four casualties (one conscious and one unconscious) that must be transported to
receive further medical aid and/or be evacuated in the care under fire and/or tactical field care phases. A non-
candidate Soldier is available to assist with evacuation as a bearer. Necessary equipment, as required, is available.
STANDARDS: Evacuated the casualties using two-person carries or drags without causing further injury.
listed to assist candidates in their preparation for EFMB testing. The objective of the various two-man carries and
drags is to evacuate the casualty without causing further injury. However, selection and execution of a
misappropriate carry or drag that would put the casualty and/or candidate in danger due to the tactical situation will
when and where the carries or drags must be executed and to what location the casualties must be evacuated.
1.
T
Estimate the time available to transport the casualty by considering the following to
determine the best two-person carry or drag to evacuate the casualties.
AF
availability.
R
D

3. Select an appropriate two-person carry or drag to transport the casualty based on your
evaluation of the tactical situation and the factors involved in evacuating the casualty.
NOTE: More than one carry or drag may be suitable to the situation. The candidate may select any appropriate carry
or drag. However, selection and execution of a misappropriate carry or drag that would put the casualty and/or
candidate in danger due to the tactical situation will receive a No-Go. The EFMB host unit will demonstrate
appropriate carries and drags for the various situations applicable with the lane concept of operation.
WARNING: Do NOT use manual carries to move a casualty with a neck of spine injury, unless a life-threatening
hazard is in the immediate area.
a. Transport a casualty using the two-person drag.
NOTE: Useful in combat to expeditiously move a casualty. Generally used for short distances. Can use only one
hand to drag the casualty leaving the other hand free to return fire with a weapon.
(1) Position the casualty on their back.
(2) Secure a firm hand hold of the casualty’s web gear and have the other Soldier who
is assisting you do the same.
(3) Rise and expediently drag the casualty backward without causing further injury.
b. Transport a casualty using the two-person fore-and-aft carry.
B-3-24
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: Useful two-person carry for transporting the casualty over a long distance (over 300 meters). The taller of the
two bearers should be positioned at the casualty’s head. By altering this carry so that both bearers face the casualty,
it is useful for placing a casualty on a litter.
(1) One bearer spreads the casualty’s legs and kneels between them with his back to
the casualty. He positions his hands behind the casualty’s knees. The other bearer
kneels at the casualty’s head, slides his hands under the arms, across the chest,
and locks his hands together.
(2) The two bearers rise together, lifting the casualty.
c. Transport a casualty using the two-person rifle carry.
NOTE: An improvised carry that may only be used in transporting a conscious casualty. Special care should be
taken so the weapon is not damaged.
(1) Each bearer gains a firm grasp on opposite ends of the casualty’s rifle.
(2) Direct the casualty to place self on the middle of the held rifle and place his arms
around the bearer’s necks.
d. Transport a casualty using the poncho drag.
NOTE: An improvised drag that may be used in transporting both conscious and unconscious casualties. May
cause damage to the poncho.
(1) Place the casualty on a poncho or other similar material.
(2) Each bearer grabs a firm grip of the poncho.
(3) Transport the casualty paying attention the casualty does not fall of the poncho.
e. Transport a casualty using the two-person supporting carry.T
NOTE: Used in transporting both conscious and unconscious casualties. If the casualty is taller than the bearers, it
AF
may be necessary for the bearers to lift the casualty’s legs and let them rest on their forearms.
(1) Help the casualty to his feet and support him with their arms around his waist.
(2) Grasp the casualty’s wrists and draw his arms around their necks.
f. Transport a casualty using the two-person arms carry.
R
NOTE: Useful in carrying a casualty for a moderate distance (50 to 300 meters) and placing him on a litter. To
lessen fatigue, the bearers should carry the casualty high and as close to their chests as possible. Safest method for
D
transporting a casualty with a back injury and there isn’t time to obtain a spine board.
(1) Kneel at one side of the casualty and place their arms beneath the casualty’s back,
waist, hips, and knees.
(2) Lift the casualty while rising to their knees.

(3) Turn the casualty toward their chests, while rising to a standing position. Carry the
casualty high to lessen fatigue.
g. Transport a casualty using a stokes litter (basket).
NOTE: Affords maximum security for the patient when the litter is tilted.
(1) Place the casualty on the stokes litter (basket).
(2) Secure the casualty in the stokes litter (basket).
(3) One bearer is positioned at the head end of the casualty and the other at the
casualty’s feet.
h. Transport a casualty using the four-hand seat carry.
NOTE: This carry is especially useful in transporting a casualty with a head or foot injury for a moderate distance (50
to 300 meters). It is also useful in placing a casualty on a litter. Only a conscious casualty can be transported with
this carry.
(1) Bearers construct the handholds by grasping one of his wrists and one of the other
bearer’s wrists, thus forming a packsaddle.
(2) Direct the casualty to place self into the carry and place his arms around the
bearer’s necks.
B-3-25
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

i. Transport a casualty using the two-hand seat carry.
NOTE: Used when carrying a casualty for a short distance (up to 50 meters) and in placing a casualty on a litter.
(1) With the casualty lying on his back, a bearer kneels on each side of the casualty at
his hips.
(2) Each bearer passes his arms under the casualty’s thighs and back, and grasps the
other bearer’s wrists.
j. Transport a casualty using a rope or SKED MOUT Lifeline.
NOTE: Generally used for short distances. Useful to allow a Soldier is down in the “line of fire” to be moved to safety
without exposing anyone else to enemy fire.
(1) If using a SKED MOUT Lifeline-
(a) The candidate, positioned behind cover, instructs the casualty to attach the metal
link on the end of the rope to the web gear or assault vest behind the neck or other
appropriate point.
(b) The casualty throws the Lifeline bag to the candidate who is still positioned behind
cover. If the casualty is unable to throw his Lifeline, the candidate can throw one to
him and instruct the casualty to attach it to his gear.
(c) The candidate will tie a quick loop into the Lifeline rope and with the assistance of a
noncandidate Soldier drag the casualty to safety.
(2) If using a rope-
(a) The candidate, positioned behind cover, instructs the casualty to attach the rope to
the web gear or assault vest behind the neck or other appropriate point.
T
(b) The casualty throws the rope to the candidate who is still positioned behind cover.
If the casualty is unable to throw his rope, the candidate can throw one to him and
AF
instruct the casualty to attach it to his gear.
(c) The candidate will tie a quick loop into the rope and with the assistance of a
noncandidate Soldier drag the casualty to safety.
R
k. Transport a casualty through a window or from a roof of a building.

D
l. Transport a casualty using an improvised litter.
NOTE: The candidate will choose the type of improvised litter based on the available equipment to construct the
improvised litter (i.e., poncho, jackets, door).
(1) Use a poncho, poncho liner, or blanket and two poles or limbs.
(a) Open the poncho, poncho liner, or blanket and lay the two poles lengthwise across
the center, forming three equal sections.
(b) Reach in, pull the hood up toward you, and lay it flat on the poncho, if used.
(c) Fold one section of the poncho, poncho liner, or blanket over the first pole.
(d) Fold the remaining section of the poncho, poncho liner, or blanket over the second
pole to the first pole.
(2) Use shirts or jackets and two poles or limbs.
(a) Button two or three shirts or jackets and turn them inside out, leaving the sleeves
inside.
(b) Lay the shirts or jackets on the ground and pass the poles through the sleeves.
(3) Use a door or any other material that may be used as an improvised litter.
(4) Place the casualty on the litter.
(5) The two bearers rise together, lifting the litter.
4. Evacuate the casualties as directed with the assistance of the other bearer.
5. Perform all performance steps/measures without causing further injury to the casualties.
B-3-26
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10


INITIALS T
AF
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING TWO-PERSON CARRIES OR DRAGS, DEC 06
R
D
B-3-27
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

EVAC — EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING LITTER CARRIES
NUMBER
TASK: EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING LITTER CARRIES.

CONDITIONS: Given two to four casualties in the tactical field care or CASEVAC phase that must be transported to
receive further medical aid and/or be evacuated. Standard Army litters, Talon litters, SKED litters, and/or Stokes litter
with litter straps and/or other necessary equipment is available as required. Three Soldiers are available to assist in
transporting the casualties. Material to construct an improvised litter is available, as required.
STANDARDS: Evacuated the casualties using appropriate litter carries without causing further injury.
listed to assist candidates in their preparation for EFMB testing. The objective of the various litter carries is to
evacuate the casualty over and through various obstacles and terrain without causing further injury. However,
selection and execution of a misappropriate litter carry that would put the casualty and/or candidate in danger due to
the tactical situation will receive a No-Go; even if executed correctly.
when and where the litter carries must be executed and to what location the casualties must be evacuated.
1. Remove casualty from a vehicle, if necessary, and consider extrication priority (i.e., vehicle
T
on fire, under direct fire from the enemy).
AF
NOTE: If the casualty has a suspected neck or spinal injury, remove the casualty from the vehicle with a KED, OSS II
or short spine board if the tactical situation permits (Evaluated IAW Extricate Casualties from a Vehicle Task).
a. Laterally.
(1) With the assistance of a Soldier grasp the casualty’s arms and legs.
R
(2) While stabilizing the casualty’s head and neck as much as possible, lift the casualty
free of the vehicle and move him to a safe place on the ground.
D
b. Upward.
NOTE: You may have to remove a casualty upward from a vehicle, for example, from the passenger compartment of
a wheeled vehicle lying on its side or from the hatch of an armored vehicle sitting upright.
(1) You may place a pistol belt or similar material around the casualty’s chest to help
pull him from the vehicle.
(2) With the assistance of a Soldier inside the vehicle, draw the casualty upward using
the pistol belt or similar material or by grasping his arms.
(3) While stabilizing the casualty’s head and neck as much as possible, lift the casualty
free of the vehicle and place him on the topmost side of the vehicle.
(4) Depending on the situation, further move the casualty from the topmost side of the
vehicle to a safe place on the ground.
3. Place casualty on litter and secure with litter straps or applicable securing devise.
4. Estimate the time available to transport the casualty by considering the following:
availability.
B-3-28
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: The candidate does not have to be in the bearer number 1 position during the performance of each of the
following performance steps/measures.
5. Transport casualty using the 4-person carry.
NOTE: The bearer number 1 does not have to use the exact verbage (i.e., “Two-Person Carry Move”) to execute a
litter carry as long as he clearly communicates what must be accomplished to the other members of the litter team.
6. Select and perform the appropriate litter carry to transport each casualty over terrain or
obstacles to a directed location.
NOTE: The EFMB host unit will select four of the following obstacles to be tested. All casualties do not have to be
transported over the same obstacles and/or terrain.
a. Transport a casualty uphill or upstairs.
NOTE: The litter is normally carried uphill or upstairs with the casualty’s head forward. However, if the casualty has a
fracture of the lower extremities, the litter is carried with the casualty’s feet forward.
(1) From the 4-person carry position, bearer number 1 gives the command, “Uphill or
Carry, MOVE.”
(2) Bearer number 2 changes his or her hold on the litter handle to the other hand.
(3) Bearer number 2 steps between the handles and takes full support of the litter.
(4) Bearer number 1 releases his or her hold.
(5) Bearer number 1 steps one pace in front of the squad to lead.
(6) The four bearers proceed uphill. T
(7) Bearer numbers 3 and 4 keep the litter level.
AF
(8) After clearing the obstacle, the bearers resume the 4-person carry.
(9) Prior to proceeding further, the litter must be turned so the casualty is in a feet first
orientation, if applicable. The litter squad assumes the litter post carry position and
R
then rotates the litter.

b. Transport a casualty downhill or downstairs.
D
NOTE: The litter is normally carried downhill or downstairs with the casualty’s feet forward. However, if the casualty
has a fracture of the lower extremities, the litter is carried with the casualty’s head forward.
(1) From the 4-person carry position, bearer number 1 gives the command, “Litter Post
Carry, MOVE.”
(2) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 step between the handles of the litter and take hold of the
handles.
(3) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 release their hold of the litter.
(4) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 move to the sides of the litter and grasp the litter poles.
(5) Bearer number 1 gives the preparatory command, “Prepare To Rotate.”
(6) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 release the litter handles and step one pace away,
allowing bearer numbers 1 and 4 to support the litter at its sides.
(7) Bearer number 1 gives the command of execution, “ROTATE”.
(8) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 rotate the litter 180 degrees counterclockwise, placing the
casualty’s head in the direction of travel.
(9) Bearer number 1 gives the command “Downhill Carry, MOVE.”
(10) Bearer number 3 takes full support of the litter at the casualty’s feet.
(11) Bearer numbers 2 and 4 take the litter handles at the casualty’s head.
(12) Bearer number 1 moves to the front and faces the squad.
(13) When all four bearers are in position, they proceed downhill with the litter.
B-3-29
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(14) Bearer numbers 2 and 4 keep the litter level as they proceed downhill.
(15) Bearer number 1 supports bearer numbers 2 and 4 and ensures that they keep the
litter level.
orientation, if applicable. The litter squad assumes the litter post carry position and
then rotates the litter.
c. Transport a casualty over rough terrain or debris.
Carry, MOVE.”
(2) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 change their holds on the litter handles to the other hand.
(3) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 step between the handles and take the full support of the
litter.
(4) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 release their holds.
(6) The four bearers proceed carefully over the obstacle.
(7) After passing through the obstacle, the litter squad resumes the 4-person carry
position.
d. Transport a casualty through a door or narrow obstacle.
(1) Upon reaching the door or narrow passage, bearer number 1 instructs another
bearer to clear any debris or obstacles immediately before the passage, at the
passage, and beyond the passage, and to check for booby traps (if not already
T
cleared by the candidate).
AF
(2) From the 4-person carry position, bearer number 1 gives the command “2-Person
Carry, MOVE.”
NOTE: The 2-person carry is used to pass through or over narrow passages such as trails, bridges, gangplanks, and
catwalks. With modification, it may also be used to pass through obstacles such as culverts and tunnels.
R
(3) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 change their holds on the litter handles to the other hand.
(4) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 step between the handles and take the full support of the
D
litter.
(5) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 release their holds.
(6) Bearer number 1 steps one pace in front of the squad to lead.
(7) Bearer number 4 falls one pace to the rear to follow.
(8) The four bearers proceed through the obstacle.
position.
e. Transport a casualty through a barbed wire obstacle.
(1) Upon reaching the barbed wire obstacle, bearer number 1 instructs another bearer
to clear any debris or obstacles immediately before the wire, at the wire, and
beyond the wire, and to check for booby traps.
NOTE: Prior to proceeding through the obstacle, the litter must be turned. The litter squad assumes the litter post
carry position and then rotates the litter.
Carry, MOVE.”
(3) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 step between the handles of the litter and take hold of the
handles.
(4) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 release their holds on the litter.
(6) Bearer number 1 gives the preparatory command, “Prepare To Rotate.”
B-3-30
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(7) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 release the litter handles and step one pace away,
allowing bearer numbers 1 and 4 to support the litter at its sides.
(8) Bearer number 1 gives the command of execution, “ROTATE.”
(9) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 rotate the litter 180 degrees counterclockwise, placing the
casualty’s head in the direction of travel.
(10) When the rotation is completed, bearer numbers 2 and 3 resume their positions at
the litter handles. Bearer number 2 should now be at the casualty’s head.
(11) Bearer number 1 gives the preparatory command, “Low Crawl Carry.”
(12) The bearers, keeping the litter level, assume the low crawl carry position.
NOTE: The weapon must be carried and not slung on the back.
(13) Bearer number 1 gives the command of execution, “MOVE.”
(14) The bearers extend their arms forward, grasp the litter handles, and move the litter
forward.
(15) Bearer number 1 gives the command, “LIFT.”

(16) The bearers lift the litter and move it forward; they do not drag it.
(17) The bearers move forward using the low crawl.
(18) No part of the casualty, the bearers, or their equipment should come into contact
with the barbed wire. If something should become entangled, the bearers must free
it before continuing.
(19) The bearers repeat steps 15, 16, 17, and 18 until they clear the obstacle.
T
AF
orientation. The litter squad assumes the litter post carry position and then rotates
the litter.
R
f. Transport a casualty over a high wall obstacle.

(1) Upon reaching the high wall, bearer number 1 instructs another bearer to clear any
debris or obstacles immediately before the wall, at the wall, and beyond the wall,
D
and to check for booby traps.

(2) From the 4-person carry position, bearer number 1 gives the command
“Semioverhead Carry, MOVE.”
(3) The bearers turn and face each other.
(4) The bearers raise the litter approximately chest high and step close to the litter,
letting their bent elbows touch their chests.
(5) Bearer numbers 2 and 4 place the front stirrups beyond the wall.
(6) Bearer numbers 2 and 4 scale the wall and drop to the other side, maintaining a low
silhouette.
(7) All four bearers move the litter forward until the rear stirrups are against the wall,
taking care to avoid scraping the patient's back, by not dragging the litter across.
(8) Bearer numbers 1 and 3 scale the wall and drop to the other side, maintaining a low
silhouette.
(9) Bearer numbers 1 and 3 lift their end of the litter off the wall.
(10) All four bearers resume the 4-person carry.

g. Transport a casualty over a fence or low wall obstacle.
(1) Upon reaching the fence or low wall, bearer number 1 instructs another bearer to
clear any debris or obstacles immediately before the wall, at the wall, and beyond
the wall, and to check for booby traps.
(2) From the 4-person carry position, bearer number 1 gives the command “Litter Post,
CARRY.”
B-3-31
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Bearer number 2 releases his or her grasp of the front handles and crosses the
obstacle, maintaining a low silhouette.
(4) Bearer numbers 1, 3, and 4 advance the litter until bearer number 2 can resume his
or her grip of the front handles.
(5) The litter is rested on the obstacle with the stirrups placed on the side of the
obstacle in the direction of travel.
(6) Bearer numbers 2 and 3 support the litter by the front and rear handles,
respectively.
(7) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 cross the obstacle, maintaining a low silhouette.
(8) After crossing the obstacle, bearer numbers 1 and 4 grasps the litter poles near the
rear handles held by bearer number 3.
(9) Bearer number 3 releases his or her grip of the rear handles and crosses the
obstacle, maintaining a low silhouette.
(10) After crossing the obstacle, bearer number 3 resumes his or her grasp on the rear
handles.
(11) Bearer numbers 1 and 4 adjust the position of their holds.
(12) All four bearers resume the 4-person carry.
h. Transport a casualty across a trench obstacle or stream.
(1) Upon reaching the trench or stream, bearer number 1 instructs another bearer to
clear any debris or obstacles immediately before the trench, at the trench, and
beyond the trench, and to check for booby traps.
(2) From the 4-person carry position, bearer number 1 gives the command “Overhead
Carry, MOVE.”
(3)
(4)
The bearers turn and face the litter.
T
Together, the squad lifts the litter above the top of the trench, keeping it level.
AF
(5) The taller bearer at each end of the litter moves between the handles, facing in the
direction of travel.
NOTE: If unable to determine which bearer is taller, bearer number 1 will designate a bearer at each end as the
tallest.
R
(6) The taller bearer at each end grasps the handles as close to the canvas as
possible.
D
(7) The shorter bearer at each end moves under the litter, facing in the direction of
travel.
(8) The shorter bearer at each end grasps the stirrups, which compensates for the
difference in height. If the bearers are of equal height, the bearers under the litter
grasp the litter poles to the side of the stirrups nearer the ends.
(9) The four bearers proceed through the obstacle completely in the overhead carry
position.
position.
i. Transport a casualty through a window or from the roof of a building.
j. Transport a casualty using an improvised litter.
NOTE: The candidate will choose the type of improvised litter based on the available equipment to construct the
improvised litter (i.e., poncho, jackets, door).
(1) Use a poncho, poncho liner, or blanket and two poles or limbs.
(a) Open the poncho, poncho liner, or blanket and lay the two poles lengthwise across
the center, forming three equal sections.
(b) Reach in, pull the hood up toward you, and lay it flat on the poncho, if used.
(c) Fold one section of the poncho, poncho liner, or blanket over the first pole.
B-3-32
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(d) Fold the remaining section of the poncho, poncho liner, or blanket over the second
pole to the first pole.
(2) Use shirts or jackets and two poles or limbs.
(a) Button two or three shirts or jackets and turn them inside out, leaving the sleeves
inside.
(b) Lay the shirts or jackets on the ground and pass the poles through the sleeves.
(3) Use a door or any other material that may be used as an improvised litter.
(4) Place the casualty on the litter.
(5) Lift the litter and transport the casualty.

7. Evacuate each casualty to a directed location with the assistance of three bearers.
8. Perform all performance steps/measures without causing further injury to the casualties.
T
AF
R
D

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, EVAC, EVACUATE CASUALTIES USING LITTER CARRIES, DEC 06
B-3-33
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
B-3-34
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — ASSEMBLE AND OPERATE A SINCGARS (ASIP) WITHOUT ANCD
TASK: ASSEMBLE AND OPERATE A SINCGARS (ASIP) WITHOUT ANCD.

CONDITIONS: Given a SINCGARS radio (AN/PRC-119E/F), handset, antenna base, whip antenna, a battery, an
operating frequency, a call sign, and the receiving station's call sign.
STANDARDS: Assembled the radio, set the operating frequency for single channel unsecured operation, and
performed a radio check within 5 minutes.
1. Install battery.
2. Screw whip antenna into antenna base, hand tight.
3. Screw antenna base into “RT ANT” connector, hand tight.
4. Connect handset connector to “AUD/DATA” connector.
5. Set “MODE” to “SC” via “MENU” key.
6. Set “FCTN” to “TST,” should read “GOOD.”
7. Set “CHAN” to desired channel via “MENU” key.
8. Set “FCTN” to “LD.”
9. Press “FREQ,” then “CLR” on the keypad. T
10. Enter the frequency given and press “STO” on the keypad.
AF
11. Set “RF PWR” to desired setting (“LO,” “M,” “HI”) via “MENU” key.
12. Set “FCTN” to “SQ ON.”
13. Perform a radio check using correct radio procedure and prowords.
14. Complete all performance steps/measures within 5 minutes.
R
EVALUATOR WRITES: TIME REQUIRED TO PERFORM TASK:

D
LANE OIC/NCOIC INITIALS EVALUATOR’S SIGNATURE DATE
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, ASSEMBLE AND OPERATE A SINCGARS (ASIP) WITHOUT ANCD, DEC 06
B-4-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — ASSEMBLE AND OPERATE A SINCGARS WITHOUT ANCD
TASK: ASSEMBLE AND OPERATE A SINCGARS WITHOUT ANCD.

CONDITIONS: Given a SINCGARS radio (AN/PRC-119A/B), handset, antenna base, whip antenna, a battery, an
operating frequency, a call sign, and the receiving station's call sign.
STANDARDS: Assembled the radio, set the operating frequency for single channel unsecured operation, and
performed a radio check within 5 minutes.
1. Install battery.
2. Screw whip antenna into antenna base, hand tight.
3. Screw antenna base into “RT ANT” connector, hand tight.
4. Connect handset connector to “AUD/DATA” connector.
5. Set “MODE” to “SC,” “CHAN” to position “1,” “COMSEC” to “PT,” and “PWR” to desired
setting.
6. Set “FCTN” to “TST,” should read “GOOD.”
8. Press “FREQ,” then “CLR” on the keypad. T
9. Enter the given frequency and press “STO” on the keypad.
AF
10. Set the “FCTN” to “SQ ON.”
11. Perform a radio check using correct radio procedure and prowords.
12. Complete all performance measures within 5 minutes.
R

D
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, ASSEMBLE AND OPERATE A SINCGARS WITHOUT ANCD, DEC 06
B-4-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — LOAD FH/COMSEC DATA AND CONDUCT RADIO CHECK USING SINCGARS (ASIP)
#
TASK: LOAD FH/COMSEC DATA AND CONDUCT RADIO CHECK USING SINCGARS (ASIP).
CONDITIONS: Given a SINCGARS radio (AN/PRC-119E/F) with components, a battery, an ANCD (AN/CYZ-10)
loaded with signal operation instructions (SOI) and FH/COMSEC data and a W-4 cable, an operating frequency, a call
sign, and the receiving station's call sign.
STANDARDS: Loaded radio for single channel secure operations and completed a radio check within 10 minutes.
1. Set “FCTN” to “TST.” Wait for "GOOD" on display.
NOTE: Steps 1 and 2 may be skipped if this task is performed after “Assemble and Operate a SINCGARS (ASIP)
Without ANCD” task.
3. Set “COMSEC” to “CT” via “MENU” key.
4. Set “MODE” to “FH” via “MENU” key.
5. Press handset twice to clear audio alarm in handset to solid tone.
6. Turn “ANCD” on and enter “RADIO” at the main menu.
7. Press “Enter” for “Send-Radio-Icom” at next three screens.
T
8. Follow guidance for next two steps by down arrow.
AF
9. Enter “Y” at the menu (time), then press “LOAD” on the “RT.”
10. Set “CHAN” to desired channel via “MENU” key.
11. Press “FREQ,” then “CLR” on the keypad.
R
13. Set “RF PWR” to desired setting (“LO”, “M”, or “HI”).
D

15. Conduct radio check using proper procedures and prowords.
16. Complete all required performance measures within 10 minutes.
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, FH/COMSEC DATA AND CONDUCT RADIO CHECK USING SINCGARS (ASIP), DEC 06
B-4-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — LOAD FH/COMSEC DATA AND CONDUCT RADIO CHECK USING SINCGARS
TASK: LOAD FH/COMSEC DATA AND CONDUCT RADIO CHECK USING SINCGARS.
CONDITIONS: Given a SINCGARS radio (AN/PRC-119A/B) with components, a battery, an ANCD (AN/CYZ-10)
loaded with SOI and FH/COMSEC data and a W-4 cable, an operating frequency, a call sign, and the receiving
station's call sign.
STANDARDS: Loaded radio for single channel secure operations and completed a radio check within 10 minutes.
1. Set “FCTN” to “TST.” Wait for "GOOD" on display.
NOTE: Steps 1 and 2 may be skipped if this task is performed after “Assemble and Operate a SINCGARS Without
ANCD” task.
3. Set “COMSEC” to “CT.”
4. Set “MODE” to “FH.”
5. Press handset twice to clear audio alarm in handset to solid tone.
6. Turn ANCD on and enter “RADIO” at the main menu.
7. Press “Enter” for “Send-Radio-Icom” at next three screens.
T
8. Follow guidance for next two steps by down arrow.
AF
9. Enter “Y” at the menu (time), then press “LOAD” on the “RT.”
10. Set “CHAN” to desired position.
11. Press “FREQ,” then “CLR” on the keypad.
R
13. Set “RF PWR” to desired setting (“LO”, “M”, or “HI”).

D

15. Conduct radio check using proper procedures and prowords.
16. Complete all required performance measures within 10 minutes.
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, FH/COMSEC DATA AND CONDUCT RADIO CHECK USING SINCGARS, DEC 06
B-4-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — PREPARE AND TRANSMIT A MEDEVAC REQUEST (USING SECURE MODE RADIO)
“MANDATORY GO”
TASK: PREPARE AND TRANSMIT A MEDEVAC REQUEST (USING SECURE MODE RADIO).
CONDITIONS: Given three or four treated casualties (a minimum of one has a life threatening injury), GTA 08-01-
004, a secure mode of communication (SINCGARS with secure fill loaded to operate in CT, FH), frequencies and call
signs of candidate’s unit and MEDEVAC unit, and the information required to complete GTA 08-01-004.
STANDARDS: Collected all applicable information and prioritized casualties. Transmitted lines 1 through 9 using
proper radio procedures and prowords. Completed all performance steps/measures within 5 minutes.
NOTE: Prior to beginning this task, the evaluator will have the candidate state their rank, name, and last four of their
social security number into a tape recorder. The evaluator will begin recording the task when the candidate is almost
ready to begin transmitting the MEDEVAC request and will stop recording after the proword “OVER” following line 9.
1. Collect all applicable information needed for the MEDEVAC request line items one through
nine.
a. Obtain the grid coordinates for the pickup site.
b. Obtain radio frequency, call sign, and suffix.
c. Determine the number of patients and precedence.
d. Determine the type of special equipment required.

T
NOTE: Casualties are prioritized IAW Medical Evacuation precedences as listed in Chapter 4, Table 4-2.
AF
e. Determine the number and type (litter or ambulatory) of patients.
f. Determine the security of the pickup site.
g. Determine how the pickup site will be marked.
R
h. Determine patient nationality and status.

i. Obtain pickup site CBRN contamination information normally obtained from the senior
D
person or medic.
NOTE: Information for steps 1a, 1b, and 1i will be provided to the candidate during the OPORD, FRAGO, or scenario
brief. Information for steps 1c through 1h must be determined by the candidate during testing of the task.
2. Record the gathered MEDEVAC information using the authorized brevity codes (GTA 08-01-
004).
a. Location of pickup site (line 1).
b. Radio frequency, call sign, and suffix (line 2).
c. Number of patients by precedence (line 3).
d. Special equipment required (line 4).
e. Number of patients by type (line 5).
f. Security of pickup site (line 6).
g. Method of marking pickup site (line 7).
h. Patient nationality and status (line 8).
i. CBRN contamination (line 9).
3. Transmit the MEDEVAC Request.
a. Contact the unit that controls the evacuation assets.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes it is recommended that the evaluator be the evacuation asset unit. Actually
transmitting the MEDEVAC over the net is NOT recommended for EFMB testing.
(1) Load the correct frequency of the evacuation asset unit into the SINCGARS.
B-4-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: The SINCGARS will be assembled and operational. The following are the only steps the candidate is
required to perform in preparing the SINCGARS for transmitting the MEDEVAC request. The host unit may elect to
have the evacuation asset’s frequency preloaded on one of the channels. However, it is the candidate’s responsibility
to ensure that channel is selected when transmitting the MEDEVAC request. Failure to load the correct frequency
and contact the calling station will constitute a NO-GO.
(a) Set “CHAN” to desired channel via “MENU” key.
(b) Press “FREQ,” then “CLR” on the keypad.
(c) Enter the frequency given and press “STO” on the keypad.
(2) Make proper contact with the intended receiver.
(3) Use effective call sign and frequency assignments from the scenario.
(4) Give the following in the clear "I HAVE A MEDEVAC REQUEST;" wait 1 to 3
seconds for response. If no response, repeat the statement.
b. Transmit the correct information for lines 1 through 9 of the MEDEVAC request in
the proper sequence.
NOTE: Line numbers 1 through 5 must always be transmitted during the initial contact with the evacuation unit.
Lines 6 through 9 may be transmitted while the aircraft or vehicle is en route or immediately following lines 1 through
9.
(1) Transmit using proper radio procedures, prowords, and letter and numeral
pronunciation.
(2) The proword “BREAK” must be given between each patient category in line 3 and
between each patient type in line 5.
(3) Correct brevity codes must be utilized for the applicable lines of the MEDEVAC
request.
EVALUATOR WRITES: TIME REQUIRED TO PERFORM TASK: T
NOTE: The 5-minute time limit ends when the candidate completes line 9 with the proword “OVER.”
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, PREPARE AND TRANSMIT A MEDEVAC REQUEST (USING SECURE MODE RADIO), DEC
06
B-4-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — SUBMIT CBRN 1 REPORT
TASK: SUBMIT CBRN 1 REPORT.

CONDITIONS: A CBRN attack has just occurred in your area. You have a watch, map, compass, protractor, pencil or
pen, paper, and the CBRN report format guide (GTA 03-06-08).
STANDARDS: Submitted Spot Report to give attack notification. Submitted CBRN 1 Report using the correct format
and content within 10 minutes.
1. After protecting yourself from a CBRN attack, record and submit a Spot Report immediately
using the S-A-L-U-T-E format.
NOTE: The purpose of the Spot Report is to give immediate notification of the CBRN attack. The Spot Report is a
report containing information for which speed of transmission is essential. A spot report does not have a prescribed
format, but use of the S-A-L-U-T-E format will ensure reporting of essential information.
a. Identify enemy activity. Determine whether observed activity is friendly or enemy. If
unable to make determination, report activity as unknown.
b. Record information in a Spot Report, using the S-A-L-U-T-E format. The Spot Report is
a report containing information for which speed of transmission is essential.
(1) S - Size. Report the number of personnel, vehicles, aircraft, or size of an object.
T
(2) A - Activity. Report detailed account of actions, such as, direction of movement, troops
digging in, artillery fire, type of attack, and CBRN activity.
AF
(3) L - Location. Report where you saw the activity. Include grid coordinates or reference
from a known point including the distance and direction from the known point.
(4) U - Unit. Report the enemy's unit. If the unit is unknown, report any distinctive features,
such as uniforms, patches or colored tabs, headgear, and vehicle identification
R
markings.
(5) T - Time. Report the time the activity was observed, not the time you report it. Always
D
report local or Zulu time.

(6) E - Equipment. Report all equipment associated with the activity, such as weapons,
vehicles, tools. If unable to identify the equipment, provide as much detail as you can so
that higher headquarters can make identification.
c. Remarks. Include any information not included in the S-A-L-U-T-E format.
d. Provide a written Spot Report to chain of command (evaluator for testing purposes).
2. Submit CBRN 1 (Observer's) Report after you have gathered available data.
a. Fill out required information as outlined in GTA 03-06-008.
(1) Line B. Location of observer (use grid coordinates or place name).
(2) Line D. Date-time group of the attack (specify local or Zulu time).
(3) Line H. Type and height of burst (if nuclear) or type of agent and persistency (if
chemical or biological).
(4) Either Line C (direction of attack in mils or degrees from the observer) or Line F
(location of attack - grid coordinates or place name).
b. Select proper communication precedence.
(1) If this is the first attack of its type (first nuclear, first biological, or first chemical) use
FLASH precedence. FLASH precedence is used to report first use of CBRN weapons
against U.S. troops.
NOTE: FLASH reports should not be delayed for lack of any of the information.
(2) Use IMMEDIATE precedence for all other attacks.
c. Submit CBRN 1 Report to higher headquarters (evaluator for testing purposes).
B-4-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10


INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, SUBMIT CBRN 1 REPORT, DEC 06

T
AF
R
D
B-4-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

COMMO — SUBMIT EXPLOSIVE HAZARD SPOT REPORT
TASK: SUBMIT EXPLOSIVE HAZARD SPOT REPORT.

CONDITIONS: An UXO or IED hazard has been observed in your area. You have a watch, map, compass,
protractor, pencil or pen, paper, and the 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report format guide (GTA 09-12-001).
STANDARDS: Submitted 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report using the correct format and content within 5
minutes.
1. After taking protective measures from a UXO or IED hazard, record and submit a written 9 line
explosive hazard spot report.
a. Gather and record information in a standard 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report
format.
(1) Line 1: Date and time of the fall, impact, or finding of the UXO/IED item(s).
(2) Line 2: The exact location of item(s) grid coordinate (8-digit minimum)
including landmarks, reference points, or street addresses.
(3) Line 3: The name and organization of person reporting the incident including radio
frequency and call sign or phone number.
(4) Line 4: Identify UXO by type (dropped, projected, thrown, placed) and subgroup.
T
(5) Line 5: NBC contamination: Yes or No, known or suspected NBC contamination. If
yes, report type of agent if known or identified.
AF
(6) Line 6: What resources are threatened?
(7) Line 7: How the UXO has affected unit mission?
(8) Line 8: The safety/protective measures that have been taken including the
R
evacuation distances that have been accomplished.

(9) Line 9: The requested priority for receiving EOD support (Immediate, indirect, minor,
D
or no threat).
b. Provide a written 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report to higher headquarters
(evaluator for testing purposes).
NOTE: Be prepared to provide a guide to the EOD team.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, COMMO, SUBMIT EXPLOSIVE HAZARD SPOT REPORT, DEC 06
B-4-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
B-4-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION USING YOUR
ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE MASK WITH JSLIST MOPP GEAR
TASK: PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION USING YOUR ASSIGNED

PROTECTIVE MASK WITH JSLIST MOPP GEAR.
CONDITIONS: Given your assigned protective mask and carrier.
STANDARDS: Don, clear, and check your mask within 9 seconds.
1. Don the mask as quickly as possible.
NOTE: Time begins when candidate begins any step/measure listed below.
a. Stop breathing and close your eyes.
b. Remove your helmet.
(1) If you have the M17-, M24-, M25-, M40-, M43-, or M45-series protective mask, put your
helmet between your legs (above your knees) or hold your rifle between your legs and
place your helmet on the muzzle. If you drop your helmet, continue to mask.
(2) If you have the M42-series protective mask, remove your helmet and place it in a
convenient location. Avoid placing it on a contaminated surface if possible.
WARNING: DO NOT WEAR CONTACT LENSES WITH THE PROTECTIVE MASK. REMOVE CONTACT LENSES
T
WHEN THE USE OF CHEMICAL AGENTS IS IMMINENT.
c. Take off your glasses, if applicable.
AF
d. Open the mask carrier with one hand.
e. Grasp the mask assembly with your other hand and remove it from the carrier.
f. Put your chin in the chin pocket and press the facepiece snugly against your face.
R
NOTE: The temple and forehead straps have already been adjusted during fitting.
D
g. Grasp the tab and pull the head harness over your head. Ensure that your ears are
between the temple straps and the cheek straps. Ensure that the head harness is
pulled far enough over so that the forehead straps are tight.
h. Use one hand to tighten the cheek straps, one at a time, while holding the head pad
centered on the back of your head with the other hand. Ensure that the straps lay flat
against your head.
2. Clear the mask.
a. Seal the outlet valve by pushing in on the center of the outlet valve cover with one
b. Blow out hard to ensure that any contaminated air is forced out around the edges of the
facepiece.
3. Check the mask.
a. Cover the inlet port of the filter canister (M40- and M45-series) or the inlet port of the
armor quick disconnect (M42-series) with the palm of your hand and breathe in.
b. Ensure that the facepiece collapses against your face and remains so while you hold
your breath (indicates that the mask is airtight).
c. Remove any hair, clothing, or other matter between your face and the mask if the
facepiece does not collapse to your face.
4. Complete steps 1 through 3 within 9 seconds.
EVALUATOR WRITES: CANDIDATE’S TIME FOR DONNING THE MASK:
5. Resume breathing.
6. Close the mask carrier and continue your mission.
7. Correctly perform all applicable performance steps/measures in sequence without becoming a
casualty.
B-5-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10


OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION USING
YOUR ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE MASK WITH JSLIST MOPP GEAR, DEC 06
T
AF
R
D
B-5-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION USING YOUR
ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE MASK
TASK: PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION USING YOUR ASSIGNED

PROTECTIVE MASK.
CONDITIONS: Given your assigned protective mask with hood and carrier.
STANDARDS: Don, clear, and check your mask within 9 seconds.

1. Don the mask as quickly as possible.
a. Stop breathing and close your eyes.
b. Remove your helmet.
(1) If you have the M17-, M24-, M25-, M40-, M43-, or M45-series protective mask, put
your helmet between your legs (above your knees) or hold your rifle between your
legs and place your helmet on the muzzle. If you drop your helmet, continue to mask.
(2) If you have the M42-series protective mask, remove your helmet and place it in a
T
convenient location. Avoid placing it on a contaminated surface if possible.
WARNING: DO NOT WEAR CONTACT LENSES WITH THE PROTECTIVE MASK. REMOVE CONTACT LENSES
AF
WHEN THE USE OF CHEMICAL AGENTS IS IMMINENT.
c. Take off your glasses, if applicable.
d. Open the mask carrier with one hand.
R
e. Grasp the mask assembly with your other hand and remove it from the carrier.
f. Put your chin in the chin pocket and press the facepiece snugly against your face.
D
NOTE: The temple and forehead straps have already been adjusted during fitting.
g. Grasp the tab and pull the head harness over your head. Ensure that your ears are
between the temple straps and the cheek straps. Ensure that the head harness is
pulled far enough over so that the forehead straps are tight.
h. Use one hand to tighten the cheek straps, one at a time, while holding the head pad
centered on the back of your head with the other hand. Ensure that the straps lay flat
against your head.
2. Clear the mask.
a. Seal the outlet valve by pushing in on the center of the outlet valve cover with one
hand.
b. Blow out hard to ensure that any contaminated air is forced out around the edges of
the facepiece.
3. Check the mask.
a. Cover the inlet port of the filter canister (M40- and M45-series) or the inlet port of the
armor quick disconnect (M42-series) with the palm of your hand and breathe in.
b. Ensure that the facepiece collapses against your face and remains so while you hold
your breath (indicates that the mask is airtight).
c. Remove any hair, clothing, or other matter between your face and the mask if the
facepiece does not collapse to your face.
4. Complete steps 1 through 3 within 9 seconds.
EVALUATOR WRITES: CANDIDATE’S TIME FOR DONNING THE MASK:
5. Resume breathing.
6. Secure the mask hood.
B-5-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTE: There are no time standards for donning the hood.

CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN PULLING ON THE HOOD, BECAUSE IT COULD SNAG ON THE BUCKLES OF
THE HEAD HARNESS AND TEAR
a. If you have the M17-, M25-, M42-, or M43-series protective mask, pull the hood over
your head and zip the front closed to cover all bare skin.
b. If you have the M24- or M45-series protective mask, pull the M7 hood over your
helmet and head so that it covers your shoulders.
c. If you have the M40-series protective mask, don the hood so that it lies smoothly on
your head.
(1) For masks equipped with the regular hood—
(a) Grasp the back edge of the hood skirt.
(b) Pull the hood completely over your head so that it covers the back of your head,
neck, and shoulders.
(c) Zip the front of the hood closed by pulling the zipper slider downward.
(d) Tighten the drawcord.
(e) Secure the underarm straps by fastening and adjusting them.
(f) Put on your helmet. If you have a combat vehicle crewman (CVC) helmet—
(i) Disconnect the boom microphone from the helmet.
(ii) Connect the mask microphone to the receptacle in the helmet.
(iii) Grasp the helmet next to the ear cups, with your hand spread as far as
possible.
(iv) Place the helmet over your head, tilting the helmet forward slightly so that the
(v)
T
first contact when putting it on is with the forehead surface of the mask.
Rotate the helmet back and down over your head until it is seated in position.
AF
(2) For masks equipped with the quick-doff hood—
(a) Place your hands inside the hood and expand the elastic gathering around the
neck of the hood.
R
(b) Stretch and carefully pull the hood over your head so that the hood covers your
head, neck, and shoulders.
D
(c) Fasten and adjust the underarm straps.

(d) Put on your helmet (see above for the CVC helmet).
7. Close the mask carrier and continue your mission.
8. Perform all applicable performance steps/measures in sequence without becoming a
casualty.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION USING
YOUR ASSIGNED PROTECTIVE MASK, DEC 06
B-5-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — DECONTAMINATE YOURSELF USING CHEMICAL DECONTAMINATING KITS
TASK: DECONTAMINATE YOURSELF USING CHEMICAL DECONTAMINATING KITS.

CONDITIONS: You are in mask only, with remaining assigned MOPP gear available. You have a full canteen of
water, M8 detector paper, and M291 skin decontaminating kit (SDK). Your skin and eyes are contaminated.
STANDARDS: Decontaminate all exposed skin and your eyes within 5 minutes.
1. Decontaminate your skin using the M291 SDK.
a. Remove one decontaminating packet from the M291 SDK.
b. Tear packet open at notch. Remove packet, fully unfold applicator pad, and slip
fingers into handle.
c. Scrub skin starting with hands, including back of hand, palm, and fingers.
d. Hold breath, close eyes, and lift the hood and mask away from chin.
e. Continue to hold breath and scrub face.
f. Wipe inside of mask which touches the face, then drop packet to the ground.
h.
g. Reseal, clear, and check mask.
T
Using a second packet, scrub neck and ears and wipe hands.
AF
i. Drop the decontamination packet to the ground.
CAUTION: THE M291 SKIN DECONTAMINATING KIT IS FOR EXTERNAL USE ONLY. KEEP
DECONTAMINATING POWDER OUT OF YOUR EYES, MOUTH, CUTS, AND WOUNDS. IT MAY SLIGHTLY
R
IRRITATE YOUR SKIN OR EYES. USE WATER TO WASH THE TOXIC AGENT OUT OF YOUR EYES, CUTS, OR
WOUNDS. AFTER DECONTAMINATION WITH WATER, COVER ANY EXPOSED CUTS OR WOUNDS WITH
APPROPRIATE FIRST AID WRAP OR BANDAGES BEFORE HANDLING THE DECONTAMINATING PACKAGE.
D
2. Remove chemical agent contamination from the eyes.

a. Remove canteen from load-bearing equipment and open canteen cap.
b. Check canteen mouth for contamination with M8 detector paper.
c. Hold breath.
d. Lift the mask and continue to hold breath.
e. Flush the eyes with water from the canteen, ensuring that the water does not flow
from one eye to the other eye.
f. Reseal, clear, and check the mask.
EVALUATOR WRITES: CANDIDATE’S TIME FOR TASK:

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, DECONTAMINATE YOURSELF USING CHEMICAL DECONTAMINATING KITS,
DEC 06
B-5-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CBRN INJURY/CONTAMINATION WITH JOINT SERVICE
LIGHTWEIGHT INTEGRATED SUIT TECHNOLOGY (JSLIST) CHEMICAL PROTECTIVE ENSEMBLE
TASK: PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CBRN INJURY/CONTAMINATION WITH JOINT SERVICE LIGHTWEIGHT
INTEGRATED SUIT TECHNOLOGY (JSLIST) CHEMICAL PROTECTIVE ENSEMBLE.
CONDITIONS: You are in mask only with remaining assigned JSLIST gear available.
STANDARDS: Achieved mission-oriented protection posture MOPP 4 within 8 minutes by performing all steps in
sequence.
1. Put on JSLIST gear.
a. Don the overgarment trousers.
(1) Extend toes downward and put one leg into the trousers and pull them up; repeat
the procedure for the other leg.
(2) Close the slide fastener and fasten the two fly opening snaps.
(3) Pull the suspenders over the shoulders and fasten the snap couplers. Adjust the
T
suspenders to ensure that the trousers fit comfortably up into the inseam.
NOTE: The trouser length can be adjusted by raising or lowering the suspenders.
AF
(4) Adjust the waistband hook-and-pile fastener tapes for a snug fit.
b. Don the overgarment coat.
(1) Don the coat and close the slide fastener up as far as the chest.
R
(2) Secure the front closure flap hook-and-pile fastener tape up as far as the chest.
(a)
D
Pull the loop out and away from the overgarment coat, and bring it forward
between the legs.
(b) Pull on the loop until the bottom of the coat fits snugly over the trousers.
(3) Pull the bottom of the coat down over the trousers and grasp the loop on the back of
the overgarment coat.
(4) Place the loop over the webbing strip on the front of the coat and fasten the snap on
the webbing strip to keep the loop in place. Adjust the coat retention cord, if
necessary. Tie excessive cord in a bow.
NOTE: Use the coat retention cord loop as stated in 1b(3) and 1b(4) when directed to MOPP 4. At MOPP 1 and 2,
pull the coat retention cord loop through the front of coat, tie the ends in a bow, and secure the bow in the webbing
strip.
c. Don the overboots.
(1) Don the overboots over combat boots, adjust/secure the strap-and-buckle
fasteners.
(2) Pull the trouser legs over the multipurpose overboots (MULO) and secure the hook-
and-pile fastener tapes on each ankle so that they fit snugly around the boot.
NOTE: If the MULO are not available, use black vinyl overboots (BVO) (current rain boot used also for chemical,
biological [CB] protection).
d. Don the hood.
(1) Adjust the head-harness and check for a good seal (according to the TM).
B-5-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Pull the hood over the head and chemical protective mask. Close the slide fastener
completely and secure the closure hook-and-pile fastener tape up as far as the top
of the slide fastener.
(3) Place the edge of hood around the edge of mask and secure the hook-and-pile
fastener tape.
(4) Snap the barrel locks together; squeeze both ends of the barrel lock while pulling
the draw cord, and simultaneously slide the barrel lock up to the chin.
(5) Check the hood seal around the mask to ensure that the hood is positioned properly
and no skin is exposed (if necessary, tie the excess draw cord in a bow).
WARNING: THE BARREL LOCK RELEASE BUTTON MUST FACE AWAY FROM THE USER TO AVOID THE
BARREL LOCK FROM UNFASTENING AND POSSIBLY EXPOSING THE USER TO CONTAMINATION.
e. Don the gloves.
(1) Pull sleeves up the arm.
(2) Don the gloves (and liners if butyl rubber gloves are used).
(3) Pull the cuffs over the gloves and secure the hook-and-pile fastener tape snugly on
each wrist.
2. Correctly perform all applicable performance steps/measures within 8 minutes without
becoming a casualty.
T
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CBRN INJURY/CONTAMINATION WITH JOINT
SERVICE LIGHTWEIGHT INTEGRATED SUIT TECHNOLOGY (JSLIST) CHEMICAL PROTECTIVE ENSEMBLE, DEC 06
B-5-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CBRN INJURY/CONTAMINATION WITH MOPP GEAR
TASK: PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CBRN INJURY/CONTAMINATION WITH MOPP GEAR.

CONDITIONS: You are in mask only with remaining assigned MOPP gear available.
STANDARDS: Perform all steps in sequence and achieve MOPP 4 within 8 minutes.
1. Put on MOPP gear for MOPP 1.
a. Don the trousers.
(1) Put the overgarment trousers on over your normal duty uniform.
(2) Secure the trousers by snapping and zipping them and adjusting the waistband for a
snug fit.
(3) Do not fasten the bottom of the trousers at this time.
b. Don the jacket.
(1) Put on the overgarment jacket.
(2) Zip it up. T
(3) Fasten the snaps/Velcro®.
AF
c. Secure the jacket to the trousers by snapping the three snaps across the back of the
jacket to the trousers.
2. Put on additional MOPP gear (protective overboots) to reach MOPP 2.
a. Put the black or green vinyl overboots on over your leather combat boots, securing
R
them by pulling the rubber bands around the metal buttons.

b. Blouse the overgarment trouser legs over the chemical protective overboots.
D
c. Secure the closures of the overgarment trouser legs (zip and secure Velcro®
closures of the overgarment trouser legs and tie the drawstrings firmly).
3. Put on additional MOPP gear to reach MOPP 4.
a. Secure the MOPP gear by zipping all zippers and closing all closures.
b. Put on the chemical protective gloves (rubber gloves and liners).
c. Pull the elastic cuffs of the overgarment jacket sleeves over the cuffs of the chemical
protective gloves.
4. Correctly perform all applicable performance steps/measures within 8 minutes without
becoming a casualty.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CBRN INJURY/CONTAMINATION WITH MOPP
GEAR, DEC 06
B-5-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PERFORM SELF-AID FOR MILD NERVE AGENT POISONING
TASK: PERFORM SELF-AID FOR MILD NERVE AGENT POISONING.

CONDITIONS: You are wearing your protective mask and MOPP gear (or remaining MOPP gear is available) and
are experiencing mild signs and symptoms of nerve agent poisoning. One set of MARK I nerve agent antidote
autoinjectors or one Antidote Treatment, Nerve Agent, Autoinjectors (ATNAA) is available.
STANDARDS: Correctly identified six of eight signs and symptoms of mild nerve agent poisoning, administered the
antidote to self in the proper sequence, and secured the autoinjector within 5 minutes.
NOTES: 1. The ATNAA system is a nerve agent antidote device that will be used by the Armed Forces. A single
ATNAA delivers both the atropine and pralidoxime chloride (2 PAM Cl). The ATNAA will replace the MARK I when
supplies are exhausted. 2. Nerve agent antidote training aids will be used to train and evaluate this task. Actual
autoinjectors will not be used.
1. Identify mild signs and symptoms of nerve agent poisoning by stating six of the eight to the
evaluator.
EVALUATOR STATES: “NAME SIX OF THE EIGHT SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS OF MILD NERVE AGENT
POISONING.” EVALUATOR WILL INITIAL NEXT TO EACH ONE THAT IS STATED BY THE CANDIDATE.
a. Unexplained runny nose.

T
NOTE: Time begins after the evaluator states the above statement to the candidate.
AF
b. Unexplained sudden headache.
c. Excessive flow of saliva (drooling).
d. Tightness of the chest causing breathing difficulties.
R
e. Difficulty seeing (blurred vision).

D
f. Muscular twitching around area of exposed or contaminated skin.

g. Stomach cramps.
h. Nausea.
2. Administer either the MARK I or ATNAA to self (self-aid).
a. MARK I.
(1) Prepare to administer one atropine injection.
(a) Remove one set of MARK I from your protective mask carrier, from the pocket of
the MOPP suit, or from another location as specified by your unit standing
operating procedure (SOP).
(b) With your nondominant hand, hold the set of injectors by the plastic clip with the
big injector on top.
(c) With your dominant hand, check the injection site in order to avoid buttons and
objects in pockets where injecting. For injections into the thigh, grasp the trouser
cargo pocket and pull forward, clearing possible obstructions from the site.
(d) Grasp the small injector without covering or holding the needle (green) end and
pull it out of the clip with a smooth motion.
(e) Form a fist around the autoinjector with the needle end (green) extending beyond
the little finger end of the fist. Be careful not to inject yourself in the hand.
NOTE: If the injection is accidentally given in the hand, another small injector must be obtained and the injection
given in the proper site.
(f) Place the needle end of the injector against the outer thigh muscle. For injections
into the thigh, grasp the trouser cargo pocket and pull forward, clearing possible
obstructions from the site.
B-5-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
NOTES: 1. The injection may be given in any part of the lateral thigh muscle from about a hand's width above the
knee to a hand's width below the hip joint. 2. Very thin soldiers should give the injection in the upper, outer part of the
buttocks.
WARNING: WHEN INJECTING ANTIDOTE IN THE BUTTOCKS, BE VERY CAREFUL TO INJECT ONLY INTO
THE UPPER, OUTER QUARTER OF THE BUTTOCKS TO AVOID HITTING THE MAJOR NERVE THAT CROSSES
THE BUTTOCKS. HITTING THE NERVE MAY CAUSE PARALYSIS.
(2) Administer the atropine injection.
(a) Push the injector into the muscle with firm, even pressure until it functions.
NOTE: A jabbing motion is not necessary to trigger the activating mechanism.
(b) Hold the injector firmly in place for at least 10 seconds.

(c) Remove the injector from your muscle and carefully place this used injector
between two fingers of the hand holding the plastic clip.
(3) Prepare to administer one 2 PAM Cl injection.
(a) Pull the large injector out of the clip and form a fist around the autoinjector with the
needle end extending beyond the little finger.
(b) Place the needle (black) end of the injector against the injection site.
(4) Administer the 2 PAM Cl injection.
(5) Drop the plastic clip without dropping the used injectors.
(6) Go to step 3, “Secure the used injectors.”
T
b. ATNAA.
AF
(1) Prepare to administer one ATNAA.
(a) Remove one ATNAA from your protective mask carrier, from the pocket of the
MOPP suit, or from another location as specified by your unit SOP.
R
(b) Remove the autoinjector from the pouch.

(c) With your dominant hand, hold the ATNAA in your closed fist with the green needle
D
end extending beyond the little finger in front of you at eye level.
(d) With your nondominant hand, grasp the safety (gray) cap with the thumb and first
two fingers.
CAUTION: DO NOT COVER OR HOLD THE NEEDLE END WITH YOUR HAND, THUMB, OR FINGERS. YOU MAY
ACCIDENTALLY INJECT YOURSELF.
(e) Pull the safety cap off the bottom of the injector with a smooth motion and drop it to
the ground.
(f) With the nondominant hand, check the injection site in order to avoid buttons and
objects in pockets where injecting. For injections into the thigh, grasp the trouser
cargo pocket and pull forward, clearing possible obstructions from the site.
(g) Hold the ATNAA in your closed fist with the green needle end pointing out by your
little finger.
(h) Place the needle end of the injector against the outer thigh muscle.
NOTES: 1. The injection may be given in any part of the lateral thigh muscle from about a hand's width above the
knee to a hand's width below the hip joint. 2. Very thin soldiers should give the injection in the upper, outer part of the
buttocks.
WARNING: WHEN INJECTING ANTIDOTE IN THE BUTTOCKS, BE VERY CAREFUL TO INJECT ONLY INTO
THE UPPER, OUTER QUARTER OF THE BUTTOCKS TO AVOID HITTING THE MAJOR NERVE THAT CROSSES
THE BUTTOCKS. HITTING THE NERVE MAY CAUSE PARALYSIS.
(2) Administer the injection.
NOTE: A jabbing motion is not necessary to trigger the activating mechanism.
B-5-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(c) Remove the injector from your muscle.

3. Secure the used injectors. (The candidate will state steps 3a and 3b to the evaluator. The steps
will not be performed.)
a. Use a hard surface to bend each needle to form a hook without tearing protective gloves
or clothing.
b. Push the needle of each used injector (one at a time) through one of the pocket flaps of
the protective overgarment.
WARNING: IF, WITHIN 5 TO 10 MINUTES AFTER ADMINISTERING THE FIRST SET OF INJECTIONS, YOUR
HEART BEGINS BEATING RAPIDLY AND YOUR MOUTH BECOMES VERY DRY, DO NOT ADMINISTER
ANOTHER SET OF INJECTIONS.
NOTE: After you have given yourself the first set of MARK I injections or one ATNAA, you most likely will not need
additional antidote if you are ambulatory and know who and where you are. If needed, only a buddy, a combat
lifesaver, or medical personnel will give additional injections.
4. Correctly perform all performance steps for each performance measure in sequence within 5
minutes.
T
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PERFORM SELF-AID FOR MILD NERVE AGENT POISONING, DEC 06
B-5-11
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL INJURY/CONTAMINATION
WHEN REMOVING MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE USING JOINT SERVICE LIGHTWEIGHT
INTEGRATED SUIT TECHNOLOGY (JSLIST)
TASK: PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL INJURY/CONTAMINATION WHEN

REMOVING MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE USING JOINT SERVICE LIGHTWEIGHT
INTEGRATED SUIT TECHNOLOGY (JSLIST).
CONDITIONS: You are in MOPP 4 with individual gear. Your MOPP gear is contaminated. Your Buddy is in
MOPP 4 that is contaminated and is available for MOPP (JSLIST) gear removal. You have your M291 SDK and your
Buddy has M295 IEDK.
STANDARDS: Decontaminated individual gear and equipment without spreading contamination and place it on an
uncontaminated surface. Removed your Buddy’s overgarments, overboots, and gloves. Completed all steps without
spreading the contamination within 20 minutes.
1. Decontaminate your individual gear without assistance.
NOTE: If at any time during the technique it is suspected that contamination is spread onto the skin or
T
undergarments, decontaminate immediately with the available personal decontamination kit. Then proceed with the
MOPP gear exchange.
AF
a. Remove and discard the chemical protective helmet cover.
NOTE: Weapon will be cleared and placed on safe prior to decontamination.
R
b. Cover the gear with the M295 IEDK.

c. Brush or rub into the material.
D
d. Shake the excess off gently.

e. Set the gear aside on an uncontaminated surface (such as, as poncho, a canvas, or
similar material).
2. Prepare for decontamination.
a. Candidate—
(1) Removes Buddy’s M9 paper; unties the bow in the coat retention cord, if tied; unfastens
the webbing strip snap at the bottom front of the coat; and releases the waistcoat
retention cord loop.
(2) Loosens the bottom of the coat by pulling the material away from the body.
(3) Feels for the suspender snap couplers on the outside of the coat and releases the snap
couplers.
(4) Unfastens the hook and pile fasteners at the wrist and ankles and refasten loosely.
(5) Unfasten the two strap and buckle fasteners on the multipurpose overboots (MULO)
and unfasten or cut the fasteners on the black vinyl overboots (BVO) or untie/cut the
laces on the chemical protective overboots.
3. Decontaminate the mask and hood.
a. Candidate- Chemical and biological contamination.
(1) Uses M295 to decontaminate the exposed parts of the mask, instructs the Buddy to put
two fingers on the voicemitter to avoid breaking the seal.
(2) Starts at the eyelens outserts, and wipes all exposed parts of the mask.
(3) Wipes the front edge of the hood including the barrel locks and fasteners under your
Buddy’s chin.
(4) Decontaminates his (candidate’s) gloves in preparation to release the hood seal.
B-5-12
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
4. Doff the chemical protective coat.

a. Candidate—
(1) Unties the draw cord, if tied; presses the barrel lock release; and unsnaps the barrel
locks.
NOTE: If the candidate has difficulty grasping the barrel locks, he should instruct the Buddy to use the draw cord to
pull the locks away from the mask, allowing the candidate to grasp and unfasten the locks without touching the hood's
interior.
(2) Unfastens the front closure flap and slides the fastener from the chin to the bottom of
the coat.
(3) Has the Buddy turn around and grasps the hood and rolls it inside out; pulling the hood
off Buddy’s head.
(4) Grasps the coat at the shoulders and instructs the Buddy to make a fist to prevent the
chemical protective gloves from coming off.
(5) The candidate pulls the coat down and away from the Buddy ensuring that the black
part of the coat is not touched.
NOTE: If there is difficulty removing the coat in this manner, pull one arm off at a time.
(6) Lays the coat on the ground, black side up.
CAUTION: BOTH SOLDIERS MUST TAKE CARE TO AVOID CONTAMINATING THE INSIDE SURFACE OF THE
COAT.
NOTE: The Buddy will use the coat later as an uncontaminated surface to stand on.
5. Doff the chemical protective trousers.
a. Candidate-
(1) Unfastens the hook-and-pile fastener tapes at the waistband, unfastens the two front
closure snaps, and opens the fly slide fastener on the front of the trousers.
T
(2) Grasps the trousers at the hips, and pulls them down to the knees.
AF
(3) Has the Buddy lift one leg with foot pointed down, and with a hand on each side, pulls
the trousers in an alternating motion until the soldier can step out of the trouser leg and
repeats the process for the other leg.
(4) Discard the trousers away from the clean area.
R
CAUTION: BOTH SOLDIERS MUST TAKE CARE TO AVOID CONTAMINATING THEIR CLOTHING AND SKIN.
D
6. Doff the chemical protective overboots.

a. Candidate-
(1) Removes the chemical protective overboots while the Buddy is standing with arms up,
shoulder high to avoid contaminating clothing or skin.
NOTE: The Buddy may put a hand on the candidate for balance.
(2) Instruct Buddy to stand next to the coat spread on ground.
(3) Instructs Buddy to remove one overboot by stepping on a heel with one foot while
pulling the other foot upward.
(4) Pulls off the Buddy's overboots one foot at a time, and the Buddy steps directly on the
coat spread on ground as each foot is withdrawn from the overboot.
(5) Discard the overboots away from the clean area.
CAUTION: THE CANDIDATE MUST TAKE CARE TO AVOID TOUCHING THE SOLDIER'S COMBAT BOOTS.
THE BUDDY MUST TAKE CARE TO AVOID LETTING THE COMBAT BOOTS TOUCH THE GROUND.
7. Doff the chemical protective gloves/liners.
a. Candidate-
(1) Hold the fingertips of the gloves and partially slide the hand out.
(2) Hold arms away from the body when both hands are free, and let the gloves drop off,
away from the black side of coat.
(3) Remove the protective glove inserts.
(4) The Buddy discards the soldier's chemical protective gloves and inserts away from the
clean area.
B-5-13
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CAUTION: BOTH SOLDIERS MUST TAKE CARE TO AVOID LETTING THE GLOVES MAKE CONTACT WITH
THE COAT THAT IS SPREAD ON THE GROUND.
8. Remove your Buddy’s MOPP gear without further contaminating self or Buddy.
9. Complete all performance steps/measures within 20 minutes.

OIC/NCOIC T
INITIALS
AF
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PROTECT YOURSELF FROM CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL
INJURY/CONTAMINATION WHEN REMOVING MISSION ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE USING JOINT SERVICE
LIGHTWEIGHT INTEGRATED SUIT TECHNOLOGY (JSLIST), DEC 06
R
D
B-5-14
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BIOLOGICAL OR CHEMICAL INJURY/CONTAMINATION
WHEN REMOVING MOPP GEAR
TASK: PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BIOLOGICAL OR CHEMICAL INJURY/CONTAMINATION WHEN

REMOVING MOPP GEAR.
CONDITIONS: You are in MOPP 4 with individual gear. Your MOPP gear is contaminated. Your Buddy is in MOPP
4 that is contaminated and is available for MOPP gear removal. You have your M291 SDK and your Buddy has M295
IEDK.
STANDARDS: Decontaminate your individual gear and equipment without spreading the contamination and place it
on an uncontaminated surface. Remove your Buddy’s overgarments, overboots, and gloves. Complete all steps
without spreading the contamination within 20 minutes.
1. Decontaminate your individual gear without assistance.
NOTE: If at any time during the technique you suspect you have spread contamination onto your skin or
undergarments, decontaminate immediately with the personal decontaminating kit. Then proceed with the MOPP gear
removal.
a.
T
Cover your gear (weapon, LCE, helmet, mask carrier, and rucksack) with your Buddy’s
M295 IEDK.
AF
NOTE: Weapon will be cleared and placed on safe prior to decontamination.
CAUTION: KEEP DECONTAMINATING POWDER OUT OF EYES, LIPS, CUTS, AND WOUNDS. COVER
EXPOSED CUTS OR WOUNDS WITH APPROPRIATE FIRST AID WRAP OR BANDAGE PRIOR TO HANDLING
THE PACKETS.
R
b. Set your gear aside on an uncontaminated surface.

2. Decontaminate your Buddy’s hood and mask.
D
a. Candidate—
(1) Loosens Buddy's drawcord (except quick-doff hood).
(2) Unattaches Buddy's underarm straps from under his or her arms and places straps
over the shoulders.
(3) Reattaches Buddy's straps to the Velcro® and hook-and-pile patches on the bottom of
his or her hood.
(4) Wipes Buddy's mask eye lens outserts first with M291 SDK.
(5) Wipes Buddy's entire mask from the top of the hood down with M291 SDK.
b. Candidate decontaminates his or her own gloves with the personal decontaminating
kit after Buddy's mask is decontaminated.
3. Roll your Buddy’s hood.
NOTE: For hoods with zippers, leave the zipper closed.
a. Candidate lifts Buddy's hood straight up off his or her shoulders by grasping the
straps.
b. Candidate pulls Buddy's hood over his or her head until most of the back of his or her
head is exposed, but the hood should not be completely over Buddy's face.
c. Candidate tells Buddy to place his or her hand over the voice transmitter, if necessary,
to prevent the mask seal from being broken.
d. Candidate rolls Buddy's hood tightly, starting at the chin and working around the mask
without pulling it completely off the back of his or her head.
4. Remove your Buddy’s jacket.
a. Candidate—
B-5-15
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(1) Unties Buddy's cord.

(2) Unfastens Buddy's snaps/Velcro® on the front of his or her jacket.
(3) Unzips Buddy's jacket.
(4) Unsnaps Buddy's snaps in the back of his or her jacket from his or her overgarment
trousers.
b. Candidate tells Buddy to make a fist.
c. Candidate pulls Buddy's jacket off, turning the jacket inside out.
d. Candidate places Buddy's jacket on the ground nearby with the black side up.
NOTE: Buddy will use the jacket later as an uncontaminated surface to stand on.
5. Remove your Buddy’s trousers.
a. Candidate opens Buddy's trouser cuffs, waist snap, zipper and, if necessary, waist
tabs.
b. Candidate grasps Buddy's trouser leg by the cuff.
c. Candidate tells Buddy to pull his or her legs from the trousers, one leg at a time.
6. Remove your Buddy’s trousers.
a. Candidate tells Buddy to stand next to his or her jacket.
b. Candidate loosens Buddy's overboot strings.
c. Candidate pulls Buddy's overboots off, one at a time.
d. Candidate tells Buddy to step onto his or her jacket as his or her overboots are
removed.
7. Remove your Buddy’s rubber gloves. Candidate helps Buddy remove his or her rubber gloves
and drops the gloves onto the contaminated ground so that the Buddy does not touch the
8.
T
outside of the rubber gloves with his or her bare hands.
Remove your Buddy’s MOPP gear without further contaminating self or Buddy.
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BIOLOGICAL OR CHEMICAL
INJURY/CONTAMINATION WHEN REMOVING MOPP GEAR, DEC 06
B-5-16
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — STORE THE M40-SERIES PROTECTIVE MASK WITHOUT HOOD
TASK: STORE THE M40-SERIES PROTECTIVE MASK WITHOUT HOOD.

CONDITIONS: Given the “ALL CLEAR” signal, remove your protective mask and store it in its carrier.
STANDARDS: Removed protective mask and correctly stored it inside its carrier within 1 minute.
1. Remove protective mask after the "all clear" signal is given.
a. Remove helmet.
b. Loosen the cheek straps.
c. Remove the mask.
d. Replace helmet on head.
e. Remove any moisture that has accumulated on the mask.
2. Store mask.
a.
b.
T
Hold the front of the mask in a horizontal position.
Pull the head harness over the front of the mask.
AF
c. Store the mask inside the carrier with the eye lenses up and facing away from
the body.
d. Close the carrier opening.
R
NOTE: Time ends when candidate closes the mask carrier.

3. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures within 1 minute.
D


INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, STORE THE M40-SERIES PROTECTIVE MASK WITHOUT HOOD, DEC 06
B-5-17
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — STORE THE M40-SERIES PROTECTIVE MASK WITH HOOD
TASK: STORE THE M40-SERIES PROTECTIVE MASK WITH HOOD.

CONDITIONS: Given the “ALL CLEAR” signal, remove your protective mask with hood and store it in its carrier.
STANDARDS: Remove protective mask and correctly store it inside its carrier within 1 minute.
1. Remove protective mask with hood after the "all clear" signal is given.
a. Remove helmet.
b. Unfasten the underarm straps.
c. Loosen the draw cord (except quick-doff hood).
d. Unzip the zipper on the hood (except quick-doff hood).
e. Remove the hood.
f. Loosen the cheek straps.
g. Remove the mask.
h. Replace helmet on head. T
i. Remove any moisture that has accumulated on the hood and mask.
AF
2. Store mask with hood.
a. Hold the front of the mask in a horizontal position.
b. Smooth the hood over the mask.
R
c. Pull the head harness over the front of the mask.

d. Fold the two edges of the hood over the outlet valve to create a “V” in the front of
D
the hood.
e. Store the underarm straps and the cord in the “V.”
f. Fold the “V” upward to cover the eye lenses without letting the hood cover the
chin opening.
g. Store the mask with hood inside the carrier with the eye lenses up and facing
away from the body.
h. Close the carrier opening.
NOTE: Time ends when candidate closes the mask carrier.
3. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures within 1 minute.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, STORE THE M40-SERIES PROTECTIVE MASK WITH HOOD, DEC 06
B-5-18
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON AN M4 OR
M4A1 CARBINE
TASK: DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON AN M4 OR M4A1 CARBINE.

CONDITIONS: Given your assigned M4 OR M4A1 CARBINE and a magazine.
STANDARDS: Cleared, disassembled, assembled, and performed a function check on an M4 OR M4A1 carbine
and ensured that the carbine operated properly with the selector switch in each position within 4 minutes.
1. Clear the carbine prior to disassembling the carbine.
NOTE: The magazine will initially be in the carbine.
a. Remove the magazine.
b. Cock the carbine.
c. Turn the selector to "SAFE" (if applicable).
NOTE: The selector cannot be turned to "SAFE" unless the carbine is cocked.
d. Lock the bolt open.
(1) Pull the charging handle rearward.
T
AF
(2) Press the bottom of the bolt catch.
(3) Allow the bolt to move forward until it engages the bolt catch.
R
(4) Return the charging handle to the forward position.

e. Check the receiver and chamber to ensure that they do not contain ammunition.
D
2. Disassemble the carbine into 13 parts.

NOTE: There is no required sequence for disassembly.
a. Remove the sling.
b. Push the takedown pin as far as it will go and pivot the upper receiver from the lower
receiver.
c. Push the receiver pivot pin.
d. Separate the upper and lower receivers.
e. Pull back the charging handle.
f. Remove the bolt carrier and bolt.
g. Remove the charging handle.
h. Remove the firing pin retaining pin.
i. Put the bolt assembly in the locked position by pushing in the bolt.
j. Remove the firing pin by allowing it to drop out of the rear of the bolt carrier into your
hand.
k. Remove the bolt cam pin by turning it one-quarter turn and lifting it out.
l. Pull the bolt assembly from the carrier.
m. Remove the extractor pin by pushing it out with the firing pin (use care not to
damage the firing pin).
n. Lift out the extractor and spring, taking care that the spring does not separate from
the extractor.
B-5-19
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
o. Release the buffer by pressing the buffer and depressing the retainer.
p. Remove the buffer and action spring separating the buffer from the spring.
3. Assemble the carbine.
NOTE: There is no required sequence for assembly.
a. Insert action spring and buffer.
b. Insert extractor and spring.
c. Push in extractor pin.
d. Slide bolt into carrier.
WARNING: BE SURE THAT THE CAM PIN IS INSTALLED IN THE BOLT GROUP. IF IT IS NOT, THE CARBINE
CAN STILL FIRE AND WILL EXPLODE.
e. Replace bolt cam pin.
f. Drop in and seat firing pin.
g. Pull bolt back.
h. Replace retaining pin.
i. Engage, then push charging handle in part of the way.
j. Slide in bolt carrier group.
k. Push in charging handle and bolt carrier group together.
l. Join upper and lower receivers.
m. Engage receiver pivot pin.
n.
T
Close upper and lower receiver groups. Push in takedown pin.
AF
o. Replace the sling.
p. Insert the magazine.
4. Check an M4 or M4A1 carbine with the selector lever in the “SAFE” position.
R
a. Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it.

b. Place the selector lever in the “SAFE” position.
D
c. Pull the trigger (the hammer should not fall).
5. Check an M4 or M4A1 carbine with the selector lever in the “SEMI” position.
a. Place the selector lever in the “SEMI” position.

b. Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall).
c. Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging handle to the rear
and releasing the charging handle.
d. Release the trigger with a slow, smooth motion until the trigger is fully forward (the
hammer should not fall).
e. Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall).
6. Check an M4A1 carbine with the selector lever in the “AUTO” position.

b. Pull the charging handle to the rear and release it.
c. Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall).
d. Hold the trigger to the rear and cock the weapon.
e. Fully release the trigger then pull it to the rear again; the hammer should not fall.
7. Check an M4 carbine with the selector lever in the “BURST” position.
a. Place the selector lever in the “BURST” position.
B-5-20
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
c. Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall).
d. While holding the trigger to the rear, pull the charging handle to the rear and release
the charging handle.
e. Repeat step 4d two more times.
f. Release the trigger.
g. Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall).
8. Inform the evaluator of any malfunction of the carbine during the function check.
FAILURE
LANE EVALUATOR’S SIGNATURE

T DATE
AF
OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
R
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON AN M4
OR M4A1 CARBINE, DEC 06
D
B-5-21
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON AN M16-
SERIES RIFLE
TASK: DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON AN M16-SERIES RIFLE.

CONDITIONS: Given your assigned M16-series rifle and a magazine.
STANDARDS: Cleared, disassembled, assembled, and performed a function check on an M16-series rifle and
ensured that the rifle operated properly with the selector switch in each position within 4 minutes.
1. Clear the rifle prior to disassembling the rifle.
NOTE: The magazine will initially be in the rifle.
a. Turn the selector to “SAFE” (if applicable).
b. Remove the magazine.
c. Verify the rifle is clear.
2. Disassemble the rifle into 13 parts.
NOTE: There is no required sequence for disassembly. T
a. Remove the sling.
b. Push both takedown pins as far as they will go and separate the upper receiver from
AF
the lower receiver.
c. Pull back the charging handle.
d. Remove the bolt carrier.
R
e. Remove the charging handle.

f. Remove the charging handle.
D
g. Put the bolt assembly in the locked position by pushing in the bolt.
h. Remove the firing pin by allowing it to drop out of the rear of the bolt carrier into your
hand.
i. Remove the bolt cam pin by turning it one-quarter turn and lifting it out.
j. Pull the bolt assembly from the carrier.
k. Remove the extractor pin by pushing it out with the firing pin (use care not to
damage the firing pin).
l. Lift out the extractor and spring, taking care so that the spring does not separate
from the extractor.
m. Release the buffer by pressing the buffer and depressing the retainer.
n. Remove the buffer and action spring separating the buffer from the spring.
o. Do not disassemble the rifle further.
3. Assemble the rifle.
NOTE: There is no required sequence for disassembly.
a. Insert the spring and buffer.
b. Insert the extractor and spring.
c. Push the extractor pin in.
d. Slide the bolt into the carrier until the bolt cam pinhole in both the bolt carrier and
the bolt are aligned.
e. Place the bolt cam pin by putting it in the bolt carrier and turning it one-quarter turn.
B-5-22
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
f. Drop in the firing pin to seat it.

g. Put the firing pin retaining pin in the bolt carrier to seat it.
h. Pull the bolt back.
i. Place the charging handle by engaging it, then pushing the charging handle part of
the way in.
j. Slide the bolt carrier into the upper receiver.
k. Push the charging handle and bolt carrier together in the upper receiver.
l. Join the upper and lower receiver.
m. Engage the receiver pivot pin.
CAUTION: THE SELECTOR LEVER MUST BE ON “SAFE” BEFORE CLOSING THE UPPER RECEIVER.
n. Close the upper and lower receiver groups, seating the takedown pin and ensuring
the selector switch is on "SAFE."
o. Replace the sling.
p. Insert the magazine.
4. Check an M16A1, M16A2, or M16A4 with the selector lever in the "SAFE" position.
b. Place the selector lever in the “SAFE” position.
c. Pull the trigger (the hammer should not fall).
5. Check an M16A1, M16A2, or M16A4 with the selector lever in the “SEMI” position.
a. Place the selector lever in the “SEMI” position.
b.
c.
T
Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall).
Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging handle to the rear
AF
d. Release the trigger with a slow, smooth motion until the trigger is fully forward (the
hammer should not fall).
e. Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall).
R
6. Check an M16A1 with the selector lever in the “AUTO” position.

D
a. Place the selector lever in the “AUTO” position.

c. Pull the trigger holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall).
d. Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging handle to the rear
e. Release the trigger.
f. Pull the trigger (the hammer should not fall).
7. Check an M16A2 or M16A4 with the selector lever in the "BURST" position.
a. Place the selector lever in the "BURST" position.
c. Pull the trigger, holding it to the rear (the hammer should fall).
d. Continue to hold the trigger to the rear while pulling the charging handle to the rear
e. Repeat step 4d two more times.
f. Release the trigger.
g. Pull the trigger (the hammer should fall).
8. Inform the evaluator of any malfunction of the rifle during the function check.

B-5-23
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON AN M16-
SERIES RIFLE, DEC 06
T
AF
R
D
B-5-24
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON A M9 PISTOL
TASK: DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK E AN M9 PISTOL.

CONDITIONS: Given an M9 pistol and a magazine.
STANDARDS: Cleared, disassembled, and assembled an M9 pistol and perform a function check within 3 minutes.
1. Clear the pistol prior to disassembling the pistol.
NOTE: The lever will initially be set in the “FIRE” position and an empty magazine will be in the pistol.
a. Place the safety lever in the “SAFE” position.
b. Hold the pistol in the raised pistol position.
c. Depress the magazine release button; remove the magazine from the pistol.
d. Pull the slide to the rear.
e. Push the slide stop up, locking the slide to the rear.
f. Look into the chamber to ensure that it is empty. T
2. Disassemble the pistol.
AF
a. Depress the slide stop and let the slide go forward.
b. With your right hand, hold the pistol with the muzzle slightly raised.
c. With your forefinger, press the disassembly lever button.
R
d. Rotate the disassembly lever downward until it stops.

e. Pull the slide and barrel assembly forward and remove it from the receiver.
D
f. Slightly compress the recoil spring and spring guide. At the same time, lift them up and
remove them, allowing the recoil spring to stretch slowly.
g. Separate the recoil spring from the spring guide.
h Push in on the locking block plunger while pushing the barrel forward slightly. Lift and
remove the locking block and barrel assembly from the slide.
3. Assemble the pistol.
a. Grasp the slide with the bottom facing up.
b. With the other hand, grasp the barrel assembly with the locking block facing up.
c. Insert the muzzle into the forward end of the slide. At the same time, lower the rear of
the barrel assembly by moving the barrel slightly downward with light thumb pressure.
The barrel will fall into place.
d. Insert the recoil spring guide into the recoil spring.
e. Insert the end of the recoil spring and the recoil spring guide into the recoil spring
housing. At the same time, compress the recoil spring and lower the spring guide until it
is fully seated on the locking block cutaway.
CAUTION: BE SURE THAT THE HAMMER IS UNCOCKED AND FIRING PIN BLOCK LEVER IS IN THE DOWN
POSITION. IF THE HAMMER IS COCKED, CAREFULLY AND MANUALLY LOWER THE HAMMER. DO NOT PULL
THE TRIGGER WHILE PLACING THE SLIDE ONTO THE RECEIVER.
f. Push the firing pin block lever down. Grasp the slide and barrel assembly, with the
sights up and align the slide on the receiver assembly guide rails.
B-5-25
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
g. Push until the rear of the slide is a short distance beyond the rear of the receiver
assembly and hold. At the same time, rotate the disassembly latch lever upward. A click
indicates a positive lock.
4. Perform a function check.
a. Depress the slide stop. Insert an empty magazine into the pistol and ensure that the
magazine catch locks the magazine in place.
b. Retract the slide and release it. The magazine follower should push up on the slide
stop, locking the slide to the rear.
c. Depress the magazine release button allowing the magazine to fall free.
d. Ensure that the decocking/safety lever is in the safe (down) position. Depress the slide
stop allowing the slide to return fully forward. At the same time, the hammer should fall
to the full forward position.
e. Pull and release trigger. Firing pin block should move up and down.
f. Place decocking/safety lever in fire (up) position.
g. Pull trigger to check double action. Hammer should cock and fall.
h. Pull trigger again and hold to rear. Manually retract and release slide while holding
trigger to the rear. Release trigger, click should be heard, hammer should not fall.
i. Pull trigger to check single action. Hammer should fall.
T
AF
R
D

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, DISASSEMBLE, ASSEMBLE, AND PERFORM A FUNCTIONS CHECK ON A M9
PISTOL, DEC 06
B-5-26
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — CORRECT MALFUNCTION OF AN M4 CARBINE OR M16-SERIES RIFLE
TASK: CORRECT MALFUNCTION OF AN M4 CARBINE OR M16-SERIES RIFLE.

CONDITIONS: Given a magazine with at least seven blank rounds and one dummy round and your assigned M4
carbine or M16-series rifle.
STANDARDS: Eliminated the stoppage within 10 seconds when the rifle failed to fire.
1. React to a situation by returning fire and reducing stoppage by applying S-P-O-R-T-S.
NOTE: Time begins when the rifle failed to fire.
NOTE: If your weapon malfunctions, remember S-P-O-R-T-S. This key word will help you remember these actions in
sequence: Slap, Pull, Observe, Release, Tap, Shoot.
a. Slap upward on the magazine to make sure it is properly seated.
b. Pull the charging handle all the way back.
c. Observe the ejection of the case or cartridge. Look into the chamber and check for
obstructions.
d. Release the charging handle to feed a new round into the chamber. Do not ride the
T
charging handle.
AF
e. Tap the forward assist.
f. Shoot. If the rifle still does not fire, inspect it to determine the cause of the stoppage
or malfunction and take appropriate remedial action.
R
2. Perform steps 1a through 1f in sequence.

3. Perform steps 1a through 1f in 10 seconds.
D


INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, CORRECT MALFUNCTION OF AN M4 CARBINE OR M16-SERIES RIFLE, DEC 06
B-5-27
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — MOVE UNDER DIRECT FIRE
TASK: MOVE UNDER DIRECT FIRE.

CONDITIONS: Given a tactical situation where you are coming under direct fire from across varied terrain and are
armed with an M16-series rifle or M4-series carbine with a full magazine of blank rounds.
STANDARDS: Move under direct fire using the correct individual tactical fire and movement techniques that are
dictated by terrain features.
NOTES: 1. Each individual movement technique may be tested on one portion of a lane or throughout the lane
dictated by terrain and man made features and lane flow of tested tasks. 2. Each movement technique will be tested
only one time. 3. The actual distance for each movement technique will be determined by the test board chairperson.
1. Select an individual movement route.
a. Search the terrain to your front for—
(1) A gully, ravine, ditch, or wall at a slight angle to your direction of movement.
NOTE: These features provide cover and concealment when using the low or high crawl.
(2) Hedgerows or a line of thick vegetation.
T
NOTE: These features only provide concealment when using the low or high crawl.
(3) Large trees, rocks, stumps, fallen timber, rubble, vehicle hulks, folds or creases in the
AF
ground.
NOTE: These features provide cover and concealment for use as temporary positions. Use the rush if the area
between them has no concealment.
(4) High grass or weeds.
R
NOTE: These features only provide partial concealment. You may use the rush since the use of the high or low crawl
could reveal your location by the movement of vegetation.
D
b. Select your next position (and the route to it) as one that—
(1) Exposes you to the least enemy fire.
(2) Does not require you to cross in front of other members of your element, masking their
fires.
2. Determine the correct individual movement technique.
a. Select the high crawl when—
(1) The route provides cover and concealment.
(2) Poor visibility reduces enemy observation.
(3) Speed is required, but the terrain and vegetation are suitable only for the low crawl.
b. Select the low crawl when—
(1) The route provides cover or concealment less than 1-foot high.
(2) Visibility provides the enemy good observation.
(3) Speed is not required.
c. Select the rush when—
(1) You must cross open areas.
(2) Time is critical.
3. Use the high crawl.
a. Keep your body off of the ground.
b. Rest your weight on your forearms and lower legs.
B-5-28
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
c. Cradle your weapon in your arms, keeping its muzzle off the ground.
d. Keep your knees well behind your buttocks so it stays low.
e. Move forward by alternately advancing your right elbow and left knee, and left elbow
and right knee.
4. Use the low crawl.
a. Keep your body as flat as possible to the ground.
b. Hold your weapon by grasping the sling at the upper sling swivel, letting the handguard
rest on your forearm and the butt of the weapon drag on the ground, thus keeping the
muzzle off the ground.
c. Move forward by—
(1) Pushing both arms forward while pulling your right leg forward.
(2) Pulling with both arms while pushing with your right leg.
(3) Continuing this push-pull movement until you reach your next position, hanging your
pushing leg frequently to avoid fatigue.
5. Use the rush to move from one covered position to another when enemy fire allows brief
exposure.
a. Move from your firing position by rolling or crawling.
b. Start from the prone position.
c. Select your next position by slowly raising your head.
d. Lower your head while drawing your arms into your body, keeping your elbows down
and pulling your right leg forward.
e. Raise your body in one movement by straightening your arms.
f. Spring to your feet, stepping off with either foot.
T
g. Run to the next position—
(1) Keeping the distance short to avoid accurate enemy fire.
AF
(2) Trying not to stay up any longer than 3 to 5 seconds so that the enemy does not have
time to track you with automatic fire.
h. Plant both feet just before hitting the ground.
R
i. Fall forward by:

(1) Sliding your right hand down to the heel of the butt of your weapon.
D
(2) Breaking your fall with the butt of your weapon.

j. Assume a firing position.
(1) Roll on your side.
(2) Place the butt of your weapon in the hollow of your shoulder.
(3) Roll or crawl to a covered or concealed firing position.
6. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, MOVE UNDER DIRECT FIRE, DEC 06
B-5-29
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — REACT TO INDIRECT FIRE
TASK: REACT TO INDIRECT FIRE.

CONDITIONS: Given a tactical situation where you are coming under indirect fire and are armed with an M16-
series rifle or M4-series carbine with a full magazine of blank rounds.
STANDARDS: React to indirect fire using correct techniques that are dictated by the terrain and enemy activity.
1. Shout "incoming" in a loud, easily recognizable voice.
2. Perform immediate action for indirect fire per your FRAGO. If you have no other instructions,
take the following actions:
a. Look to your leader for additional instructions. If you cannot see your leader, but can
see other team members, follow them.
b. If alone, or if you cannot see your leader or the other team members, run out of the
impact area away from the incoming fire.
c. Remain in your defensive position if it has protection from indirect fire, making no
unnecessary movements that could alert the enemy to your location.
3. Select temporary fighting position.
a.
T
Choose a position that takes advantage of available cover and concealment.
NOTE: Cover gives protection from bullets, fragments of exploding rounds, flame, nuclear effects, and biological and
AF
chemical agents. Cover can also conceal you from enemy observation. Cover can be natural or man-made.
Concealment is anything that hides you from enemy observation. Concealment DOES NOT protect you from enemy
fire. DO NOT think that you are protected from the enemy's fire just because you are concealed. Concealment, like
cover, can also be natural or man-made.
R
b. Choose a position that will allow you to observe and fire around the side of an object
while concealing most of your head and body.
D
c. Choose a position that will allow you to stay low when observing and firing, whenever
possible.
d. Choose a position with a background that does not silhouette you against the
surrounding environment.
4. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures.

OIC/NCOIC
INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, REACT TO INDIRECT FIRE, DEC 06
B-5-30
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — MOVE OVER, THROUGH, OR AROUND OBSTACLES
TASK: MOVE OVER, THROUGH, OR AROUND OBSTACLES.

CONDITIONS: Given a tactical situation with M16 series rifle or M4 series carbine, load-carrying equipment (LCE),
one smoke grenade, wood or grass mats or chicken wire, a grappling hook or simulated devise, wrapping material,
wire cutters (optional), and a buddy (if available).
STANDARDS: Negotiate each obstacle encountered. Retain all your equipment. Avoid becoming a casualty to a
booby trap, UXO, IED, or early warning device. Does not cause injury to self.
1. Cover your advance using smoke when crossing an obstacle.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the candidate will verbalize the use of smoke. If the candidate fails to inform the
evaluator that they would use smoke, it is a No-Go. If enough smoke is available, the evaluator or cadre will deploy
the smoke after the candidate verbalizes its use.
2. Ensure your buddy (if available) is covering you, since obstacles are normally protected by
either fire or observation.
3. Cross barbed wire obstacles.
WARNING: The enemy routinely attaches tripwire-activated mines to barbed wire.
NOTE: The EFMB host unit will select to test the candidates on either crossing over, crossing under, or cutting their
T
way through barbed wire in addition to checking for booby traps or early warning devices.
AF
a. Check barbed wire for booby traps or early warning devices.
(1) Look for booby traps or early warning devices attached to the barbed wire.
(2) Throw a grappling hook or simulated devise with a length of rope attached over the
barbed wire.
R
(3) Pull the rope to set off any booby traps or early warning devices.
b. Cross over barbed wire using wood, grass mats, or chicken wire to protect you from
D
the barbs.
(1) Throw the wood, mat, or chicken wire over the barbed wire.
(2) Cross carefully over the barbed wire, because such a mat or net forms an unstable
path.
c. Cross under barbed wire.
(1) Slide head first on your back under the bottom strands.
(2) Push yourself forward with your shoulders and heels, carrying your weapon lengthwise
on your body and holding the barbed wire with one hand while moving.
(3) Let the barbed wire slide on the weapon to keep the barbed wire from catching on your
clothing and equipment while crossing under the barbed wire.
d. Cut your way through barbed wire.
(1) Leave the top wire in place to reduce the chance that the enemy will discover the gap.
(2) Wrap cloth around the barbed wire between your hands.
(3) Cut partly through the barbed wire.
(4) Bend the barbed wire back and forth quietly until it separates.
(5) Cut only the lower strands.
(6) Cross through the barbed wire.
4. Cross exposed danger areas such as roads, trails, or small streams.
a. Select a point at or near a bend in the road or stream. If possible, select a bend that
has cover and concealment on both sides.
B-5-31
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
b. Crawl up to the edge of the open area.

c. Observe the other side carefully for enemy activity before crossing.
d. Move rapidly, but quietly, across the exposed area.
e. Take cover on the other side.
f. Check the area around you.
5. Cross over a wall.
a. Select a low spot to cross the wall.
b. Observe the other side of the wall to ensure it is clear of obstacles and enemy.
c. Roll quickly over the top of the wall, keeping a low silhouette. Do not go over standing
upright.
d. Take cover immediately and observe for enemy activity.
6. Cover your buddy as he crosses the obstacle, if available.
7. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures without causing further injury to yourself.
T
AF

OIC/NCOIC
R
INITIALS
D
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, MOVE OVER, THROUGH, OR AROUND OBSTACLES, DEC 06
B-5-32
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WARRIOR SKILLS — REACT TO AN UXO OR POSSIBLE IED
TASK: REACT TO AN UXO OR POSSIBLE IED.

CONDITIONS: In a field environment, given an item(s) of simulated unexploded ordnance (UXO) or possible
improvised explosive devise (IED), marking materials, and the 9-line Explosive Hazard Spot Report format guide (GTA
09-12-001).
STANDARDS: Identify UXO by type and subgroup; recognize associated hazards; take immediate action to prevent
death, injury, or damage to materiel; report the UXO hazard using the 9-line explosive hazard spot report (formally the
UXO spot report) or if tested on possible IED, properly establish initial exclusion area, security, and report IED to higher
headquarters using the 9-line explosive hazard spot report.
NOTE: 1. UXO or IED training aid should be placed near personnel, facilities, or equipment (within the candidate's area
of responsibility). Candidate should identify UXO from a distance of 5 to 10 meters away, or through the use of
binoculars. 2. Candidates will receive a “theater specific IED/UXO threat brief” prior to negotiating the lane that this
task will be tested on. This brief may be included in the OPORD, FRAGO, or team brief.
1. React to either a UXO hazard or possible IED.
NOTE: The host unit will choose to evaluate the candidate on either UXO hazard or possible IED.
DANGER: 1. Never approach any closer to a UXO once it has been identified. Approaching UXO may cause them to
T
explode. 2. Never strike, jar, or touch a UXO. Do NOT move or remove anything on or near a suspect UXO. UXO can
be extremely sensitive and can cause serious injury or death if disturbed in any way. 3. Many types of UXO may contain
AF
an incendiary (fire, chemical, biological, or radiological hazard in addition to explosives. 4. Do NOT make radio
transmissions within 100 meters of a UXO. Some types of UXO are sensitive to electro-magnetic radiation (EMR) and
may explode.
a. React to a UXO hazard.
R
(1) Recognize the UXO hazard and identify the applicable type(s) and subgroup(s) of
UXO.
D
(a) Dropped.
(i) Bombs. Vary in length from 3 to 6 feet. Vary in diameter from 5 to 36 inches.
Often have a sloped or "bullet" shaped nose, fins and/or a parachute on the
back. May contain high explosive, incendiary, or chemical fillers.
(ii) Dispensers. Contain numerous submunitions or bomblets. Most have the
same characteristics of bombs. May be found intact or partially open.
NOTE: Dropped dispensers are not listed on GTA 09-12-001 and will not be tested in EFMB.
(iii) Submunitions. Can contain explosive, chemical, biological, radiological, and/or
incendiary. -Designed to be scattered over a wide area. Come in many shapes
and sizes; may or may not be "bullet" shaped. May look like balls, wedges, or
cylinders. May have fins, ribbons, parachutes, or trip wires.
DANGER: When a submunition is identified, leave the area by the same path you entered. There maybe many more in
the same area. Small size does NOT diminish the danger of submunitions, the smallest can easily injure or kill.
(b) Projected.
(i) Projectiles. Includes munitions from large machine guns, artillery howitzers,
and naval guns. Range in size from 20 millimeter up to 16 inches in diameter,
10 to 30 inches in length. Most resemble a "bullet" shape. Can contain
explosive, chemical, biological, radiological, and/or incendiary hazards.
(ii) Mortars. Most have fins and have a "bullet" shape. Range in size from 60 mm
to 120mm in diameter; 12 to 36 inches in length. Can contain explosive,
chemical, and/or incendiary hazards.
B-5-33
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(iii) Rockets. May or may not have fins; have some sort of rocket motor vents in back.
Range in size from 24 inches to several feet in length. Can contain explosive,
chemical, and/or incendiary hazards.
(iv) Guided Missiles. Most have fins; some have wires in the end for guidance. Very
similar to rockets. Can contain explosive or incendiary hazards.
(v) Rifle Grenades. Designed to be fired from rifles or shoulder fired launchers.
Resemble rockets but are of smaller size. Can contain explosive and/or
incendiary hazards.
(c) Thrown. Includes all types of grenades, including simulators. Most are round
or cylindrical in shape; are small enough to be thrown by a person. Can
contain explosive and/or incendiary hazards. Dud simulators require the same
safety procedures as other ordnance.
(d) Placed. Includes all land or sea mines. Range is size from 2 inches in
diameter to several feet in length. Have a variety of fuze types; pressure
plates, tilt rods, trip wires, electronic sensors, or command detonated. Can
contain explosive, incendiary, or chemical hazards.
DANGER: Consider all mines to be booby-trapped or have anti-disturbance fuzing. Never attempt to uncover or remove
placed ordnance.
(2) React to UXO hazard.
(a) Do NOT touch or disturb the UXO or any wires, parachutes, or anything
attached or surrounding the UXO. Do NOT move any closer to UXO. Do NOT
make radio transmissions within 100 meters of a UXO.
(b) If any peculiar smells, liquids, or dead animals are present, chemical or
biological agents maybe present; don mask and MOPP gear immediately.
T
(c) Mark location without approaching closer with some sort of recognizable
material (such as white engineer tape, marking ribbon, clothing, or sign). Place
AF
marker above ground at waist level if possible. Take note of physical terrain
features of location and route back to UXO in order for EOD team to return to
dispose of UXO.
(d) Evacuate personnel and equipment from area surrounding the UXO:
R
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the candidate will verbally inform the evaluator the appropriate evacuation distance.
D
(i) Bombs, dispensers, large projected munitions (90 millimeter diameter and
larger) evacuate a 360-degree perimeter at least 600 meters.
(ii) Submunitions, placed, thrown, small projected munitions (smaller than 90-
milimeter diameter) evacuate a 360-perimeter at least 300 meters.
(e) If personnel or equipment cannot be evacuated, seek as much frontal and
overhead cover as possible.
(f) If UXO is suspected to have a chemical agent, ensure all personnel stay
upwind of item and are in full MOPP.
(3) Report the UXO hazard or possible IED (evaluator for EFMB testing) using 9-line
Explosive Hazard Spot Report format (Evaluated IAW Submit Explosive Hazard Spot
Report task).
NOTE: Place UXO training aid near personnel, facilities, or equipment (within the Soldier's area of responsibility).
Soldier should identify UXO from a distance of 5 to 10 meters away, or through the use of binoculars.
DANGER: To avoid causing an IED to explode: Do NOT attempt to move the IED. Do NOT approach the IED. Avoid
using communication/electronic equipment within established exclusion area.
b. React to a possible IED.
(1) Establish minimum initial exclusion area of 300 meters around possible IED.
NOTE: For EFMB testing purposes, the candidate will verbally inform the evaluator the initial exclusion area and
distance.
WARNING: Adjust exclusion areas based on METT-TC.
B-5-34
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Basic guide to establishing exclusion areas.

T
(a) Do NOT move or approach possible IED.
AF
(b) Do NOT use any communications or electronic devices within initial exclusion
area.
(2) Establish security.
R
(a) Search secure area for possible secondary explosive device(s) / hazards, while
maintaining security.
D
(b) Identify potential enemy force observation/vantage points.

(c) Seek all available manmade or natural frontal and overhead cover.
(d) Avoid establishing a “reaction” pattern.
(3) Forward the information to higher headquarters (evaluator for EFMB testing) using 9-
line Explosive Hazard Spot Report format (Evaluated IAW Submit Explosive Hazard
Spot Report task).
(4) Continue mission in accordance with Higher HQ in accordance with higher
headquarters guidance.
2. Correctly perform all performance steps/measures for either UXO hazard or possible IED.

INITIALS
EFMB SCORE SHEET, WARRIOR SKILLS, REACT TO AN UXO OR POSSIBLE IED, DEC 06
B-5-35
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
B-5-36
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

HANDS-ON TESTING REBUTTAL SHEET
Date: Candidate Number: Rank:
Name:
Task Being Rebutted:

Lane Task Was Tested On:
Evaluator’s Rank and Name:
Reason For Rebuttal:
T
AF
R
D
Candidate’s Signature:
Note: The test board’s decision is final. It may not be appealed to the EFMB TCO.
Test Board Remarks:
Test Board Decision (circle): Approval Disapproval
Date:
Test Board Chairperson’s Signature:
Note: A separate rebuttal form will be completed for each task being rebutted by the candidate. Rebuttal form will be filed in the
candidate’s folder in the EFMB operations center.
B-6-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
B-6-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

WRITTEN TEST EXAMINATION REBUTTAL SHEET
Date: Candidate Number: Rank:
Name:
Written Test Question Number Being Rebutted:

Reason for Rebuttal:
T
AF
Candidate’s Signature:
R
Test Board Remarks:

D
Test Board Decision (circle): Approval Disapproval

Note: If disapproved by the test board, the candidate may appeal to the EFMB TCO. If the candidate wishes to
appeal it to the EFMB TCO, they must be allowed to continue with testing until a decision is made. If approved by the
test board, it may not be overturned, but forwarded to the EFMB TCO for a decision. If the EFMB TCO is on site,
they will render their decision at that time. If not on site, the test board chairperson will contact them for a decision.
Date:
EFMB TCO Decision (circle): Approval Disapproval

EFMB TCO Signature:
Note: A separate rebuttal form will be completed for each question being rebutted by the candidate. Rebuttal form will be filed in
the candidate’s folder in the EFMB operations center.
B-7-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
B-7-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX C
GRAPHIC TRAINING AIDS
C-1. GENERAL.
The various graphic training aids (GTAs) contained within this appendix are also available
at local TASCs and on the AKO General Reimer’s Library.
T
AF
R
D
C-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-1-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-1-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-2-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-2-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-3-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-3-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-3-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
C-3-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX D
REPRODUCIBLE FORMS AND CERTIFICATES
D-1. GENERAL.
The various forms and certificates of verification and destruction contained within this
appendix are designed for EFMB testing and reporting purposes.
T
AF
R
D
D-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
D-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE TESTING STATISTICS
For use of this form, see AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10, the proponent is MCCS-HTE
ADMINISTERING UNIT TESTING LOCATION TESTING DATES
Note: If a candidate failed out of EFMB on a lane on more than one critical performance area, count the candidate as failed on the critical
performance area that they failed out of first.
CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS AND TASKS TESTED PASSED FAILED
ARMY PHYSICAL FITNESS TEST
WEAPONS QUALIFICATION
CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION CERTIFICATION
WRITTEN TEST
FOOT MARCH
LAND NAVIGATION TASKS
a. Navigate from one point to another during the day.
b. Navigate from one point to another during the night.
COMMUNICATION TASKS
a. Assemble and operate a SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP) without ANCD.
b. Load FH/COMSEC data and conduct radio check using SINCGARS or
SINCGARS (ASIP).
c. Prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request.
d. Submit CBRN 1 report.
e. Submit Explosive Hazard Spot Report.
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS T
a. Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination using your assigned
protective mask.
AF
b. Decontaminate yourself using chemical decontaminating kits.
c. Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with MOPP or JSLIST
gear.
d. Perform self -aid for mild nerve agent poisoning.
R
e. Protect yourself from biological or chemical injury/contamination when

removing MOPP or JSLIST gear.
D
f. Store the M40-series protective mask with or without hood.

g. Correct malfunction of an M4 carbine or M16-series rifle.
h. Disassemble, assemble, and perform a function check on a M9 pistol.
i. Move under direct fire.
j. Disassemble, assemble, and perform a functions check an M16-series rifle or
M4/M4A1 carbine.
k. React to indirect fire.
l. Move over, through, or around obstacles.
m. React to an UXO or possible IED.
MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS
a. Establish a helicopter landing point.
b. Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L).
c. Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform (M996, M997, M113, or
M1113 STRYKER MEV).
d. Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (5-Ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2 ½-
Ton M-1081) or (2 ½ -ton, 6x6 or 5-ton, 6x6, cargo truck).
e. Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998).
f. Extricate a casualty from a vehicle with a KED or short spine board.
g. Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter.
h. Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags.
i. Evacuate casualties using two-person carries or drags.
j. Evacuate casualties using litter carries.
AMEDDC&S Form 1200-R, DEC 2006
D-1-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS AND TASKS TESTED PASSED FAILED
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS

a. Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures.
b. Control bleeding using a tourniquet.
c. Control bleeding using a hemostatic device.
d. Triage casualties.
e. Perform a tactical combat casualty assessment.
f. Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent hypothermia.
g. Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion.
h. Insert a nasopharyngeal airway.
i. Treat a penetrating chest wound.
j. Perform needle chest decompression.
k. Treat an open abdominal wound.
l. Control bleeding using dressings.
m. Treat an open head injury.
n. Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye.
o. Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm.
CANDIDATE TOTALS
TOTAL EFMBs AWARDED
T
Was EFMB testing formally validated by the EFMB Test Control Office, AMEDDC&S?
AF
How many hours/days of standardization were provided by the administering unit? Hours/ Days
What was the test number for the EFMB Written Test (listed in top right corner of test)?
R
ILLNESS AND INJURIES INCURRED DURING EFMB

Environmental Heat Injury.
D
Environmental Cold Injury.

Disease (Enteric/URI/Other).
Injury (Other).
Pre-existing Condition.
Treated on Site and RTD.
*Evacuated to Hospital or MTF.
*Comments (Reason for Evacuation, if Returned to Testing, etc) :
TYPED NAME, GRADE, AND BRANCH OF EFMB CHAIRPERSON SIGNATURE DATE (YYYYMMDD)
Reverse of AMEDDC&S Form 1200-R, DEC 2006
D-1-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE QUALIFICATION RECORD
For use of this form, see AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10, the proponent is MCCS-HTE
PRIVACY ACT STATEMENT
AUTHORITY: 5 U.S.C., section 301.
PURPOSE: To award the individual the Expert Field Medical Badge.
ROUTINE USES: To provide the local PAC this information so orders are issued for award of the badge.
MANDATORY OR VOLUNTARY DISCLOSURE AND EFFECT ON INDIVIDUAL NOT PROVIDING INFORMATION: While the individual has the
right to refuse disclosure of his/her Social Security Number, this information is needed to issue the orders. Failure to provide the Social Security
Number may result in denial of the award of the badge.
1. THRU 2. TO 3. FROM
4. NAME (Last, First, MI) 5. GRADE 6. MOS 7. SSN
8. UNIT
CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS TEST TEST DATE CANDIDATE

GO NO-GO
AND TASKS REQUIREMENTS (YYYYMMDD) SCORE
180 POINTS
9. ARMY PHYSICAL FITNESS TEST
(60 PER EVENT)
10. WEAPONS QUALIFICATION MARKSMAN
11. CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION CERTIFICATION CURRENT
12. WRITTEN TEST 75 OF 100
13. LAND NAVIGATION TASKS T
a. Navigate from one point to another during the day. 3 OF 4 POINTS
AF
b. Navigate from one point to another during the night. 3 OF 4 POINTS
14. COMMUNICATION TASKS 4 OF 5 TASKS
a. Assemble and operate a SINCGARS or SINCGARS
(ASIP) without ANCD.
R
b. Load FH/COMSEC data and conduct radio check using

SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP).
D
c. Prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request. MANDATORY GO

d. Submit CBRN 1 report.
e. Submit Explosive Hazard Spot Report.
15. WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS 10 OF 13 TASKS
a. Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination
using your assigned protective mask.
b. Decontaminate yourself using chemical decontaminating
kits.
c. Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with
MOPP or JSLIST gear.
d. Perform self -aid for mild nerve agent poisoning.
e. Protect yourself from biological or chemical
injury/contamination when removing MOPP or JSLIST gear.
f. Store the M40-series protective mask with or without
hood.
g. Correct malfunction of an M4 carbine or M16-series rifle.
h. Disassemble, assemble, and perform a
function check on a M9 pistol.
i. Move under direct fire.
j. Disassemble, assemble, and perform a functions check
an M16-series rifle or M4/M4A1 carbine.
k. React to indirect fire.
l. Move over, through, or around obstacles.
m. React to an UXO or possible IED.
AMEDDC&S FORM 1232-R, DEC 2006

D-2-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS TEST TEST DATE CANDIDATE
GO NO-GO
AND TASKS REQUIREMENTS (YYYYMMDD) SCORE
16. TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS 12 OF 15 TASKS

a. Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures.
b. Control bleeding using a tourniquet.
c. Control bleeding using a hemostatic device.
d. Triage casualties.
e. Perform a tactical combat casualty assessment.
f. Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent
hypothermia.
g. Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion.
h. Insert a nasopharyngeal airway.
i. Treat a penetrating chest wound.
j. Perform needle chest decompression.
k. Treat an open abdominal wound.
l. Control bleeding using dressings.
m. Treat an open head injury.
n. Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye.
o. Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm.
17. MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS 8 OF 10 TASKS
a. Establish a helicopter landing point.
b. Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L).
c. Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform (M996,
M997, M113, or M1113 STRYKER MEV).
T
AF
d. Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle
(5-Ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2 ½-Ton M-1081) or (2 ½ -ton,
6x6 or 5-ton, 6x6, cargo truck).
e. Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4,
M998).
R
f. Extricate a casualty from a vehicle with a KED or short

spine board.
D
g. Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter.

h. Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags.
i. Evacuate casualties using two-person carries or drags.
j. Evacuate casualties using litter carries.
18. FOOT MARCH 3 HOURS
19. QUALIFIED NOT QUALIFIED FOR AWARD OF EFMB (IAW AMEDDC&S PAM 350-10)
20. REMARKS
21. TYPED NAME, GRADE, AND BRANCH OF EFMB CHAIRPERSON 22. SIGNATURE 23. DATE (YYYYMMDD)
REVERSE OF AMEDDC&S FORM 1232-R, DEC 2006
D-2-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CERTIFICATE OF VERIFICATION
EFMB TEST REQUIREMENTS - WRITTEN TEST
Complete and Return
No Later Than 10 Days Prior to EFMB Start Date
The EFMB Written Test, (Number_________), received from the EFMB Test Control Office, AMEDDC&S
has been reviewed by the EFMB Test Board. No further clarification on the EFMB Written Test content is
necessary prior to its administration to the EFMB candidates.
Date Received:
Name/Rank/Organization of EFMB Test Board Chairperson:
EFMB TEST REQUIREMENTS - EVALUATORS
Complete and Return T
No Later Than 5 Days After EFMB Testing Cycle
AF
The EFMB Test Board has verified all EFMB Lane Evaluators. All evaluators are familiar with their
respective tasks and performance steps/measures and can demonstrate hands on performance of all
tasks to standard. Evaluators have all required references on hand for their respective tasks.
R
Date Received:
D
EFMB TEST REQUIREMENTS – LANES AND EQUIPMENT
Complete and Return
The EFMB Test Board has verified all EFMB Lanes. All the EFMB lanes meet all the requirements and
have the proper equipment for testing, per AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10. All equipment is functioning
properly.
Date Received:
D-3-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMB TEST REQUIREMENTS – LAND NAVIGATION
Complete and Return
The EFMB Test Board has verified the location of all the points with a satellite-type navigational system.
The signs at the points are constructed of metal 12 inches by 12 inches, and painted half-white and half-
international orange and have a clearly identifiable unique letter or number. The signs are staked into the
ground so that the bottom of the sign is between 5-7 feet above the ground.
Date Received:
EFMB TEST REQUIREMENTS – 12 MILE FOOT MARCH
Complete and Return
T
AF
The EFMB Test Board has verified the 12 Mile Foot March with a calibrated wheel. The route measures
63,360 feet (equivalent to 12 miles or 19.3 kilometers).
Date Received:
R

D
CERTIFICATE OF DESTRUCTION
EFMB WRITTEN TEST MATERIALS
Complete and Return
The original and all copies of the EFMB Written Test and Answer Keys (Number_________) received
from the EFMB Test Control Office, AMEDDC&S an reproduced for use in conducting the EFMB Written
Test have been destroyed. No copies of the test or answer keys have been retained by this organization
or distributed to other organizations/individuals.
Date Received:
D-3-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E
EFMB PLANNING MATERIAL
E-1. GENERAL.
The various matrixes and examples contained within this appendix are included to
assist units in planning to conduct EFMB testing. They are designed for EFMB use
only. The EFMB host unit should modify the material to fit their concept of operations
and plan. They may be reproduced locally as needed.
T
AF
R
D
E-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-1
EFMB SCHEDULE EXAMPLES
E-1-1. GENERAL. The information contained within this appendix provides information
and examples for planning the various phases associated with hosting EFMB testing.
E-1-2. EXAMPLE SCHEDULES.
a. The example standardization and testing schedules are based off of four
candidate platoons. The EFMB host unit will decide the number they will have.
b. The number of days required for setup, preparation of the evaluators, and
standardization of candidates is the EFMB host unit’s decision. Adequate time should
be allowed to ensure that they are accomplished to standard.
c. Recovery time is not listed in these examples. Normally two days are allotted for
recovery following the completion of EFMB testing.
d. The time limit to complete all EFMB testing, including the written test, is 120
hours. This may be spread over six days as long as the time the first tested event
T
started and the end time on the 12-mile foot march are within this time period.
AF
Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4

R
Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur.

D
AM Setup Setup Prep Prep
PM Setup Prep Prep Prep
Table E-1-1. Example EFMB Setup and Preparation Schedule.
Day 5 Day 6 Day 7 Day 8

Fri. Sat. Sun. Mon.
AM CML 1 CML 3 REVAL Foot March
PM CML 2 DLN NLN REVAL WT
Table E-1-2. Example EFMB Validation Schedule.
E-1-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Day 8 Day 9 Day 10 Day 11 Day 12

Tues. Wed. Thur. Fri. Sat.
1st AM INPROC CML 1 DLN CML 3 CML 2

Plt
PM Study CML 1 NLN CML 3 CML 2
2nd AM INPROC CML 2 CML 1 DLN CML 3

Plt
PM Study CML 2 CML 1 NLN CML 3
3rd AM INPROC CML 3 CML 2 CML 1 DLN

Plt
PM NLN CML 3 CML 2 CML 1 Study
4th AM INPROC DLN CML 3 CML 2 CML 1

Plt
PM Study NLN CML 3 CML 2 CML 1
Table E-1-3. Example EFMB Standardization Schedule.

T
AF
Day 13 Day 14 Day 15 Day 16 Day 17 Day 18
Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thur. Fri
R
AM WT CML 1 DLN CML 3 CML 2

D
1st
12 Mile March and Graduation

Plt PM Study CML 1 NLN CML 3 CML 2
2nd AM WT CML 2 CML 1 DLN CML 3

Plt PM Study CML 2 CML 1 NLN CML 3
3rd AM WT CML 3 CML 2 CML 1 DLN

Plt PM NLN CML 3 CML 2 CML 1 Study
4th AM WT DLN CML 3 CML 2 CML 1

Plt PM Study NLN CML 3 CML 2 CML 1
Table E-1-4. Example EFMB Testing Schedule.
E-1-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-2
EFMB COMBAT TESTING LANE EXAMPLES
E-2-1. GENERAL. The information contained within this appendix provides example
concepts for the configuration and tasks on the CTLs. Adjustments should be made by
the EFMB host unit as required.
E-2-2. ESTIMATING THE NUMBER OF CANDIDATES THAT CAN BE SUPPORTED.
a. The EFMB host unit must estimate the total number of candidates that they can
support. The appendices in Appendix E work together in planning this information.
b. The testing of all tasks that comprise the following critical performance areas must
be tested on CTLs.
(1) EFMB TCCC tasks.
(2) EFMB Communications tasks.
(3) EFMB Medical and Casualty Evacuation tasks.

T
AF
(4) EFMB Warrior Skills tasks.
c. The EFMB test board chairperson will decide the tasks, sequence, and the
R
situation that will make up each CTL. The number of CTLs is the decision of the EFMB
test board chairperson. The following are some factors and issues that should be
D
reviewed when designing the concept of operation for the CTLs.
(1) Number of candidates that will be supported.
(2) Number of cadre and non-candidate available.
(3) Number and availability of vehicles, evacuation platforms, equipment.
(4) The type of scenario or mission do you want the CTLs revolve around to
make it relevant to the current operational environment.
(5) Number of mannequins, simulated casualty mannequins, and training

devices available to minimize the personnel requirements for non-candidates.
(6) Plan the tasks in a logical sequence. Special attention should be made to
the conditions statements and information within each task listed on the scoresheets.
(7) Plan locations and times that a new candidate could be sent down the lane
once another candidate reaches a particular point.
E-2-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(8) Plan ways to minimize the number of non-candidates required to support the
lanes.
(9) If there is limited personnel availability, look at utilizing weighted mannequins

and/or simulated casualty mannequins IAW the guidance in this publication.
E-2-3. EXAMPLE CTL FLOW AND OPERATIONAL DIAGRAMS AND ASSOCIATED

ASSUMPTIONS.
a. The example CTLs are based on a projection of 200 total candidates who will
make it through the entire EFMB test cycle. The CTL Testing Lane Flow Diagrams will
clearly depict the flow of the lanes and the personnel that support them. The CTL
Operational Diagrams will depict the relationship between the lanes on the CTL. Units
should modify these examples to fit their vision of concept of operation, number of
candidates to be tested, and organizational capabilities.
b. These are the critical assumptions associated with these examples:
(1) There is a projection of 200 total candidates.

T
(2) Candidates will be broken down into four platoons and will go through
AF
standardization and testing IAW the examples in Appendix E-1.
(3) There are three CTLs established with all of the hands on tasks from the
R
critical performance areas listed in paragraph E-2-2b.

D
(4) Weighted mannequins and simulated “dummy” casualties are not available at
the site. Actual Soldiers will perform all duties.
(5) Appendices E-4 and E-5 were utilized in determining cadre and non-
candidate requirements.
(6) Appendix E-6 was utilized in planning the number of candidates that can be
supported.
(7) Appendix E-9 was utilized in planning vehicle, generator, and trailer support.
(8) Appendix E-3 was utilized in determining the times associated with the tasks
listed in parenthesis following each task with the lane total time in the top right corner.
E-2-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
Table E-1. Example EFMB Combat Testing Lane 1 Flow.
AF
R
D
Table E-2. Example EFMB Combat Testing Lane 1 Operational Diagram.
E-2-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-2-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-2-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

T
AF
R
D
E-2-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-3
EFMB TASK TIME LIMITS AND ESTIMATES
E-3-1. GENERAL.
a. The information contained within this appendix is provided to assist in planning

the time factors associated with planning EFMB testing.
b. Table E-3-1 provides a matrix of all EFMB tasks and the time limits or estimates
for candidates to complete them.
(1) Tasks with a prescribed time limit for EFMB testing are listed in the
applicable column.
(2) Tasks that do not have a prescribed time limit for EFMB testing are listed in
the applicable column. These estimates are a fair estimate for the reasonable
candidate. However, the testing concept of operation and environmental factors could
increase or decrease the time for candidates to perform some of the more physically
demanding tasks.
T
c. This appendix only addresses the times associated with individual EFMB tasks.
AF
Other factors should be considered in planning the time required for a candidate to
negotiate an entire lane or event.
R
(1) The time required for the candidate to move from one task to the location of
the next.
D
(2) Time to prepare the lane, moulage casualties, position noncandidate

personnel, vehicles, equipment, and testing environment for the next candidate.
(3) Time to move to and from the testing lane or event. This time and the
distance associated with the move will also drive your transportation planning
requirements.
(4) The amount of time necessary in between starting candidates on the

individual lanes on the CTLs.
(5) The location of possible choke points and a plan of action if a bottleneck
occurs.
(6) The amount of time available per day for testing. This is normally driven by
the amount of daylight.
E-3-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Estimated
EFMB Time (No
EFMB CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS AND TASKS Time Limit EFMB Limit) TOTAL
MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS TOTALS 60 55 115
Establish a helicopter landing point. N/A 10 10
Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L). 15 N/A 15
Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform (M996, M997, M113, or M1113 STRYKER MEV). 15 N/A 15
Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (5-Ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2 ½-Ton M-1081) or (2 ½ -
ton, 6x6 or 5-ton, 6x6, cargo truck). 15 N/A 15
Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998). 15 N/A 15
Extricate a casualty from a vehicle N/A 15 15
Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter. N/A 5 5
Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags. N/A 5 5
Evacuate casualties using two-person carries or drags. N/A 5 5
Evacuate casualties using litter carries. N/A 15 15
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS TOTALS 0 92 92
Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures. N/A 10 10
Control bleeding using a tourniquet. N/A 5 5
Control bleeding using a hemostatic device. T N/A 10 10
Triage casualties. N/A 5 5
AF
Perform a tactical combat casualty assessment. N/A 10 10
Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent hypothermia. N/A 5 5
Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion. N/A 10 10
Insert a nasopharyngeal airway. N/A 2 2
R
Treat a penetrating chest wound. N/A 5 5

D
Perform needle chest decompression. N/A 5 5

Treat an open abdominal wound. N/A 5 5
Control bleeding using dressings. N/A 5 5
Treat an open head injury. N/A 5 5
Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye. N/A 5 5
Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm. N/A 5 5
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS TOTALS 68 21 89
Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination using your assigned protective mask. N/A 1 1
Decontaminate yourself using chemical decontaminating kits. 5 N/A 5
Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with MOPP or JSLIST gear. 8 N/A 8
Perform self -aid for mild nerve agent poisoning. 5 N/A 5
Protect yourself from biological or chemical injury/contamination when removing MOPP or JSLIST
gear. 20 N/A 20
Store the M40-series protective mask with or without hood. 1 N/A 1
Correct malfunction of an M4 carbine or M16-series rifle. 1 N/A 1
Disassemble, assemble, and perform a function check an M9 pistol. 3 N/A 3
Move under direct fire. N/A 5 5
Disassemble, assemble, and perform a functions check an M16-series rifle or M4/M4A1 carbine. 4 N/A 4
React to indirect fire. N/A 5 5
Move over, through, or around obstacles. N/A 5 5
React to an UXO or possible IED. N/A 5 5
E-3-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Estimated
EFMB Time (No
EFMB CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS AND TASKS CONT. Time Limit EFMB Limit) TOTAL
COMMUNICATION TASKS TOTALS 35 0 35
Assemble and operate a SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP) without ANCD. 5 N/A 5
Load FH/COMSEC data and conduct radio check using SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP). 10 N/A 10
Prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request. 5 N/A 5
Submit CBRN 1 report. 10 N/A 10
Submit Explosive Hazard Spot Report. 5 N/A 5
LAND NAVIGATION TASKS TOTALS 420 0 420
Navigate from one point to another during the day. 180 N/A 180
Navigate from one point to another during the night. 240 N/A 240
WRITTEN TEST TOTALS 120 0 120
FOOT MARCH TOTALS 180 0 180
NOTE: Times are in minutes.
Table E-3-1. EFMB Task Time Limits and Estimates.
T
AF
R
D
E-3-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-3-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-4
EFMB PERSONNEL (NON-CANDIDATE) PLANNING
E-4-1. GENERAL.
a. The information contained within this appendix provides information for

estimating and planning non-candidate personnel support requirements for EFMB.
b. For EFMB hands-on testing planning purposes only, a non-candidate Soldier is

defined as any Soldier who serves as a litter bearer, litter patient, ambulatory patient,
casualty, or as a contaminated Soldier on the EFMB lanes. This category of personnel
does not include evaluators, cadre, or support personnel.
c. Non-candidate personnel are required to support the EFMB on a variety of tasks.

These tasks are listed in the following paragraphs.
d. Table E-4-2 provides a listing of non-candidate personnel requirements per

EFMB task. Table E-4-3 shows an estimate based on the concepts in Appendix E-2.
(1) The exact number of non-candidate personnel required is based on the

T
concept of operations for the particular EFMB. This is due to the fact that some of these
AF
non-candidate personnel may be utilized on more than one task.
(2) Paragraphs 4-11 through 4-17 and the tasks within Appendix B provide
R
additional information on non-candidate requirements.

D
(3) Weighted mannequins and casualty simulators were not utilized in these
examples. However, their use IAW this publication can greatly decrease the Soldiers
required to act as non-candidates. See paragraph 4-11 through 4-17 for more
guidance.
e. Table E-4-1 provides a blank matrix for planning non-candidate personnel

requirements.
E-4-2. LITTER BEARERS.
a. For EFMB hands-on testing planning purposes only, a litter bearer is defined as a
Soldier who assists the candidate in moving a casualty. This includes transporting a
casualty with litter carries, two-person carries or drags, and also extricating from a
vehicle.
b. Litter bearers are required on the following tasks.
(1) Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L).
E-4-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(2) Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform (M996, M997, M113) or
(M1113 STRYKER MEV).
(3) Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (5-Ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2 ½-

(4) Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998).
(5) Extricate a casualty from a vehicle (any military vehicle).
E-4-3. LITTER PATIENTS.
a. For EFMB hands-on testing planning purposes only, a litter patient is defined as
a Soldier who is unable to walk and/or has sustained injuries that warrant being
transported on a litter.
b. Litter patients are required on the following tasks.

T
AF
(1) Load casualties onto a medical evacuation helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L).
R

D

(4) Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1¼-ton, 4x4, M998).
(5) Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter.
E-4-4. AMBULATORY PATIENTS.
a. For EFMB hands-on testing planning purposes only, an ambulatory patient is

defined as a Soldier who is able to walk and whose injuries do not warrant being
transported on a litter.
b. Ambulatory patients are required on the following tasks.
(1) Load casualties onto a helicopter (HH-60L only).
E-4-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
E-4-5. CASUALTIES.
a. For EFMB hands-on testing planning purposes only, a casualty is defined as a

Soldier who has been injured and requires treatment, extricated from a vehicle, or
evacuated using one or two-man manual carries or drags. Depending on the sequence
of tasks and the concept of operations for the EFMB, some casualties may end up
becoming litter patients or ambulatory patients.
b. Table E-4-1 does not break down the number of casualties on the TCCC tasks.
This is highly variable since most casualties will have multiple simulated injuries. The
number and type of injuries on each casualty is the decision of the EFMB test board
chairperson. Most sites will utilize four or five casualties on the TCCC tasks.
c. Casualties are required on the following tasks.
(1) Tactical combat casualty care tasks.
(a) Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures.

T
AF
(b) Control bleeding using a tourniquet.
(c) Control bleeding using a hemostatic device.

R
(d) Triage casualties.

D
(e) Perform tactical combat casualty assessment.
(f) Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent hypothermia.
(g) Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion.
(h) Insert a nasopharyngeal airway.
(i) Treat a penetrating chest wound.
(j) Perform needle chest decompression.
(k) Treat an open abdominal wound.
(l) Control bleeding using dressings.
(m) Treat an open head wound.
E-4-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(n) Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye.
(o) Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm.
(2) Extricate casualties from a vehicle.
(3) Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags.
E-4-6. CONTAMINATED SOLDIER.
a. For EFMB hands-on testing planning purposes only, a simulated contaminated

Soldier is required on the following task. Candidates will only test on one of the
following tasks depending on which type of CBRN protective gear they were issued,
MOPP or JSLIST.
(1) Protect yourself from biological or chemical injury/contamination when

removing MOPP gear.
(2) Protect yourself from chemical or biological injury/contamination when

T
removing mission oriented protective posture using JSLIST.
AF
b. If possible, the Soldier performing in this capacity should be rotated out to provide
a break from being in MOPP IV for a sustained amount of time. The EFMB host unit
R
should evaluate their capabilities and constraints along with the environmental factors.
D
E-4-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Litter Patients
Contaminated
Litter Bearers
Ambulatory
Casualties
Patients
Soldier
EFMB CRITICAL PERFORMANCE AREAS AND TASKS TOTAL
MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS TOTALS
Establish a helicopter landing point.
Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L).
Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform (M996, M997, M113, or M1113 STRYKER MEV).
Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (5-Ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2 ½-Ton M-1081) or (2 ½ -ton,
Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998).
Extricate a casualty from a vehicle
Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter.
Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags.
Evacuate casualties using two-person carries or drags.
Evacuate casualties using litter carries.
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS TOTALS
Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures.
Control bleeding using a tourniquet.
Control bleeding using a hemostatic device.
T
AF
Triage casualties.
Perform a tactical combat casualty assessment.
Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent hypothermia.
R
Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion.

Insert a nasopharyngeal airway.
D
Treat a penetrating chest wound.

Perform needle chest decompression.
Treat an open abdominal wound.
Control bleeding using dressings.
Treat an open head injury.
Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye.
Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm.
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS TOTALS
Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination using your assigned protective mask.
Decontaminate yourself using chemical decontaminating kits.
Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with MOPP or JSLIST gear.
Perform self -aid for mild nerve agent poisoning.
gear.
Store the M40-series protective mask with or without hood.
Correct malfunction of an M4 carbine or M16-series rifle.
Disassemble, assemble, and perform a function check an M9 pistol.
Move under direct fire.
Disassemble, assemble, and perform a functions check an M16-series rifle or M4/M4A1 carbine.
E-4-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Litter Patients
Contaminated
Litter Bearers
Ambulatory
Casualties
Patients
Soldier
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS CONTINUED
React to indirect fire.
Move over, through, or around obstacles.
React to an UXO or possible IED.
COMMUNICATION TASKS TOTALS
Assemble and operate a SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP) without ANCD.
Load FH/COMSEC data and conduct radio check using SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP).
Prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request.
Submit CBRN 1 report.
Submit Explosive Hazard Spot Report.
LAND NAVIGATION TASKS TOTALS
Navigate from one point to another during the day.
Navigate from one point to another during the night.
WRITTEN TEST TOTALS
FOOT MARCH TOTALS
T EFMB TOTALS
AF
Table E-4-1. EFMB Non-Candidate Personnel Planning Matrix.
R
D
E-4-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Litter Patients
Contaminated
Litter Bearers
Ambulatory
Casualties
Patients
Soldier
MEDICAL AND CASUALTY EVACUATION TASKS TOTALS 17 19 1 3 0 40
Establish a helicopter landing point. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L). 3 3 0 0 0 6
Load casualties onto ground evacuation platform (M996, M997, M113, or M1113 STRYKER MEV). 3 2 1 0 0 6
Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (5-Ton M-1085, M-1093, or 2 ½-Ton M-1081) or (2 ½ -ton, 3 5 0 0 0 8
Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998). 3 3 0 0 0 6
Extricate a casualty from a vehicle 1 0 0 1 0 2
Evacuate a casualty using a SKED litter. 0 0 0 2 0 2
Evacuate casualties using one-person carries or drags. 0 2 0 0 0 2
Evacuate casualties using two-person carries or drags. 1 2 0 0 0 3
Evacuate casualties using litter carries. 3 2 0 0 0 5
TACTICAL COMBAT CASUALTY CARE TASKS TOTALS 0 0 0 4 0 4
Perform tactical combat casualty care procedures. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control bleeding using a tourniquet.
Control bleeding using a hemostatic device.
T 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
AF
Triage casualties. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Perform a tactical combat casualty assessment. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Initiate treatment for hypovolemic shock and prevent hypothermia. 0 0 0 0 0 0
R
Initiate a saline lock and intravenous infusion. 0 0 0 0 0 0

Insert a nasopharyngeal airway. 0 0 0 0 0 0
D
Treat a penetrating chest wound. 0 0 0 0 0 0

Perform needle chest decompression. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Treat an open abdominal wound. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control bleeding using dressings. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Treat an open head injury. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Treat lacerations, contusions, and extrusions of the eye. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Immobilize a suspected fracture of the arm. 0 0 0 0 0 0
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS TOTALS 0 0 0 0 1 1
Protect yourself from chemical/biological contamination using your assigned protective mask. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Decontaminate yourself using chemical decontaminating kits. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination with MOPP or JSLIST gear. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Perform self -aid for mild nerve agent poisoning. 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 1
gear.
Store the M40-series protective mask with or without hood. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Correct malfunction of an M4 carbine or M16-series rifle. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Disassemble, assemble, and perform a function check an M9 pistol. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Move under direct fire. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Disassemble, assemble, and perform a functions check an M16-series rifle or M4/M4A1 carbine. 0 0 0 0 0 0
E-4-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Litter Patients
Contaminated
Litter Bearers
Ambulatory
Casualties
Patients
Soldier
WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS CONTINUED
React to indirect fire. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Move over, through, or around obstacles. 0 0 0 0 0 0
React to an UXO or possible IED. 0 0 0 0 0 0
COMMUNICATION TASKS TOTALS 0 0 0 0 0 0
Assemble and operate a SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP) without ANCD. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load FH/COMSEC data and conduct radio check using SINCGARS or SINCGARS (ASIP). 0 0 0 0 0 0
Prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Submit CBRN 1 report. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Submit Explosive Hazard Spot Report. 0 0 0 0 0 0
LAND NAVIGATION TASKS TOTALS 0 0 0 0 0 0
Navigate from one point to another during the day. 0 0 0 0 0 0
Navigate from one point to another during the night. 0 0 0 0 0 0
WRITTEN TEST TOTALS 0 0 0 0 0 0
FOOT MARCH TOTALS 0 0 0 0 0 0
T EFMB TOTALS 17 19 1 7 1 45
AF
Table E-4-2. EFMB Non-Candidate Personnel Requirements By Task.
R
D
E-4-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
E-4-7. EXAMPLE NON-CANDIDATE REQUUIREMENTS AND ASSOCIATED

ASSUMPTIONS.
a. This example non-candidate personnel requirement is based on a projection of

200 total candidates who will make it through the entire EFMB test cycle. Units should
modify this example to fit their concept of operation, number of candidates to be tested,
and organizational capabilities.
b. These are the critical assumptions associated with this example:
(3) There are three CTLs established IAW the examples in Appendix E-2.
(4) Support personnel for the 12-mile foot march and proctors on the written test
will be drawn from the cadre personnel base utilized on the CTLs and/or land
navigation.
T
(5) Evaluators and other cadre will perform any transportation requirements.
AF
(6) Meals are being picked up in mermites from the dining facility; they are not
prepared on site.
R
(7) Weighted mannequins and simulated casualty mannequins are not available
D
at the site. Actual Soldiers will perform all duties.
(8) Medical support and coverage is broken down to three 2-medic with
ambulance teams.
(9) Personnel in the ranks shown are available.
QTY Non-Candidate Duty Position Rank EFMB Required

109 NONCANDIDATES TOTAL PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
36 CTL 1 (TCCC task heavy CTL) Immaterial Not Required
34 CTL 2 Immaterial Not Required
39 CTL 3 Immaterial Not Required
109 TOTAL NONCANDIDATE PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
0 EFMB Awardees Required IAW AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10 to Perform Duties
0 EFMB Awardees Recommended in Addition to Required Personnel to Perform Duties
109 EFMB Awardees Not Required and/or Strongly Recommended to Perform Duties
Table E-4-3. Example Non-Candidate Personnel Requirements to Conduct an

EFMB with 200 Candidates (See Paragraph E-4-7b for Assumptions).
E-4-9
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-4-10
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-5
EFMB PERSONNEL (CADRE) PLANNING
E-5-1. GENERAL. The information contained within this appendix provides

information for estimating and planning cadre personnel support requirements for
EFMB. Paragraph 2-10 outlines supplementary personnel planning information.
Chapters 2, 3, and 4 outline criteria, duties, and requirements of cadre personnel.
Medical support and personnel will not be addressed in detail in this appendix, but must
be planned by the EFMB host unit.
E-5-2. TYPES OF EFMB CADRE PERSONNEL.
a. The EFMB host unit decides how many cadre are required to conduct their
EFMB. This publication requires some personnel to be awardees of the EFMB, other
positions are recommended by the EFMB TCO. The following are some of the key
factors that go into this decision making process on the number of cadre required and in
what capacity they will serve.
(1) The total number of candidates that will be on site.

T
(2) The concept of operations, including how many CTLs will be utilized and the
AF
number of lanes coming off of each CTL.
(3) Number of cadre personnel available.

R
(4) Number of cadre who have been awarded the EFMB.

D
(5) Experience of the available personnel.
b. The following cadre positions are mandatory to be awardees of the EFMB.
(1) EFMB test board chairperson.
(2) EFMB test board members.
(3) OICs/NCOICs of all CTLs.
(4) All evaluators on the TCCC tasks.
c. Other cadre positions are not required to be awardees of the EFMB, but it is
recommended if possible.
(1) Land Navigation and Foot March OICs/NCOICs.
(2) EFMB OIC and NCOIC.
E-5-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) Operations Center NCOIC.
(4) Evaluators on the other EFMB hands-on tasks.
(5) Platoon sergeants for the candidates.
d. Operations Center Staff, opposing forces, supply, meal and LSA support cadre
personnel are not required to be awardees of the EFMB.
e. For the following examples in planning EFMB cadre personnel, cadre personnel
will be broken down into four major groups. Subordinate duty positions will be listed
under each major group. The EFMB host unit may elect to have individuals serve in
more than one capacity depending on various factors including those listed earlier in
this section. They may also elect to have additional cadre positions (i.e., individuals to
moulage casualties, vehicle operators/drivers, gate guards).
(1) EFMB Test Board.
(a) Test board chairperson.
(b) Test board members.

T
AF
(2) Lane OIC or NCOIC.
R
(a) CTL 1, 2, and 3 OIC/NCOIC.

D
(b) Land Navigation OIC/NCOIC.
(c) 12-Mile Foot March OIC/NCOIC.
(3) Evaluator.
(a) CTL 1, 2, and 3 evaluators.
(b) Land Navigation evaluators.
(4) Support Personnel.
(a) Opposing forces.
(b) Supply.
(c) Meal and LSA support.
(d) Medical support.
E-5-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(5) Operations Center Staff.
(a) EFMB OIC.
(b) EFMB NCOIC.
(c) Operations Center NCOIC.
(d) Operations Center Support Staff.
(e) Platoon Sergeants for Candidates.
E-5-3. EXAMPLE CADRE REQUUIREMENTS AND ASSOCIATED ASSUMPTIONS.
a. This example cadre personnel requirement is based on a projection of 200 total

candidates who will make it through the entire EFMB test cycle. Units should modify
this example to fit their concept of operation, number of candidates to be tested, and
organizational capabilities.
b. These are the critical assumptions associated with this example:

T
AF
R

D
(3) There are three CTLs established IAW the examples in Appendix E-2.
(4) Support personnel for the 12-mile foot march and proctors on the written test
will be drawn from the cadre personnel base utilized on the CTLs and/or land
navigation.
(5) Evaluators and other cadre will perform any transportation requirements.
(6) Meals are being picked up in mermites from the dining facility; they are not
prepared on site.
(7) Weighted mannequins and simulated “dummy” casualties are not available at
the site. Actual Soldiers will perform all duties.
(8) Medical support and coverage are not included.
(9) Personnel in the ranks shown are available.
E-5-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
QTY Cadre Duty Position Rank EFMB Required

5 EFMB TEST BOARD TOTAL PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
1 Test Board Chairperson O-4 Yes
4 Test Board Members E-7 / O-3 Yes
5 LANE OICs or NCOICs TOTAL PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
3 CTLs (CTL 1, CTL 2, and CTL 3) E-7 Yes
1 Land Nav E-7 Recommended
1 Foot March E-7 Recommended
46 EVALUATORS TOTAL PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
13 CTL 1 (TCCC task heavy CTL) E-5 Yes
13 CTL 2 E-5 Recommended
11 CTL 3 E-5 Recommended
9 Land Navigation E-5 Not Required
24 SUPPORT PERSONNEL TOTAL PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
6 Opposing forces CTL 1 E-4 Not Required
2 Supply E-4 Not Required
3 Meal support E-5 Not Required
6 Medical support Immaterial Not Required
10 OPERATIONS CENTER STAFF TOTAL PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)
T
1 EFMB OIC O-3 Recommended
AF
1 EFMB NCOIC/Field First Sergeant E-7 Recommended
1 Operations Center NCOIC E-7 Recommended
3 Operations Center Support Staff Immaterial Not Required
4 Platoon Sergeants for Candidates E-5 Recommended
R
84 TOTAL CADRE PERSONNEL REQUIREMENT (Example)

D
21 EFMB Awardees Required IAW AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10 to Perform Duties

33 EFMB Awardees Recommended in Addition to Required EFMB Awardees to Perform
Duties
30 EFMB Awardees Not Required and/or Strongly Recommended to Perform Duties
Table E-5-1. Example Cadre Personnel Requirements to Conduct an EFMB

with 200 Candidates (See Paragraph E-5-3b for Assumptions).
E-5-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-6
EFMB PERSONNEL AND TIME PLANNING MATRICES

information for estimating and planning personnel requirements for EFMB. It also
addresses the number of candidates that can be supported and the time aspect of
planning the CTLs. Adjustments should be made by the EFMB host unit as required.
E-6-2. ESTIMATING THE NUMBER OF CANDIDATES THAT CAN BE SUPPORTED.
a. The EFMB host unit must estimate the total number of candidates that they can
support. The appendices in Appendix E work together in planning this information.
b. The EFMB host unit must also look at numerous other factors in determining the
number of candidates that they can support. Some examples include:
(1) How many prospective candidates do you have within your organization?
(2) Will you be accepting candidates from other organizations and installations?
T
(3) Once a candidate fails a portion of EFMB testing, will they be allowed to
AF
continue on during the EFMB test cycle or will they return to their unit?
(4) What are your organization’s logistical constraints ranging from budget, time,
R
personnel, equipment, and vehicles?

D
E-6-3. TIME BETWEEN STARTING CANDIDATES ON A CTL LANE.
a. The time that the evaluators must wait between starting candidates on a CTL
lane is dependent on the concept of operations, the tasks and their associated times,
the number of evaluators and non-candidates supporting the lanes, and the number of
candidates that must be pushed down them.
b. Table E-6-1 depicts an example of the time between starting candidates on a

CTL lane and how it determines the number of candidates that would be able to
negotiate the lane per EFMB testing day.
c. These are the critical assumptions associated with this example:
(1) Daylight conditions are present by 0700 hours and candidates must be off
the lanes by 1800.
(2) Cadre and non-candidates will breakfast prior to 0700 hours and eat dinner
after candidates are off the lanes. Lunch will be eaten as time permits.
E-6-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(3) All candidates negotiate the tasks on the lanes IAW the maximum EFMB
time standards or estimated times.
Start Times of Candidates Broken Down to Various Times

Every 45 mins Every 40 mins Every 35 mins Every 30 mins
0700 0700 0700 0700
0745 0740 0735 0730
0830 0820 0810 0800
0915 0900 0845 0830
1000 0940 0920 0900
1045 1020 0955 0930
1130 1100 1030 1000
1215 1140 1105 1030
1300 1220 1140 1100
1345 1300 1215 1130
1430 1340 1250 1200
1515 1420 1325 1230
1600 1500 1400 1300
1540 1435 1330
1620 1510 1400
T 1545 1430
1620 1500
AF
1530
13 Candidates 15 Candidates 17 Candidates 18 Candidates
Per CTL Lane Per Day Per CTL Lane Per Day Per CTL Lane Per Day Per CTL Lane Per Day
R
Table E-6-1. Example Time Between Starting Candidates on a CTL Lane.

D
E-6-4. NUMBER OF CANDIDATES THAT CAN BE SUPPORTED ON CTL LANES.
a. The number of candidates that can be pushed down the CTL lanes is dependent
on the concept of operations and the number of evaluators and non-candidates
available to run the lanes.
b. Table E-6-2 depicts the number of candidates that can be sent down various
numbers of lanes on a CTL per day and during four days of EFMB testing based on the
standardization and testing schedule examples in Appendix E-1. This table is based off
the information in Table E-6-1
c. The EFMB host unit should first develop their CTL concept of operations and
determine the estimated time for a candidate to negotiate each CTL. Trigger points
should be established to start the next candidate down the lane while not interfering with
the candidate(s) already on the lane.
d. The EFMB host unit can then utilize the information in conjunction with this
information in determining the number of candidates that they can effectively support.
E-6-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
e. Historically, the number of candidates decreases dramatically after the first tested
event and continues to decline as EFMB testing continues. However, be careful in
anticipating this degradation. Keep in mind that you must be prepared to handle 100
percent of the candidates throughout the EFMB test period in the event they perform
well.
Start Time Increments

Every Every Every Every
45 mins 40 mins 35 mins 30 Mins
Every During Every During Every During Every During
45 mins 4 Days 40 mins 4 Days 35 mins 4 Days 30 Mins 4 Days Number of Lanes
per day Testing per day Testing per day Testing per day Testing per CTL
13 52 15 60 17 68 18 72 1 Lane per CTL
26 104 30 120 34 136 36 144 2 Lanes per CTL
39 156 45 180 51 204 54 216 3 Lanes per CTL
52 208 60 240 68 272 72 288 4 Lanes per CTL
65 260 75 300 85 340 90 360 5 Lanes per CTL
Table E-6-2. Number of Candidates That Can be Supported on CTL Lanes.
E-6-5. NUMBER OF EVALUATORS, NON-CANDIDATES, AND ADDITIONAL

T
SUPPORT PERSONNEL REQUIRED PER CTL LANE.
AF
a. The number of personnel to include evaluators, non-candidate personnel, and
additional support personnel required on the various CTL lanes is dependent on the
concept of operations and the number of candidates that must be pushed down them.
R
b. Table E-6-3, E-6-4, and E-6-5 are planning matrices that can be utilized to assist
D
you in planning these areas after you have designed your lane concepts. Utilize the
other areas within Appendix E-2 in your planning process.
c. The EFMB host unit should closely look at their CTL concept of operations and
determine the number of various personnel necessary to support it. Trigger points
should be established to start the next candidate down the lane while not interfering with
the candidate(s) already on the lane.
d. It is strongly recommended to use the same evaluator with a candidate all the
way to the end of the lane. This minimizes the round robin type effect and facilitates in
the creating more realistic and effective testing lanes.
e. Some examples of possible additional support personnel are OPFOR personnel,

personnel to moulage casualties, runners for the CTL NCOIC.
E-6-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
# EVALUATORS
CTL 1 CTL 2 CTL 3 TOTAL
1 LANE
2 LANES
3 LANES
4 LANES
5 LANES
Table E-6-3. Number of Evaluators per CTL Lane.
# NON-CANDIDATE PERSONNEL
1 LANE
2 LANES
3 LANES
4 LANES
5 LANES
T
Table E-6-4. Number of Non-Candidates per CTL Lane.
AF
# CTL ADDITIONAL
SUPPORT PERSONNEL
R
1 LANE
2 LANES
D
3 LANES
4 LANES
5 LANES
Table E-6-5. Number of CTL Additional Support Personnel per CTL Lane.
E-6-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-7
CLASS VIII PLANNING MATRIX
for estimating and planning Class VIII medical supplies support requirements for EFMB.
E-7-2. CLASS VIII REQUIREMENTS.
a. Chapter 4-13 and Appendix B-2 provide guidance on what Class VIII medical
supplies are required to complete the tasks within the TCCC critical performance area.
(1) Many of the TCCC tasks allow the EFMB host unit to select different
techniques and supplies. The EFMB host unit should closely read through each TCCC
task and select which they will use and plan their Class VIII requirements accordingly.
(2) The EFMB host unit should come up with their plan on how much hands on
the candidates will receive during standardization to plan their Class VIII requirements.
They may select to only use fresh sterile items during a demonstration and have
candidates reuse certain items during standardization.
T
(3) Chapter 4-13 provides guidance on the reuse of certain Class VIII items and
AF
addresses other issues associated with planning the packing list for EFMB testing.
(4) Overage should be planned for preparing evaluators prior to and during
R
validation.
D
b. Other minimal amounts of Class VIII will be required on the Medical and Casualty
Evacuation tasks. Used items from training and evaluator preparation are best utilized
for the following examples:
(1) Cravats for securing the litters to the various vehicles and evacuation
platforms.
(2) Dressings for moulaging the litter patients and casualties so they appear to
have the injuries stated on their DD Form 1380 Field Medical Cards.
E-7-3. USE OF THE CLASS VIII PLANNING MATRIX.
a. This planning matrix does not list all choices of supplies available in the Army
supply system. The EFMB host unit should work with their medical supply personnel to
verify national stock numbers (NSNs) and other information as applicable.
b. Place the number of items required per task for one candidate and then add them
up for a total per item per candidate. Multiply this by the number of total candidates.
Add the appropriate amount of overage for standardization and evaluator preparation.
E-7-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-7-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-7-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-7-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-8
SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT PLANNING
for estimating and planning supplies (other than Class VIII) and equipment (other than
vehicles, generators, and trailers) support requirements for EFMB. See Appendix E-7
and E-9 for information on Class VIII and vehicle, generator, and trailer planning.
E-8-2. SUPPLY AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS.
a. Chapter 4-11 through 4-17 and the EFMB score sheets in Appendix B-2 provide
guidance and requirements for supplies and equipment required for EFMB testing.
These should be read carefully and planned accordingly to ensure everything is
available to establish the site and conduct EFMB testing.
b. Other supplies and equipment are required to support the EFMB. Some of these
areas include the following:
(1) CTLs and other testing areas.
(2) EFMB operations center.

T
AF
(3) LSA and eating areas.
R
(4) In-processing, and out-processing and awards ceremony.

D
E-8-2. USE OF THE SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT PLANNING MATRIX.
a. This planning matrix does not list all choices of supplies and equipment available
in the Army supply system or that is on-hand at the unit level. The EFMB host unit
should work with their supply personnel and organizations within their command to
verify national stock numbers (NSNs), availability of equipment and other information as
applicable.
b. To use this matrix, place the number of items required per area and add them to
get a cumulative total amount required. You can also factor in the unit cost to
determine the monetary figures for items that must be ordered.
E-8-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-8-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-8-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-8-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-8-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-8-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-9
VEHICLE, TRAILER, AND GENERATOR PLANNING
for planning vehicles, trailers, water, and generator support requirements for EFMB.
Chapter 4-14 provides additional information on the selection of vehicles for EFMB
testing.
E-9-2. VEHICLES FOR TESTING PURPOSES.
a. The EFMB host unit will select one type of vehicle from each of the following to
evaluate on the CTLs. The exact number required is based on the concept briefing.
(1) Load casualties onto a helicopter (UH-60 or HH-60L).

T
AF
(4) Load casualties onto nonstandard vehicle (1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998).
(5) Extricate a casualty from a vehicle (any military vehicle).

R
b. Vehicles may also be utilized to create the scenario and realism of a simulated
D
combat environment.
E-9-3. VEHICLES FOR SUPPORT PURPOSES.
a. Vehicles will also be required for support of the EFMB. Some examples include:
(1) Transporting candidates and cadre to and from showers, to testing areas,
and other locations.
(2) Picking up meals from dining facility.
(3) Transporting equipment, ammunition, and pyrotechnics.
(4) Providing medical (ambulance) coverage.
(5) Transporting VIPs.
b. Vehicles may also be required in other support capacities dependent on other

factors. The EFMB host unit should evaluate their capabilities and constraints.
E-9-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
c. Vehicles from the CTLs are frequently utilized in support capacities when not in
use during standardization or testing.
E-9-4. TRAILERS.
a. Trailers may be needed to transport equipment and supplies.
b. Trailers with mounted generator sets are often utilized.
c. Most sites will position water buffaloes in each CTL, land navigation course, LSA,
and near the finish line of the 12-mile foot march. If unavailable, 5-gallon water cans
may be utilized.
E-9-5. GENERATORS.
a. Generator sets may also be required in various areas if fixed electrical outlets
aren’t available. Some examples of their possible use include the following:
(1) Providing power for lights and electrical outlets.

T
(2) Providing power for environmental control units (ECUs).
AF
(3) Providing power for PA systems on the CTLs.
R
(4) Providing power for smoke machines on the CTLs..

D
b. The size of generators and the number required should be evaluated by the
EFMB host unit.
E-9-6. OTHER VEHICLE AND GENERATOR RELATED ISSUES.
a. Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCSs) should be conducted

daily, even when not in use. The EFMB leadership should conduct periodic checks to
ensure compliance.
b. Maintenance support should be on call or available on site to ensure that

maintenance issues do not hinder EFMB testing.
c. All vehicle operators must be licensed. Not having enough licensed vehicle
operators is a frequent problem at EFMB sites. The EFMB host unit should plan
accordingly prior to ensure this does not become an issue.
d. The EFMB leadership should ensure all vehicles are dispatched and monitor the
expiration of dispatches on site.
E-9-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
e. GSA fuel credit cards, fuel keys, vehicle keys, and log books should be secured
in the operations center or other secure location nightly.
f. Vehicle and trailer chock blocks should be utilized. Drip pans should also be
utilized IAW unit SOP.
g. Vehicle operators should receive adequate sleep prior to operating a vehicle.

This should be monitored by the EFMB leadership due to the fact that long hours are
often incurred during hosting an EFMB test cycle.
h. Fuel and POL support should be planned by the EFMB host unit. If a fuel point is
not easily accessible, sufficient numbers of fuel cans should be available to support the
EFMB.
i. The storage of fuel points should be IAW local SOP and Army guidelines. Cadre
should be briefed on actions to be taken in case of a spill.
j. Safety should be monitored at all times. Ground guides should be utilized in

areas where Soldiers are present. Vehicle and generator operation should be included
in risk management planning procedures.
T
k. Vehicle operation in the land navigation area, especially at night, and the 12-mile
AF
foot march route should be limited to mission essential operation. Road guards and/or
signs should be placed as necessary to inform vehicles that Soldiers are in the area.
R
E-9-7. VEHICLE, TRAILER, WATER, AND GENERATOR PLANNING MATRIX. The

following matrix may be utilized to plan the number of vehicles, trailers, water buffalos,
D
and generators required to conduct an EFMB based on the specific information of the
site locations and concept of operation.
E-9-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CTL CTL CTL Land Foot Written

ITEM TOC LSA 1 2 3 Nav March Test TOTAL
UH-60 Helicopter
HH-60L Helicopter
M996
M997
M113
M1113 STRYKER MEV
5-Ton M-1085
5-Ton M-1093
2 ½-Ton M-1081
2 ½ -ton, 6x6, cargo truck
5-ton, 6x6, cargo truck
1 ¼-ton, 4x4, M998
Van, TMP
T
AF
Sedan, TMP
Bus
R
Trailer
Water Buffalo
D
Generator Set
Table E-9-1. Vehicle, Trailer, Water Buffalo, and Generator Planning Matrix.
E-9-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-10
EFMB PLANNING CHECKLISTS

coordination and planning matrices for units hosting EFMB testing. Chapters 2, 3, and
4 provide additional information on the various phases associated with hosting EFMB
testing. The other sections in Appendix E provide detailed information on planning
EFMB testing.
E-10-2. USE OF EFMB PLANNING CHECKLISTS.
a. Tables E-10-1 is designed as an example EFMB planning checklist for active

Army unit who is not deployed.
b. Tables E-10-2 is designed as an example EFMB planning checklist for an Army

Reserve or National Guard unit who is not deployed.
c. Tables E-10-3 is designed as an example EFMB planning checklist for an Army

unit who is requesting to conduct EFMB testing while deployed.
T
d. Units should use these as an example and add applicable information as needed.
AF
They are not all encompassing, but show the main actions that must occur in hosting
EFMB testing. Actions listed in the example EFMB planning checklists are not
necessarily in the order they have to be performed.
R
D
E-10-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Action Deadlines to EFMB TCO

Analyze Ability to Conduct EFMB Testing
Appoint Test Board Chairperson, OIC, and NCOIC
Submit Request to Conduct the EFMB to the EFMB TCO NLT 120 Days Prior TSD
Prepare and Forward MOI and Candidate Letter to Units
and EFMB TCO for Posting on the EFMB TCO Website
Checks EFMB TCO Website Weekly for Updates and
Material to Assist in Executing the EFMB
Schedule EFMB Testing Areas and Support Facilities
Request Equipment, Vehicles, Supplies, Personnel and
Meal Support, Pyro/Ammo, Porta-potties, and Dumpsters
Request Personnel and Other Resources
Designate EFMB Test Board Members
Appoint Lane and Event NCOICs/OICs and Evaluators
Schedule and Conduct In Progress Reviews (IPRs)
Ensure that Candidates and Their Units Are Training Their
Soldiers for EFMB Testing
Conduct Training to Prepare Evaluators for Their Duties
Conduct Training as Needed for Drivers, Pyro Handlers,
Safety, etc.
Request Necessary Transportation
T
AF
Submit Concept Briefing to the EFMB TCO NLT 60 Days Prior TSD
Prepare Risk Management Worksheets
Receive Candidate Names and Information
R
Submit Exceptions to Policy to the EFMB TCO NLT 45 Days Prior TSD
D
Communicate any Problems, Issues, and Questions to the

EFMB TCO for Assistance or Clarification
Confirm all Requests
Notify Candidates of Any Approved Exceptions to Policy NLT 30 Days Prior TSD
Verify Candidate Names
Sign for EFMB Testing Areas and Support Facilities
Sign for Equipment, Vehicles, Supplies, Personnel and
Establish and Prepare EFMB Operations Center
Establish and Prepare EFMB Testing Areas/Evaluators
Establish and Prepare the Living Support Area
Provide for After-Duty-Hours Site Security
Test Board Chairperson Receives Written Test
Test Board Member Reviews Written Test
Test Board Member Makes Copies of Written Test
Review and Revise Risk Management Worksheets
Conduct Validation
In-Process Personnel and Verify Candidates’ Eligibility
Conduct Standardization
E-10-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Conduct Testing
Prepare EFMB Orders and Provide Copies
Conduct Awards Ceremony
Out-Process Personnel
Recovery Operations and Post-EFMB Requirements
Conduct After Action Review
Provide Certificates of Verification/Destruction to TCO IAW Suspense Dates
Provide EFMB Testing Statistics to the EFMB TCO NLT 3 Days After TED
Provide Copy of EFMB Database to the EFMB TCO NLT 3 Days After TED
Provide Copies of EFMB Awardees’ Orders to TCO NLT 1 Week After TED
Provide Written Test Answer Sheets to EFMB TCO NLT 1 Week After TED
Provide AAR and copies of rebuttals to the EFMB TCO NLT 1 Week After TED
NOTE: Test Start Date (TSD), Test End Date (TED).
Table E-10-1. Example EFMB Planning Checklist for Active Army Unit (Not
Deployed).
T
AF
R
D
E-10-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

T
Safety, etc.
AF
R

D

Conduct Validation
E-10-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Conduct Testing
Table E-10-2. Example EFMB Planning Checklist for Army Reserve or National
Guard Unit (Not Deployed).
T
AF
R
D
E-10-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

Obtain Approval from CFLCC and Senior Medical
Commander in Area
Submit Approval Memorandum from CFLCC and Senior NLT 120 Days Prior TSD
Medical Commander in Area
Provide Detailed Answers to Figures 2-1 and 2-2 to the NLT 120 Days Prior TSD
EFMB TCO
T
AF
R

D

Safety, etc.
E-10-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10

Conduct Validation
Conduct Testing
T
AF
Table E-10-3. Example EFMB Planning Checklist for Deployed Army Unit.
R
D
E-10-7
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-10-8
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
APPENDIX E-11
PLANNING EFMB TRAINING
E-11-1. GENERAL. The information contained within this appendix provides a

highlight of the EFMB training material available on the EFMB Website (see paragraph
2-21). Training Soldiers for EFMB testing is the responsibility of their chain of
command; it is not the responsibility of the unit hosting EFMB testing. All units will train
their Soldiers prior to sending them to the EFMB test site (see paragraph 2-14).
E-11-2. PLANNING EFMB TRAINING.
a. The commencement of an EFMB training program should occur as soon as you

know that you or your Soldiers will be attending EFMB testing. Procrastination,
absence of training, or lack of training prior to arriving at the EFMB test site normally
does not have a positive outcome.
b. Example training schedules are available to plan your EFMB training program.
c. Presentations are available to assist you in planning and executing a successful

EFMB training program. T
AF
d. All of the material discussed in this appendix is available on the EFMB TCO
R
e. The EFMB TCO may be contacted with any questions in regards to preparing
yourself or your Soldiers for EFMB testing (see paragraph 2-21).
D
E-11-3. EFMB TRAINING MATERIAL.
a. Units and candidates should be cautious in utilizing EFMB training material

obtained from other sources other than the EFMB TCO. Information obtained from
other sources is outdated, irrelevant for EFMB testing purposes, or contains errors.
b. Figure E-11-1 depicts some of the EFMB training material available to assist you
in planning and executing a successful EFMB training program. The information
available may change, but updates will be available on the EFMB TCO Website.
E-11-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMB TRAINING MATERIAL

Prepared by the EFMB Test Control Office
EFMB Written Test Training:
• Slideshows on every area of 91W STP Manual
• Jeopardy Games
• Written Test Training Workbook
o Fill in the Blank
o Matching
o Crossword Puzzles
o Word Searches
o Magic Squares
• Flash Cards
• Bingo Cards
EFMB Hands On Training:
• Slideshows on every task
• Lesson Plans for every task
EFMB References
• AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10 with changes T
• FM 21-10
• FM 8-10-6
AF
• STP 8-91W15-SM-TG
• EFMB Grade Sheets with Performance Steps and Measures
• EFMB Video
R
• GTAs
D
Training Schedules:
• Lunchtime EFMB Train-Up (7 weeks)
• Week EFMB Train-Up (6 days)
• SGT’s Time and After Duty Hours EFMB Train-Up (8 weeks)
• Weekend EFMB Train-Up (6 weeks)
• Self Preparation Training List
• EFMB Train-Up Written Test Homework List
EFMB Train-Up Risk Management Worksheets
EFMB Training Test Templates
• PPT Multiple Choice
• Multiple Choice
• True or False
EFMB Train-Up Concept Brief
EFMB Train-Up MOI
Request for Slots for EFMB Train-Up
EFMB Train-up Packing List
IPR Worksheet
IPR Slideshow
Calendar/Schedule Planner
E-11-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Logistical Spreadsheets/Checklist
• Budget
• Class VIII Supplies
• Admin Supplies
• Misc. Supplies
• Ammo/Pyro/Blanks
• Contracts
• TASC
• CIF
• Vehicles and Transportation
• Training Areas
• Contacts
To Do List
Work Plan
Coordination/Pre-execution Checklist
Training MOI
Risk Management Worksheet
Training Concept Sketch
Instructor Checklist
Timeline T
Training Materials and Supplies Sign Out Sheet
AF
Training Sign-In Roster
Visitor Sign-In Roster
Training AAR Form
R
Training Evaluation Form

Instructor Performance Review by Candidates
D
Suggestion Form
Name Plates for Candidate’s Desks/Tables
Seating Charts
EFMB Bookmarks
Attendance Roster
Training Gradebook
Training Tracker Matrix
Post EFMB Train-Up Feedback Form to Units
Post EFMB Train-Up After Action Report (AAR)
Weapon Qualification Marksmanship Fundamentals PPT Slideshow
APFT Administration PPT Slideshow
Heat/Cold Weather Injury Prevention PPT Slideshows
Training Area/Door Sign
• Placards for all EFMB Tasks
• Placards for Instructor Names
• Placards for Start and End Times
Counseling Forms:
• Initial, Midpoint, and Final Counseling for Candidates
E-11-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
• Counseling for Cadre and Support Personnel

Certificates:
• Certificates of Training for Candidates
• Certificates of Appreciation for Supporting Agencies
• Certificates of Achievement for Cadre
• Certificates of Achievement for Support Personnel
In-processing Sheets
• Cadre
• Candidates
EFMB TOC Material:
• Reports
o Equipment Status and Accountability
o Personnel Accountability
• TOC Board Items:
o Threatcon
o Weather
o WBGT Tracker
o Equipment and Personnel Stats
• Pyro Distribution Matrix
• Vehicle Manifest T
• Driver Qualifications
AF
• Sign-In/Out Rosters
o Visitor
o Cadre
R
o Candidate
o Support Personnel
D
• Key Control Log

• Weapon Sign-In/Out Log
• Duty Roster
• Vehicle Parking Pass
• Commo Desk Instructions
• Guard Duty Instructions
• Tent/Sleep Area Bunk Roster
• Tent/Sleep Area Signs
• Binder
o Binder Covers
o Spine Covers
o Table of Contents
• Blank Forms in Word Format
EFMB Example Candidate Packet
• Commander’s Memo
• APFT Card
• Weapons Qualification Card
• AHA CPR Certification
FY EFMB Program PPT
E-11-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMB Fact Sheet

EFMB Statistical History PPT
“WHAT TO EXPECT AT EFMB” PPT Slideshow
EFMB Train-Up In-briefing PPT Slideshow
“GUIDE TO CONDUCTING EFMB TRAINING” PPT Slideshow
Table E-11-1. EFMB Training Material.
T
AF
R
D
E-11-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
T
AF
R
D
E-11-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
GLOSSARY
SECTION I
Abbreviations.
ACU
Army Combat Uniform
AHA
American Heart Association
AHS
Academy of Health Sciences
AMEDD
Army Medical Department
AMEDDC&S
US Army Medical Department Center and School
ANCD
automated net control device
T
AF
AOC
area of concentration
R
APFT
D
Army Physical Fitness Test
AR
Army regulation
ASIP
Advanced System Improvement Program
ATNAA
antidote treatment, nerve agent, autoinjectors
BDU
battle dress uniform
BTLS
basic trauma life support
CASEVAC
casualty evacuation
F-1
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
CBRN
Chemical, Biological, Radiological and Nuclear
CFLCC
Coalition Forces Land Component Command
cm
centimeters
CMB
Combat Medical Badge
COMSEC
communications security
CPR
cardiopulmonary resuscitation
CPT T
captain
AF
CTA
common table of allowances
R
CTL
combat testing lane
D
CVC
combat vehicle crewman
DA
Department of the Army
DD
Department of Defense
DSN
defense switched network
DVC
device
EFMB
Expert Field Medical Badge
F-2
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
EFMC
Expert Field Medical Competition
EIB
Expert Infantry Badge
FH
frequency hop
FM
field manual
FRAGO
fragmentary order
GTA
graphic training aid
IAW
in accordance with T
IED
AF
improvised explosive devise
IEDK
R
individual equipment decontamination kit

D
IV
intravenous
LCE
load-carrying equipment
LOC
litter obstacle course
MEDEVAC
medical evacuation
mm
millimeters
MOPP
mission-oriented protective posture
F-3
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
MOS
military occupational specialty
NBC
nuclear, biological, and chemical
NCOIC
noncommissioned officer in charge
NPA
nasopharyngeal airway
NSN
national stock number
OIC
officer in charge
OPORD
operation order T
pam
AF
pamphlet
SDK
R
skin decontaminating kit

D
SFC
sergeant first class
SGT
sergeant
SINCGARS
single channel ground and airborne radio system
SMCT
Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks
SOI
signal operation instructions
SOP
standing operating procedure
F-4
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
SPC
specialist
SSN
social security number
STP
soldier training publication
TC
training circular
TCCC
Tactical Combat Casualty Care
TCO
tactical combat casualty care
TCO
test control office(r) T
TM
AF
technical manual
UXO
R
unexploded ordnance
D
WBGT
wet bulb globe temperature
WQ
weapons qualification
WT
written test
2 PAM Cl
pralidoxime chloride
SECTION II
Terms.
Battlefield scenario
Simulated combat conditions and situations created for evaluating Soldiers on tasks.
F-5
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
Combat lane
A path or trail used to evaluate candidates on a set of tasks under simulated combat
conditions.
Esprit de corps
The common spirit existing in members of a group that inspires devotion, enthusiasm, and
strong regard for the honor of the group.
Lane validation
The validation process conducted by the EFMB Test Board prior to the standardization and
test week to ensure that tasks are tested IAW this publication.
Moulage
A simulation of a medical wound or injury used as a training aid.
Reaction-style testing
Simulated combat conditions that are created in which soldiers are tested against
preestablished standards for reaction performance.
Standardization review T
A review conducted by the TCO to ensure that EFMB tests are administered consistently
throughout the Army IAW this publication.
AF
Standardization week
The week prior to test week in which candidates are shown the tasks, conditions, and
R
standards on which they are to be evaluated.

D
Test deviation. A deviation from the standards outlined in this publication during testing.
SECTION III
Special Abbreviations and Terms.
CML
Combat Medical Lane
CTL
Combat Testing Lane
F-6
AMEDDC&S Pam 350-10
(MCCS-HTE)
FOR THE COMMANDER:
OFFICIAL: MONICA M. ARZOLA

Secretary of the General Staff
EARNEST C. BRIDGES
Chief, Human Resources
And Administration
DISTRIBUTION:
T
This publication is available in electronic media only and is intended for local
AF
distribution.
R
SPECIAL DISTRIBUTION:
2 – IMSW-SMH-HRM-G (Mrs. Walker)
D
D
R
AF
T

AMEDD&S PAM 350-10 New

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AMEDD&S PAM 350-10 New

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AMEDD&S PAM 350-10 New

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AMEDDC&S Pamphlet No.

THIS PUBLICATION IS FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY.

IT DOES NOT CONTAIN ARMY APPROVED DOCTRINE.

Draft Date 12 October 2006

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

The Expert Field Medical Badge (EFMB) was designed

Medical Badge may be awarded to all officers

assigned or detailed to an Army Medical Department

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

FREQUENCY OF EFMB TEST ......................................................... 2-4 2-3

*This pamphlet supersedes AMEDDC&S Pamphlet 350-10, 2 Jan 04.

CHAPTER 3. SITE ESTABLISHMENT, VALIDATION, AND STANDARDIZATION

CHAPTER 4. CONDUCT EFMB TESTING

CHAPTER 5. EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL COMPETITION (EFMC)

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................... 5-1 5-1

APPENDIX A: REFERENCES ....................................................................................A-1

APPENDIX B: REPRODUCIBLE SCORE SHEETS AND REBUTTAL SHEETS ........B-1

WARRIOR SKILLS TASKS SCORE SHEETS.................................................... B-5-1

APPENDIX C: GRAPHIC TRAINING AIDS ............................................................... C-1

APPENDIX D: REPRODUCIBLE FORMS AND CERTIFICATES .............................. D-1

APPENDIX E: EFMB PLANNING MATERIAL.............................................................E-1

PLANNING EFMB TRAINING ...........................................................................E-11-1

APPENDIX F: GLOSSARY ......................................................................................... F-1

1-4. REFERENCES. References are listed in Appendix A.

2.1 THE EFMB.

(1) Recognize qualified AMEDD personnel who demonstrate a high degree of

(3) All commissioned officers assigned or detailed to an AMEDD corps. This

serving in comparable medical positions.

(1) Volunteer for EFMB testing.

(2) Be recommended by their unit commander.

(6) Possess a current cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) certification. The

2-3. PROVISIONS AND AUTHORITIES.

b. The Commander, Army Medical Department Center and School (AMEDDC&S) is

c. Commanders of the following types of units, in the grade of lieutenant colonel or

(2) Sustainment brigade commanders.

2-5. REQUESTING TO CONDUCT THE EFMB TEST. T

b. EFMB testing requires a large commitment of equipment and personnel.

(3) Approval memorandum from the Coalition Forces Land Component

(4) Request to administer the EFMB test IAW paragraph 2-5c.

(5) Provide additional information pertinent to the planning and execution of an

Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB Testing

How many candidates can you support for EFMB Testing?

Figure 2-1. Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB Testing.

Additional Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB Testing

Safety/Risk Management/THREATCON: Have all safety and security issues been

Figure 2-2. Additional Questions to Analyze Prior to Requesting to Conduct EFMB

EFMB Planning Active Army Unit Army Reserve and Deployed

Table 2-1. EFMB Planning Material Checklist.

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

OFFICE SYMBOL Date

3. The following information is provided:

d. Location of field test site:

e. Number of Soldiers projected to begin EFMB testing:

f. EFMB test board chairperson:

2-6. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS.

a. The following is the basic sequence of events in an EFMB test cycle:

(1) Request to conduct EFMB testing.

(2) Plan the EFMB.

(3) Site establishment.